Documents
Resources
Learning Center
Upload
Plans & pricing Sign in
Sign Out

Backup Exec for WindowsNT (PDF)

VIEWS: 264 PAGES: 1439

									          VERITASTM Backup Exec 9.1 for
          Windows Servers

          Administrator’s Guide




N120578
Disclaimer
The information contained in this publication is subject to change without notice. VERITAS Software
Corporation makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this manual, including, but not limited to,
the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. VERITAS Software
Corporation shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages
in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this manual.

VERITAS Legal Notice
Copyright © 2003 VERITAS Software Corporation. All rights reserved. VERITAS, the VERITAS logo,
and all other VERITAS product names and slogans are trademarks or registered trademarks of
VERITAS Software Corporation. VERITAS, VERITAS Backup Exec for Windows Servers, the VERITAS
logo, Reg. U.S. Pat. & Tm. Off. Other product names and/or slogans mentioned herein may be
trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
VERITAS Software Corporation
350 Ellis Street
Mountain View, CA 94043
USA
Phone 650–527–8000 Fax 650–527–2908
www.veritas.com

Third-Party Copyrights

Douglas C. Schmidt and his research group at Washington University and University of California, Irvine
ACE (TM) is copyrighted by Douglas C. Schmidt and his research group at Washington University and University of California, Irvine,
Copyright (c) 1993-2002, all rights reserved.

Apache Software Foundation
Apache Tomcat 4.0, Apache Xerces C++ 1.2.0 and 1.3.0
Apache Software License
Version 1.1
Copyright (c) 2000 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/)."Alternately, this acknowledgment
may appear in the software itself, if and wherever such third-party acknowledgments normally appears.
4. The names "Apache" and "Apache Software Foundation" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
prior written permission. For written permission, please contact apache@apache.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Apache", nor may "Apache" appear in their name, without prior written permission of
the Apache Software Foundation.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE APACHE SOFTWARE FOUNDATION OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Apache Software Foundation. For more information
on the Apache Software Foundation, please see <http://www.apache.org/>. Portions of this software are based upon public domain software
originally written at the National Center for Supercomputing Applications, University of Illinois, Urbana-Champaign.

Crystal Decisions, Inc. (formerly Seagate Software Information Management Group, Holdings, Inc.
Crystal Reports 8.5
Use, duplication, reproduction, or transfer of this commercial software and accompanying documentation is restricted in accordance with FAR
12.212 and DFARS 227.7202 and by a license agreement. Contact: Crystal Decisions, Inc., Attn: Contrcts Department, 895 Emerson Street, Palo Alto,
CA 94301.

Nebiru Software Inc. (dba DomAPI)
DomAPI LIbrary 5.0 Copyright 2001-2003

Boris Fornitchev
STLPort 3.2.1
Copyright 1999,2000 Boris Fomitchev
This material is provided "as is", with absolutely no warranty expressed or implied. Any use is at your own risk. Permission to use or copy this
software for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided the above notices are retained on all copies. Permission to modify the code and
to distribute modified code is granted, provided the above notices are retained, and a notice that the code was modified is included with the above
copyright notice. The Licensee may distribute binaries compiled with STLport (whether original or modified) without any royalties or restrictions.
The Licensee may distribute original or modified STLport sources, provided that: (i) The conditions indicated in the above permission notice are
met; (ii) The following copyright notices are retained when present, and conditions provided in accompanying permission notices are met:
Copyright 1994 Hewlett-Packard Company
Copyright 1996,97 Silicon Graphics
Computer Systems, Inc.
Copyright 1997 Moscow Center for SPARC Technology.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided
that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
documentation. Hewlett- Packard Company makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is"
without express or implied warranty. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is
hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission
notice appear in supporting documentation. Silicon Graphics makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is
provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for
any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and
this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. Moscow Center for SPARC Technology makes no representations about the suitability
of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.

Carnegie Mellon University and The Regents of the University of California
ucd-snmp 4.1.1 Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University
Derivative Work -Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California All Rights Reserved Permission to use, copy, modify and
distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice
appears in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of
CMU and The Regents of the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without
specific written permission.
CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE,
INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF THE
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.

Ronald L. Rivest
Copyright (C) 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. Created 1991. All rights reserved.
License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the "RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all
material mentioning or referencing this software or this function.
License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are identified as "derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc.
MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing the derived work.
RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this software or the suitability of this software for any
particular purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty of any kind.
These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation and/or software.

Wei Dai
Compilation Copyright (c) 1995-2003 by Wei Dai. All rights reserved.
This copyright applies only to this software distribution package as a compilation, and does not imply a copyright on any particular file in the
package.
The following files are copyrighted by their respective original authors, and their use is subject to additional licenses included in these files.
mars.cpp - Copyright 1998 Brian Gladman.
All other files in this compilation are placed in the public domain by Wei Dai and other contributors.
I would like to thank the following authors for placing their works into the public domain:
Joan Daemen - 3way.cpp
Leonard Janke - cast.cpp, seal.cpp
Steve Reid - cast.cpp
Phil Karn - des.cpp
Michael Paul Johnson - diamond.cpp
Andrew M. Kuchling - md2.cpp, md4.cpp
Colin Plumb - md5.cpp, md5mac.cpp
Seal Woods - rc6.cpp
Chris Morgan - rijndael.cpp
Paulo Baretto - rijndael.cpp, skipjack.cpp,
square.cpp
Richard De Moliner - safer.cpp
Matthew Skala - twofish.cpp
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this compilation for any purpose, including commercial applications, is hereby granted without
fee, subject to the following restrictions:
1. Any copy or modification of this compilation in any form, except in object code form as part of an application software, must include the above
copyright notice and this license.
2. Users of this software agree that any modification or extension they provide to Wei Dai will be considered public domain and not copyrighted
unless it includes an explicit copyright notice.
3. Wei Dai makes no warranty or representation that the operation of the software in this compilation will be error-free, and Wei Dai is under no
obligation to provide any services, by way of maintenance, update, or otherwise. THE SOFTWARE AND ANY DOCUMENTATION ARE
PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL WEI DAI OR ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR BE
LIABLE FOR DIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
4. Users will not use Wei Dai or any other contributor's name in any publicity or advertising, without prior written consent in each case.
5. Export of this software from the United States may require a specific license from the United States Government. It is the responsibility of any
person or organization contemplating export to obtain such a license before exporting.
6. Certain parts of this software may be protected by patents. It is the users' responsibility to obtain the appropriate licenses before using those
parts.
If this compilation is used in object code form in an application software, acknowledgement of the author is not required but would be
appreciated. The contribution of any useful modifications or extensions to Wei Dai is not required but would also be appreciated.

Maarten Hoeben
ReportCtrl.h 2.0.1

Stac Electronics
Copyright (C) Stac Electronics 1993, including one or more U.S. patents No. 4701745, 5016009, 5126739 and 5146221 and other pending patents.
Administrator’s Guide - Table of Contents
          Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31


      Chapter 1. Introducing Backup Exec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
          What’s New in This Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
          Backup Exec Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
          How Backup Exec Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40


      Chapter 2. Installing Backup Exec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
          System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
          Changing Windows Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
          Installing Backup Exec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
               Installing Backup Exec Using the Installation Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
               Installing Backup Exec Options on a Local Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
               Installing Backup Exec Media Servers to Remote Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
               Installing Backup Exec Remote Agents and Options on Remote Servers . . . . . . . . 58
               Installing Backup Exec from the Command Line (Silent Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
          Registering Backup Exec Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
          Repairing Backup Exec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
          Starting and Stopping Backup Exec Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
          Uninstalling Backup Exec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
          Installing the Backup Exec Remote Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
          Using VERITAS Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
          Upgrading from Previous Versions of Backup Exec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
          Upgrading Backup Exec Options on Remote Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77


                                                                                                                                     1
    Chapter 3. Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
        Before Starting Backup Exec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
        Starting Backup Exec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
        First Time Startup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
        Using the Administration Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
             Using Backup Exec Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
             Using the Overview View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
             Using the Backup Exec Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
        Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
        Backup Exec Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
             Changing Default Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
             Changing General Job Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93


    Chapter 4. Managing Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
        Viewing Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
             Viewing Media Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
        Configuring Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
             Hot Swap for Storage Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
             Pausing, Resuming, and Renaming Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
        Using Drive Pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
             Creating Drive Pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
             Adding Drives to a Drive Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
             Setting Priorities for Drives in a Drive Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
             Deleting Drives from a Drive Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
             Deleting Drive Pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
             Retargeting Jobs from a Deleted Drive Pool or Media Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
             Renaming a Drive Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
             Viewing Drive Pool Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
        Using Cascaded Drive Pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
             Requirements for Using Cascaded Drive Pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113


2                                                                                                                Administrator’s Guide
                    Creating a Cascaded Drive Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
                    Adding Drives to a Cascaded Drive Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
                    Deleting Drives from a Cascaded Drive Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
                    Deleting a Cascaded Drive Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
                    Renaming a Cascaded Drive Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
                    Viewing Properties of a Cascaded Drive Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
                Viewing Server Properties and Running Server Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
                Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
                    Viewing General Drive Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
                    Viewing Drive Configuration Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
                    Viewing Drive SCSI Information Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
                    Viewing Drive Statistics Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
                    Viewing Drive Cleaning Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
                    Viewing and Specifying a Drive’s Media Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
                Using Robotic Libraries with Backup Exec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
                    Configuring a Robotic Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
                     Viewing Properties of a Robotic Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
                    Creating Robotic Library Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
                    Redefining Robotic Library Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
                Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
                    Adding a Backup Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
                    Renaming a Backup Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
                    Changing the Path of a Backup Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
                    Deleting a Backup Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
                    Recreating a Backup Folder and Its Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
                    Pausing and Resuming a Backup Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
                    Viewing Backup Folder Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
                    Renaming a Backup File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
                    Deleting a Backup File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
                    Recreating a Deleted Backup File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163


Administrator’s Guide - Table of Contents                                                                                           3
             Viewing and Changing Backup File Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
        Using Microsoft’s Removable Storage Feature with Backup Exec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
             Using Media in Drives Managed by Removable Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
        Creating Utility Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
             Inventorying Media in Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
             Erasing Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
             Erasing Backup Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
             Retensioning a Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
             Formatting Media in a Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
             Labeling Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
             Ejecting Media from a Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
             Setting Up Cleaning Jobs for Robotic Library Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
             Importing Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
             Exporting Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
             Locking the Robotic Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
             Unlocking the Robotic Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189


    Chapter 5. Managing Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
        Media Overwrite Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
             Default Media Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
             Media Overwrite Protection Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
             Media Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
             Media Overwrite Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
             Media Append Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
             Overwriting Allocated or Imported Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
             Removing Damaged Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
        Media Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
             Imported Media Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
             Bar Code Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
             Renaming Media Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208


4                                                                                                                Administrator’s Guide
                 Setting Default Media Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
                 Media Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
                      Creating User-defined Media Vaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
                      Finding Media in a Location or Vault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
                      Renaming a User-defined Media Vault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
                      Adding Media to the Offline Location or a User-Defined Vault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
                      Moving Media by Dragging and Dropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
                       Deleting a User-defined Media Vault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
                 Media Rotation Strategies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
                      Son Media Rotation Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
                      Father/Son Media Rotation Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
                      Grandfather Media Rotation Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
                      Running the Media Rotation Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
                 Media Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
                      Deleting Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
                      Moving Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
                      Viewing General Media Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
                      Viewing Media Management Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
                      Viewing Media Statistical Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
                      Viewing Media Cleaning Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
                 Media Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
                      Running the Media Set Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
                      Creating Media Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
                      Deleting a Media Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
                      Renaming a Media Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
                      Editing and Viewing Media Set Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236


             Chapter 6. Backing Up Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
                 Creating a Backup Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
                      Using the Backup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242


Administrator’s Guide - Table of Contents                                                                                                     5
         Creating a Manual Backup Job by Configuring Job Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
    Selecting Data to Back Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
         About Selecting Distributed File System (Dfs) Links for Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
         Including or Excluding Files for Backup Using Advanced File Selection . . . . . . 269
         Changing the Order for Processing Backup Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
         Changing Logon Accounts for Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
    Using Selection Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
         Creating Selection Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
         Using Selection Lists to Create a Backup Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
         Merging and Replacing Selection Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
         Deleting Selection Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
         Editing Selection Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
         About the Excludes Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
    Setting Up User-defined Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
    Using Backup Job Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
         Creating a New Backup Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
         Editing a Backup Job Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
         Creating a Copy of a Backup Job Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
         Creating a New Backup Job from a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
         Reapplying a Template to Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
    Using Backup Exec’s Windows Explorer Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
         Specifying or Changing Backup Settings for Windows Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
         Submitting a Backup Job from Windows Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
    Running a One-button Backup Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
    Archiving Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
         Archiving Data Using Disk Grooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
    Using Resource Discovery to Search for New Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
         General Options for Resource Discovery Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
         Resources Options for a Resource Discovery Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
    Duplicating Backed Up Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307


6                                                                                                            Administrator’s Guide
                    General Options for a Duplicate Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
                    Advanced Options for a Duplicate Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
                Verifying a Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
                Creating a Test Run Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
                    General Options for Test Run Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
                    Setting Test Run Default Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
                Setting Default Backup Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
                Setting Default Pre/Post Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
                Specifying Backup Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
                    Specifying the Default Backup Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
                    Changing the Backup Network for a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
                Using Backup Exec with Firewalls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
                    Browsing Systems Through a Firewall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
                Protecting Windows Server 2003 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
                    About the Backup Exec Shadow Copy Components File System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
                    Protecting Upgraded Windows Server 2003 Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
                Backing Up Utility Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
                Backing Up NetWare Network Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
                About Backup Strategies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
                    Choosing a Backup Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
                    Understanding Backup Methods and Their Advantages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
                    Understanding the Archive Bit and Backup Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
                    Understanding Modified Time and Backup Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361


             Chapter 7. Administrating Backup Exec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
                Configuring Logon Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
                    Default Backup Exec Logon Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
                    Backup Exec System Logon Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
                    Creating a Backup Exec Logon Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
                    Editing a Backup Exec Logon Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368


Administrator’s Guide - Table of Contents                                                                                            7
             Replacing a Backup Exec Logon Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
             Deleting a Backup Exec Logon Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
             Changing Your Default Backup Exec Logon Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
             Creating a New Backup Exec System Logon Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
             Viewing and Clearing the Audit Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
        Scheduling Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
             Editing the Job Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
             Configuring Default Schedule Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
             Configuring Holiday Scheduling for Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
        Monitoring Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
             Viewing and Filtering Jobs in the Job List View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
             Viewing and Filtering Jobs in the Calendar View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
             Viewing and Changing Active Job Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
             Viewing and Modifying Scheduled Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
             Viewing Completed Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
        Error-Handling Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
             Configuring Error-Handling Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
        Configuring Database Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
        Using ExecView in Backup Exec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
             Configuring ExecView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409


    Chapter 8. Restoring Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
        Restore Operations and the Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
             Cataloging Media in a Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
             Setting Catalog Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
             Catalog Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
        Restoring Data to a Server or Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
             Using the Restore Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
             Creating a Manual Restore Job by Configuring Job Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
             Restoring File Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436


8                                                                                                                Administrator’s Guide
                     Restoring System State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
                     Restoring Windows Server 2003 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
                     Restoring Utility Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
                     Restoring Distributed File System (Dfs) Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
                     Restoring Media Created With Other Backup Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
                 Selecting Data to Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
                     Using the Resource View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
                     Using the Media View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
                     Changing Resource Credentials for Restore Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
                     Using Advanced File Selection to Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
                     Searching for Files to Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
                     Restore Operations and Media Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
                 Redirecting a Restore Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
                     Using Redirected Restore for Active Directory, Active Directory Application Mode,
                     and Install from Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
                 Setting Restore Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
                 Specifying the Restore Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
                 Canceling a Restore Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
                 Catalog Icon Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463


             Chapter 9. Alerts and Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
                 Viewing and Filtering Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
                 Viewing Alert Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
                 Responding to Active Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
                 Viewing the Job Log for Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
                 Clearing Informational Alerts from the Active Alerts Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
                 Enabling or Disabling Alerts from the Active Alerts Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
                 Configuring Alert Category Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
                     Viewing and Clearing the Audit Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
                 Deleting Alerts from the Alert History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
                 Configuring E-mail and Pager Notification Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483

Administrator’s Guide - Table of Contents                                                                                            9
              Configuring SMTP E-Mail for Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
              Configuring MAPI E-Mail for Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
              Configuring VIM E-Mail for Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
              Configuring a Pager for Alert Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
         Configuring Recipients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
              Configuring SMTP Mail for a Person Recipient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
              Configuring MAPI Mail for a Person Recipient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
              Configuring VIM Mail for a Person Recipient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
              Configuring a Pager for a Person Recipient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
              Configuring a Net Send Recipient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
              Configuring a Printer Recipient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
              Configuring a Group Recipient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
              Scheduling Notification for Recipients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
              Editing Recipient Notification Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
              Editing Recipient Notification Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
              Removing Recipients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
         Assigning Recipients to Alert Categories for Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
         Selecting Recipients for Job Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
         Configuring SNMP Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
         Adding Windows Management Instrumentation Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
              Uninstalling WMI Providers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517


     Chapter 10. Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
         Viewing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
         Running a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
         Running and Viewing a New Report Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
         Viewing Report Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
         Available Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
              Active Alerts Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
              Alert History Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533


10                                                                                                               Administrator’s Guide
                    Audit Log Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
                    Backup Sets by Media Sets Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
                    Configuration Settings Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
                    Device Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
                    Error-Handling Rules Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
                    Event Logs Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
                    Media Set Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
                    Media Vault Contents Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
                    Operations Overview Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
                    Robotic Library Inventory Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
                    Scratch Media Availability Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
                    Test Run Results Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546


             Chapter 11. Disaster Preparation and Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
                Key Elements of a Disaster Preparation Plan (DPP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
                Disaster Preparation of the Windows Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
                    Returning to the Last Known Good Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
                    Creating a Hardware Profile Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
                    Creating an Emergency Repair Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
                    Using Windows’ Automated System Recovery and System Restore to Recover a
                    Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
                    Creating and Using an Emergency Boot Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
                Manual Disaster Recovery of Windows Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
                    Disaster Recovery of a Local Windows NT Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
                    Disaster Recovery of a Remote Windows NT Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
                    Disaster Recovery of a Local Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 Computer (includes
                    non-authoritative restore of Active Directory for a domain controller) . . . . . . . . 565
                    Disaster Recovery of a Remote Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 Computer (includes
                    non-authoritative restore of Active Directory for a domain controller) . . . . . . . . 567




Administrator’s Guide - Table of Contents                                                                                           11
     Chapter 12. Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
         General Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
         Hardware-related Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
         Backup Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
         Restore Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
         Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584


     Chapter 13. VERITAS Backup Exec - Workstation Agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
         The Backup Exec Windows 98 and Windows Me Agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
              Requirements for Running the Backup Exec Windows 98/Me Agent . . . . . . . . . 588
              Installing the Backup Exec Windows 98/Me Agent on the Workstation . . . . . . . 589
              Configuring the Backup Exec Windows 98/Me Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
              Publishing Drives and Directories Using the Backup Exec Windows 98/Me Agent
              592
              Configuring the Network Protocol for the Backup Exec Windows 98/Me Agent . .
              594
         The Backup Exec Macintosh Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
              Requirements for Running the Backup Exec Macintosh Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
              Installing and Configuring the Macintosh Agent on a Mac OS X Workstation . . 597
              Modifying the NetInfo Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
         About the Backup Exec UNIX Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
              Requirements for Running the Backup Exec UNIX Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
              Installing the Backup Exec UNIX Agent on the Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
              Configuring the Backup Exec UNIX Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
         Troubleshooting Workstation Agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608


     Chapter 14. VERITAS Backup Exec - Command Line Applet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
         Command Line Applet Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
         Using the Command Line Applet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
         Using Command Line Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
              Switches Used With All Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612


12                                                                                                                Administrator’s Guide
                    Backup Job Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
                    Switches for Administrating Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
                    Restore Job Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
                    Switches for Viewing and Responding to Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
                    Switches for Error Handling Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
                    Switches for Managing Media and Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
                    Backup Exec Services Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
                    Logon Account Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
                    Report Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
                    Setting Default Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
                Using Backup or Restore Job Script Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
                    Creating a Backup Job Script File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
                    Creating a Restore Job Script File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
                    Saving and Launching the Backup or Restore Job Script File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
                Using Scripts and Selection Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
                    Creating a Selection List Script File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
                Using Scripts and Backup Job Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
                    Creating a Backup Job Template Script File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
                    Creating a Backup Job Template Using a Script File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
                    Creating a Backup Job from a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
                Using a Schedule Script with Device and Media Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
                Understanding Job Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756


             Chapter 15. Using VERITAS Backup Exec with Server Clusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
                How Backup Exec Works in a Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
                Requirements for Installing Backup Exec on a Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
                Installing Backup Exec on a Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762
                    Upgrading Backup Exec on a Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763
                    Installing Additional Backup Exec Options on a Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764
                    Uninstalling Backup Exec From A Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764


Administrator’s Guide - Table of Contents                                                                                            13
     Creating Drive Pools for Clusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
     Using Checkpoint Restart on Cluster Failover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
         Enabling or Disabling Checkpoint Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768
     Specifying A Different Failover Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770
     Designating a New SAN SSO Database Server in a Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772
     Configurations for Backup Exec and Clusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
         Two-node Cluster with Locally-attached Storage Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
         Two-node Cluster with Tape Devices on a Shared SCSI Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
         Two-node Clusters on a Fibre Channel SAN with the SAN SSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779
         Four-node Clusters on a Fibre Channel SAN with the SAN SSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781
     Backing Up Clusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783
         Backing Up Windows 2000 and Windows Server 2003 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784
         Backing Up Local Disks in a Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
         Backing Up Shared Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
         Backing Up Database Files in a Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786
     Restoring Data To Clusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788
         Restoring Windows 2000 and Windows Server 2003 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788
         Restoring the Cluster Quorum for Windows 2000 and Windows Server 2003 Sys-
         tems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789
         Restoring the Cluster Quorum to a Windows 2000 or Windows Server 2003 Node
         Running Active Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790
         Specifying a New Drive Letter for the Cluster Quorum Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792
     Disaster Recovery of A Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794
         Using IDR to Prepare for Disaster Recovery of A Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
         Recovering Nodes on the Cluster Using IDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
         Recovering Backup Exec on a Cluster Using IDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
         Recovering the Entire Cluster Using a Manual Disaster Recovery Procedure . . 797
         Recovering the Cluster Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799
         Recovering All Shared Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800
         Recovering Clustered Backup Exec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801
     Troubleshooting Clusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801

14                                                                                                                 Administrator’s Guide
             Chapter 16. VERITAS Backup Exec - Web Administration Console . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
                 Requirements for BEWAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
                 Installing BEWAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
                      Starting BEWAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
                 Differences Between BEWAC and Backup Exec for Windows Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
                      Accessing Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805
                 Navigating in BEWAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
                 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
                 Viewing, Clearing, and Responding to Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808


             Chapter 17. Backup Exec Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
                 Starting the Backup Exec Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810
                 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811
                 Completing Tasks using the Backup Exec Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
                 Running Backup Exec Utility General Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814
                      Add a New Media Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814
                      Create a New Media Server Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
                      Delete a Media Server from the All Media Servers Subnode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
                      Delete a Media Server Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817
                      Run Backup Exec Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818
                      View Media Server Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819
                 Running Backup Exec Utility Services Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820
                      Stop Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820
                      Start Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821
                      Change Service Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821
                      Edit Server Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823
                 Running Backup Exec Utility SAN SSO Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
                      Set the Primary SAN SSO Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
                      Remove the Primary SAN SSO Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
                      Configure the SAN SSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828


Administrator’s Guide - Table of Contents                                                                                                       15
            Promote a Media Server to a Primary SAN SSO Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
            Move the Primary SAN SSO Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830
        Running Database Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831
            Check the Database Consistency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832
            Age the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832
            Compact a Media Server Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
            Dump a Media Server Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
            Rebuild Media Server Database Indices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834
            Repair a Media Server Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834
            Recover a Media Server Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
            Change the SQL Server sa Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836
            Change Database Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837
        Running Media Server Group Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
            Add Media Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
            Remove a Media Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
        Running Cluster Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840
            Edit Cluster Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840


     Appendix A. VERITAS Backup Exec - Remote Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843
        Requirements for the Remote Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845
        Installing the Remote Agent to Remote Windows Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845
            Installing the Remote Agent on a 64-bit Computer Using the Installation Program
            846
            Installing and Uninstalling the 32-bit Remote Agent to Remote Windows Comput-
            ers Using the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847
            Installing and Uninstalling the 64-bit Remote Agent and Advanced Open File Op-
            tion Using a Command Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848
        Stopping and Starting the Remote Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849
        Backing Up Data in a Mixed Environment Using the Remote Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850




16                                                                                                             Administrator’s Guide
             Appendix B. VERITAS Backup Exec -
             Admin Plus Pack Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851
                 Installing the Admin Plus Pack Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851
                 Using a Clone CD Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
                      Creating a Clone CD Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
                      Installing Locally Using a Clone CD Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
                      Installing to a Remote System Using a Clone CD Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853
                 Copying Jobs, Selection Lists, and Job Templates
                 Between Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855
                 Advanced Reporting Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857
                      Scheduling Report Jobs and Setting Notification Recipients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859
                      Active Alerts by Media Server Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
                      Alert History by Media Server Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
                      Backup Job Success Rate Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862
                      Backup Set Details by Resource Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863
                      Backup Size By Resource Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864
                      Backup Success Rate Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865
                      Daily Job Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
                      Daily Network Device Utilization Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867
                      Device Usage by Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868
                      Event Recipients Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868
                      Failed Backup Jobs Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869
                      Job Distribution by Device Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870
                      Job Queue Status Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870
                      Job Templates Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 871
                      Machines Backed Up Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872
                      Media Required for Recovery Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 873
                      Move Media to Vault Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874
                      Overnight Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874
                      Problem Files Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875
                      Recently Written Media Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876

Administrator’s Guide - Table of Contents                                                                                               17
           Resource Risk Assessment Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877
           Retrieve Media from Vault Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878
           Scheduled Server Workload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878
           Template Definition Usage Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879


     Appendix C. VERITAS Backup Exec - Intelligent Disaster Recovery Option . . . 881
           Requirements for Using IDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884
           Installing the IDR Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884
           Using an Evaluation Version of the IDR Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885
       Getting Started with IDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885
       Setting Data Paths for the *.dr Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888
       Creating and Updating Recovery Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891
           Choosing Generic or Current SCSI Drivers for Windows NT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893
           Requirements for Running the IDR Preparation Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894
           Running the IDR Preparation Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 896
           Creating A Full Set of Diskettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897
           Creating a Bootable CD Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901
           Creating a Bootable Tape Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903
           Creating the Intelligent Disaster Recovery Diskettes Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905
           Updating the Full Set of Disaster Recovery Diskettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907
           Updating the Intelligent Disaster Recovery Diskettes Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909
           Updating Bootable Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912
           Preparing IDR Media Via Other Media Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
       Using IDR to Recover a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917
           Changing Hardware in the Computer to be Recovered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 918
           Using IDR To Recover IBM Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
           Using IDR To Recover Windows 2000 Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
           Booting the Computer in an IDR Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
           Using the Windows Setup in an IDR Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923
           Using the Disaster Recovery Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926


18                                                                                                         Administrator’s Guide
                    Altering Hard Drive Partition Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930
                    Recovering Computers Requiring OEM-Specific SCSI Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 931
                    Performing a Manual Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932
                    Performing Remote IDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933
                    Microsoft SQL Server Recovery Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936
                    Microsoft Exchange Recovery Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937
                    SharePoint Portal Server Recovery Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937


             Appendix D. VERITAS Backup Exec - SAN Shared Storage Option . . . . . . . . . . . . 939
                    Requirements for the SAN Shared Storage Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941
                    Installing the SAN Shared Storage Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942
                About Devices in the Shared Storage Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 943
                    Monitoring Drives in the Shared Storage Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944
                    Viewing Media in the Shared Storage Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946
                    Using Drive Pools with the SAN Shared Storage Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947
                    Using Device Operations with the SAN Shared Storage Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948
                    Sharing Robotic Libraries Between Backup Exec for NetWare Servers and Backup
                    Exec for Windows Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
                    Scheduling and Viewing Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956
                    Sharing Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958
                    Cataloging Media in SAN SSO Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958
                    Media Rotation in SAN SSO Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959
                Designating a New Database Server and Setting Up Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960
                    Tips for Maintaining the Database Server
                    and the ADAMM Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960
                    Creating a Standby Primary Database Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961
                    Starting and Stopping Backup Exec Services on Multiple Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 962
                Troubleshooting and Recovering Failed Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963
                    Checklist for Troubleshooting Devices That Have Gone Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963
                    Replacing a Fibre to SCSI Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965
                    Replacing the Hub or Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966


Administrator’s Guide - Table of Contents                                                                                             19
     Appendix E. VERITAS Backup Exec - ServerFree Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967
            Understanding ServerFree Backup Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967
            ServerFree Backup Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970
            Installing the ServerFree option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972
            Running the ServerFree Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973
            Restoring A ServerFree Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975


     Appendix F. VERITAS Backup Exec - Advanced Open File Option . . . . . . . . . . . 977
        Understanding the Advanced Open File Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977
            Snapshot Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978
            Requirements for Using the Advanced Open File Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980
        Installing the Advanced Open File Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981
            Installing and Uninstalling the Advanced Open File Option to Remote Windows
            Servers Using the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982
            Uninstalling the Advanced Open File Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983
        Changing the Advanced Open File Option Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 984
        Using the Advanced Open File Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987
            Selecting the Advanced Open File Option for a Single Backup Job . . . . . . . . . . . 987
            Setting Advanced Open File Option as the Default Setting for All Backup Jobs . 989
            Checking the Job Log When Using the Advanced Open File Option . . . . . . . . . . 991
        Snap Starting a VERITAS Volume Manager Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992
        Advanced Open File Option Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993


     Appendix G. VERITAS Backup Exec - Agent for Microsoft SQL Server . . . . . . . 999
        Requirements for Using the SQL Agent with SQL 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000
        Installing the SQL Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001
        Using Backup Exec Logon Accounts for SQL 2000 Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002
        Backup Strategies for SQL 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004
        Consistency Checks for SQL 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006
        Using the Advanced Open File Option with SQL 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007
        Setting Backup Options for SQL 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008


20                                                                                                           Administrator’s Guide
                     Backing Up SQL 2000 Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012
                    Backing Up SQL 2000 Filegroups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014
                    Backing Up SQL 2000 Transaction Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016
                Restore Options for SQL 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018
                About Restoring SQL 2000 Databases and Filegroups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023
                    Restoring from SQL 2000 Database Backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024
                    Restoring from SQL 2000 Transaction Logs Up to a Point in Time . . . . . . . . . . . 1025
                    Restoring from SQL 2000 Transaction Logs Up to a Named Transaction . . . . . . 1026
                    Restoring from SQL 2000 Filegroup Backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027
                    Restoring the SQL 2000 Master Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1030
                    Redirecting Restores for SQL 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032
                Setting Default Backup and Restore Options for SQL 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035
                Preparing for Disaster Recovery of SQL 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041
                Disaster Recovery of SQL 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1042
                    Manual Recovery of SQL 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1043
                 About the Agent for SQL 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047
                Requirements for Agent for SQL 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1048
                Installing the SQL Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049
                Using Backup Exec Logon Accounts for SQL 7.0 Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1050
                Backup Strategies for SQL 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1052
                Consistency Checks for SQL 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054
                Setting Backup Options for SQL 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055
                    Backing Up SQL 7.0 Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1058
                    Backing Up SQL 7.0 Filegroups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1060
                    Backing Up SQL 7.0 Transaction Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1062
                Restore Options for SQL 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064
                About Restoring SQL 7.0 Databases or Filegroups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1068
                    Restoring from SQL 7.0 Database Backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1070
                    Restoring from SQL 7.0 Transaction Logs Up to a Point in Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071
                    Restoring from SQL 7.0 Filegroup Backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072


Administrator’s Guide - Table of Contents                                                                                        21
           Restoring the SQL 7.0 Master Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074
           Redirecting Restores for SQL 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1076
       Setting Default Backup and Restore Options for SQL 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1079
       Preparing for Disaster Recovery of SQL 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1084
       Disaster Recovery of SQL 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1085
           Manual Recovery of SQL 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1086
       Protecting SQL Server on Windows Server 2003 Using the SQL Server Writer . . . 1089
           Backing up SQL Server Using the SQL Server Writer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089
           Restoring SQL Server Using the SQL Server Writer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1090


     Appendix H. VERITAS Backup Exec - Agent for Microsoft Exchange Server . . 1093
       About Using the Exchange Agent with Exchange 2000 and 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1093
           Requirements for Using the Exchange Agent with Exchange 2000 and 2003 . . 1094
       Installing the Exchange Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1094
       Using Backup Exec Logon Accounts with Exchange 2000 and 2003 Resources . . . 1095
       Backup Strategies for Exchange 2000 and 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1096
           Recommended Configurations for Exchange 2000 and 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099
       Backup Options for Exchange 2000 and 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100
       Backing Up Exchange 2000 and 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1104
           Reviewing Circular Logging for Exchange 2000 and 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105
       Backing Up Exchange 2000 and 2003 Mailboxes and Public Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106
       Restore Options for Exchange 2000 and 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1111
       Restoring Exchange 2000 and 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1114
            . . .Redirecting Exchange 2000 and 2003 Storage Group and Database Restores 1115
       Restoring Exchange 2003 Data Using the Recovery Storage Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1117
           Redirecting Exchange 2003 Restores Using the Recovery Storage Group . . . . . 1119
       Restoring Exchange 2000 and 2003 Mailboxes and Public Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121
           Redirecting Mailbox and Public Folder Restores in Exchange 2000 and 2003 . . 1123
       Setting Default Backup and Restore Options for Exchange 2000 and 2003 . . . . . . . 1127
       Preparing for Disaster Recovery of Exchange 2000 and 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131


22                                                                                                      Administrator’s Guide
                Disaster Recovery for Exchange 2000 and 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1132
                About Using the Exchange Agent with Exchange 5.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135
                 Requirements for Using the Exchange Agent with Exchange 5.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135
                Installing the Exchange Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1136
                Using Backup Exec Logon Accounts with Exchange 5.5 Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1136
                Backup Strategies for Exchange 5.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1137
                    Recommended Configurations for Exchange 5.5 Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139
                Backup Options for Exchange 5.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1140
                Backing Up Exchange 5.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1144
                    Reviewing Circular Logging for Exchange 5.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145
                Backing Up Exchange 5.5 Mailboxes and Public Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145
                Restore Options for Exchange 5.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1149
                Restoring Exchange 5.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1151
                    Redirecting Exchange 5.5 Database Restores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1153
                Restoring Exchange 5.5 Mailboxes and Public Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1155
                    Redirecting Mailbox and Public Folder Restores in Exchange 5.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1157
                Setting Default Backup and Restore Options for Exchange 5.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1161
                Preparing for Disaster Recovery of Exchange 5.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1167
                Disaster Recovery for Exchange Server 5.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1168
                Protecting Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 Using the Exchange Writer . . . . . . . . . 1171
                    Backing Up Exchange Server 2003 Using the Exchange Writer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1172
                    Restoring Exchange Server 2003 Using the Exchange Writer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1173


             Appendix I. VERITAS Backup Exec - Library Expansion Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1175
                Setting Up Robotic Library Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1175
                    Configuring Multi-drive Robotic Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1176
                Installing the Library Expansion Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1177
                Starting Backup Exec After Installing
                the Library Expansion Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1177
                    Viewing Robotic Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1179



Administrator’s Guide - Table of Contents                                                                                        23
     Appendix J. Backup Exec Desktop and Laptop Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181
        How the Desktop and Laptop Option Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1182
        Installing the Backup Exec Desktop and Laptop Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184
             Updating DLO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184
             Deploying the Desktop Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184
        Using the DLO Administration Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1186
             Creating Administrator Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1187
             Connecting to a Backup Exec Media Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1187
             The DLO Overview View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189
        Setting Up DLO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191
             Creating DLO Storage Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191
             Setting up a DLO Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1195
             Configuring the Global Exclude List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1206
             Setting up Automated User Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1206
             Managing Desktop Agent Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1212
        Restoring Files and Folders from the DLO Administration Console . . . . . . . . . . . . 1219
             Searching for Desktop Files to Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1222
             Deleting a Desktop Computer from DLO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1223
        Monitoring DLO Job Histories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1224
             Setting Job History View Filters on the DLO Administration Console . . . . . . . . 1227
        Monitoring Alerts on the DLO Administration Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1228
             Configuring Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1232
             Managing Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1233
             Alert Grooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1234
        Maintaining the DLO Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235
        Clustering the Desktop and Laptop Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235
        Using the Desktop Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1238
             Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1238
        System Requirements for the Desktop Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1239
             Using the Desktop Agent Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1240


24                                                                                                              Administrator’s Guide
                     Installing the Desktop Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1244
                     Using the Desktop Agent to Back Up Your Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1245
                     Modifying Desktop Agent Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1253
                     Synchronizing Desktop User Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1257
                     Viewing the Desktop Agent Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1262
                     Restoring Files Using the Desktop Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1263
                     Searching for Desktop Files to Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1266
                     Monitoring Job History in the Desktop Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1268
                Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1271
                     Troubleshooting the DLO Administration Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1271
                     Troubleshooting the Desktop Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1275
                Glossary of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1277


             Appendix K. VERITAS Backup Exec - Agent for Oracle Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1281
                Requirements for Using the Oracle Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1282
                Backup Strategies for An Oracle Database Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1282
                     Types of Oracle Database Data You Can Protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1283
                Requirements for Configuring the Oracle Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1284
                     Creating a New Oracle User Account for the Oracle Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1285
                     Verifying ARCHIVELOG Mode and Automatic Archival Settings . . . . . . . . . . . 1285
                     Running Multiple Database Instances on a Single Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1287
                     Using Fully Specified Paths for Oracle Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288
                     Understanding the Oracle Agent Configuration Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1289
                Installing the Oracle Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1290
                     Configuring the Oracle Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1291
                     Adding Media Servers to Use with the Oracle Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1294
                Backing Up Data Using the Oracle Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1295
                     Backing Up an Entire Online Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1295
                     Backing Up Individual Online Tablespaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1297
                     Backing Up a Closed Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1298


Administrator’s Guide - Table of Contents                                                                                             25
        Restoring the Oracle Database Using the Oracle Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1299
            Restoring an Online Oracle Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1300
            Restoring a Closed Oracle Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1301
            Restoring Individual Tablespaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1302
            Restoring the Database Control File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1303
        Disaster Recovery Using the Oracle Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1304
            Disaster Recovery Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1304
            Recovering a Remote Oracle Database Server from a Disaster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305
            Recovering a Combination Oracle Database Server/Media Server . . . . . . . . . . 1306
        Oracle Agent Error Message Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1307


     Appendix L. VERITAS Backup Exec - Agent for Lotus® Domino™ . . . . . . . . . . 1309
        Lotus Domino Agent Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1310
        Installing the Lotus Domino Agent on the Media Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311
        Viewing and Selecting Lotus Domino Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1312
        Configuring Default Lotus Domino Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314
        Backing Up Lotus Domino Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315
            Supported Lotus Domino Database Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315
            Lotus Domino Transaction Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1316
        Backup Options for Lotus Domino Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1317
        Restoring Lotus Domino Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1320
            Selecting Lotus Domino Databases for Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1321
        Restore Options for Lotus Domino Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1323
            Redirecting Restore Jobs for Lotus Domino Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1324
        Preparing for Disaster Recovery on a Lotus Domino Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1325
            Disaster Recovery of a Lotus Domino Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1326
            Disaster Recovery of a Lotus Domino Server Using Archive Logging . . . . . . . . 1327
            Disaster Recovery of a Lotus Domino Server Using Circular Logging . . . . . . . . 1328




26                                                                                                   Administrator’s Guide
             Appendix M. VERITAS Backup Exec - Agent for R/3 for Oracle Server                                           . . . . . . . 1329
                     Backup Exec R/3 Agent Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1330
                    Backup Exec Alerts and the BACKINT Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1331
                    Requirements for Backup Exec R/3 Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1331
                    Installing the Backup Exec R/3 Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1332
                Using the R/3 Agent to Back Up the R/3 Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1332
                    Specifying Backup Exec Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1333
                    Backing Up the R/3 Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1335
                Restoring the R/3 Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1336
                Disaster Recovery Using the Backup Exec R/3 Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1337
                    Disaster Recovery Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1338
                    Recovering a Remote R/3 Database Server from a Disaster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1338
                    Recovering a Combination R/3 Database Server/Media Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339


             Appendix N. VERITAS Backup Exec - Agent for Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server
             1341
                Requirements for the SharePoint Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1342
                Installing the SharePoint Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1343
                Backing Up a SharePoint Portal Server or Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1343
                    Backing Up Folders and Documents from a SharePoint Portal Workspace . . . . 1343
                Restoring SharePoint Portal Servers and SharePoint Portal Workspaces . . . . . . . . . 1345
                    Restoring a SharePoint Portal Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1345
                    Restoring a SharePoint Portal Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1346
                    Redirecting SharePoint Portal Server Restore Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1347
                    Redirecting SharePoint Portal Workspace Restore Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1348
                Disaster Recovery of a SharePoint Portal Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1351
                    Uninstalling and Reinstalling the SharePoint Portal Server Software . . . . . . . . . 1352
                    Restoring SharePoint Portal Server Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1352




Administrator’s Guide - Table of Contents                                                                                     27
     Appendix O. VERITAS Backup Exec - Remote Agent for NetWare Servers . . . 1353
       Requirements for the Remote Agent for NetWare Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1354
           Maximizing Remote Agent Performance on the NetWare Server . . . . . . . . . . . . 1354
       Installing the Remote Agent for NetWare Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1355
           Using NetWare Servers 5.x and 6.x in a TCP/IP Only Environment . . . . . . . . . 1356
           Adding BESTART to the AUTOEXEC.NCF File on the NetWare Server . . . . . . 1356
           Unloading the Remote Agent for NetWare Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357
       About Backing Up NetWare Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1358
           Backing up the NetWare Directory Services (NDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1359
           Backing Up NetWare Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1361
       About Restoring NetWare Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1363
           Restoring NetWare Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1363
       Default Settings for the Remote Agent for NetWare Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365
       Saving Configuration Information for the NetWare Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1368
       Disaster Recovery of NetWare Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1369


     Appendix P. VERITAS Backup Exec - Tivoli Storage Manager Option . . . . . . . 1371
           Requirements for the TSM Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1371
           Backup Exec as a TSM Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1372
           TSM Backup Exec Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1373
       Preparing the TSM Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1375
           Allocating Storage Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1375
           Creating The bexpi.dsm Storage Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1376
           Running the BEX.MAC Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1378
       Enabling TSM Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1379
       Changing the Defaults for Backup Exec for Windows Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1379
       BEX.MAC Macro Command Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1383
       Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1386
       Viewing TSM-related Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1386
           TSM Problem Resolutions for Backup Exec for Windows Servers . . . . . . . . . . . 1387


28                                                                                                            Administrator’s Guide
             Appendix Q. Accessibility and Backup Exec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1389
                 Keyboard Navigation and Shortcuts in Backup Exec 9.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1390
                      General Keyboard Navigation Within the GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1390
                      Keyboard Navigation Within Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1390
                      Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1392
                 Support for Accessibility Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1395


             Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1397


             Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1407




Administrator’s Guide - Table of Contents                                                                                          29
30   Administrator’s Guide
Using Backup Exec Documentation
      This comprehensive manual provides detailed information and procedures for using
      VERITAS Backup Exec for Windows Servers. Topics covered in this manual require the
      reader to have a working knowledge of the Windows operating environment.



Conventions
      The following conventions are used in this manual:



      Steps                          Numbered steps are listed as 1.,   2., …etc.

      Text that you type             Text that you are required to type on the keyboard is preceded
                                     by the word "Type" and may be followed by any keys that you
                                     must press:
                                     For example:
                                         Type a:install and press <Enter>.

      Text that you replace          Text that you must replace is shown in an italic font. For
                                     example:
                                         JOB_PRIORITY=priority

      Items on the interface         Items that are on the Backup Exec interface are shown in a
                                     bold font. For example:
                                         On the Properties pane, under Settings, click Exchange

      Keys                           Keys appear in angle brackets (< >). For example:
                                         <Enter>, <Esc>, <Del>, etc.
                                     When two or more keys need to be pressed simultaneously to
                                     perform a function, they appear in angle brackets with a plus
                                     sign. For example:
                                         <Shift + F1>




                                                                                          31
Conventions




       32     Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                                       Introduction
Introducing Backup Exec                                                                            1
     Backup Exec is a high-performance data management solution for Windows® servers
     networks. With its client/server design, Backup Exec provides fast, reliable backup and
     restore capabilities for servers and workstations across the network.
     Backup Exec is available in configurations that can accommodate multi-platform
     networks of all sizes:


     VERITAS Backup ExecTM     Installs on and protects any supported version of Microsoft Windows
     for Windows® Servers      Server 2003, Windows 2000, or Windows NT 4. Also includes Backup
                               Exec agent software to protect unlimited remote workstations
                               running on Windows XP Professional, Windows 2000 Professional,
                               Windows NT 4 Workstation, Windows Me, Windows 98, UNIX, and
                               Macintosh platforms.
                               This edition supports unlimited stand-alone drives. Support for a
                               single robotic library drive for use with Backup Exec is provided
                               when you purchase Backup Exec. To enable support for additional
                               robotic library drives, you must purchase the Library Expansion
                               Option.
                               Support for protecting additional Windows Server 2003, Windows
                               2000, or Windows NT 4 servers, NetWare servers, databases, open
                               files, and more can be purchased separately.




                                                                                        33
     Small Business Server   Installs on and protects supported versions of Microsoft Small
                             Business Server. Two versions of Backup Exec for Windows Small
                             Business Server are available: Standard and Premium.
                             The Standard version can be installed only on a computer with the
                             Microsoft Small Business Server Standard Edition operating system.
                             It includes the Backup Exec for Windows Servers Agent for Microsoft
                             Exchange Server and the Intelligent Disaster Recovery Option.
                             The Premium version can be installed on a computer with Microsoft
                             Small Business Server for Windows Server 2003, NT 4, or Windows
                             2000. It includes the Backup Exec for Windows Servers Agent for
                             Microsoft Exchange Server, Agent for Microsoft SQL Server, and
                             Intelligent Disaster Recovery Option.
                             You can purchase Small Business Server versions of the following
                             options to add to either the Standard or Premium versions: Library
                             Expansion Option, Advanced Open File Option, Desktop and
                             Laptop Option (75-user license only), and the Remote Agent for
                             Windows Servers.
                             Both the Standard and Premium versions support client
                             workstations running Windows XP Professional, Windows 2000
                             Professional, Windows NT 4 Workstation, Windows Me, Windows
                             98, and Windows XP.
                             This edition supports unlimited stand-alone drives. Support for a
                             single robotic library drive for use with Backup Exec is provided
                             when you purchase Backup Exec. To enable support for additional
                             robotic library drives, you must purchase the Library Expansion
                             Option.
                             To protect additional Windows 2000, or Windows NT 4 servers,
                             NetWare servers, or databases you must upgrade to the Backup Exec
                             for Windows Servers Edition.

     QuickStart Edition      Installs on and protects any supported version of Microsoft Windows
     (OEM release only)      Server 2003, Microsoft Windows NT 4 or Windows 2000. Also
                             includes Backup Exec agent software for workstations running on
                             Windows XP Professional, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows NT
                             4.0 Workstation, Windows Me, Windows 98, UNIX, and Macintosh
                             platforms.
                             This edition supports unlimited stand-alone drives. Support for a
                             single robotic library drive for use with Backup Exec is provided
                             when you purchase Backup Exec. To enable support for additional
                             robotic library drives, you must purchase the Library Expansion
                             Option.

     See also:
         “Backup Exec Options” on page 37


34                                                                           Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                                               Introduction
                                                                                 What’s New in This Release


What’s New in This Release
            This release of Backup Exec includes the following new features and capabilities:


            VERITAS Backup Exec         DLO enables you to protect employees’ data on their desktops and
            Desktop and Laptop          laptops. The Backup Exec Administrator sets the backup and restore
            Option (DLO)                rights for each employee. DLO backs up the employee’s data to a
                                        storage location on the network. The data on the network can then be
                                        backed up to media using Backup Exec.

            Support for Windows         The Backup Exec Web Administration Console (BEWAC) provides
            Storage Server 2003         support for Windows Storage Server 2003.

            Remote Agent support for The Remote Agent for 64-bit systems provides protection of remote
            64-bit systems           64-bit Windows resources. The 64-bit Remote Agent supports the:
                                           Shadow Copy Components file system
                                           Backup Exec Advanced Open File Option
                                           Backup Exec Agent for Microsoft SQL Server on a 64-bit version
                                           of SQL Server 2000

            Microsoft Exchange 2003     The Shadow Copy Components file system for Windows Server 2003
            Writer/Snaphot support      has been enhanced to include support for the Microsoft Exchange
                                        2003 Writer, which protects Microsoft Exchange 2003 via the Volume
                                        Shadow Copy Service snapshot.

            Protection of Microsoft     The Exchange Agent protects Microsoft Exchange 2003 data and
            Exchange 2003 via the       supports the Recovery Storage group feature.
            Exchange Agent

            Microsoft Small Business Two versions of Backup Exec for Windows Small Business Server are
            Server 2003 Standard and available: Standard and Premium.
            Premium versions         The Standard version can be installed only on a computer with the
                                     Microsoft Small Business Server Standard Edition operating system.
                                     It includes the Backup Exec for Windows Servers Agent for Microsoft
                                     Exchange Server and the Intelligent Disaster Recovery Option.
                                        The Premium version can be installed on a computer with Microsoft
                                        Small Business Server for Windows Server 2003, NT 4, or Windows
                                        2000. It includes the Backup Exec for Windows Servers Agent for
                                        Microsoft Exchange Server, Agent for Microsoft SQL Server, and
                                        Intelligent Disaster Recovery Option.




Chapter 1, Introducing Backup Exec                                                                35
What’s New in This Release



             Admin Plus Pack Option     When you select the Admin Plus Pack for installation, the following
             installation selection     are selected for installation:
             update                        Push Install Media Servers
                                           Admin Plus Pack Option Reports
                                           Push of Jobs
                                        If you want to include the Clone CD feature of the Admin Plus Pack
                                        Option, you must select it for installation.

             Quick Installation Guide   The Quick Installation Guide is a printed manual that is shipped
                                        with Backup Exec. It provides the information you need to install
                                        Backup Exec on a local server. It does not replace the Backup Exec
                                        Administrator’s Guide, which is available in electronic format on the
                                        Backup Exec installation CD or in printed format from the VERITAS
                                        DocStore.




        36                                                                               Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                                              Introduction
                                                                                       Backup Exec Options


Backup Exec Options
            You can purchase the following options for your Backup Exec configuration:
            ◆    VERITAS Backup Exec Library Expansion Option (LEO) enables support for
                 multi-drive tape or optical robotic libraries and library storage systems. When
                 utilizing the Advanced Device And Media Management (ADAMM) features, the
                 Library Expansion Option provides extensive configuration and management
                 capabilities which include unattended backup and restore operations, and bar code
                 reader and portal support. Device partitioning allows you to assign specific robotic
                 library slots for backup targets. For more information, see “VERITAS Backup Exec -
                 Library Expansion Option” on page 1175.
            ◆    VERITAS Backup Exec Advanced Open File Option ensures that all files on your
                 network are protected even if they are being used. Whether used alone or in
                 combination with specific database agents, this option handles open files at the
                 volume level and is seamlessly integrated with Backup Exec. You do not need to
                 know which files are open ahead of time; just set a scheduled backup to use this
                 option. For more information, see “VERITAS Backup Exec - Advanced Open File
                 Option” on page 977.
            ◆    VERITAS Backup Exec Intelligent Disaster Recovery Option (IDR) provides a
                 recovery solution for both local and remote Windows systems. This option eliminates
                 the need to manually re-install the entire operating system after a system crash. Using
                 diskettes, CD-R/CD-RW or bootable tape, IDR gets you back online fast allowing you
                 to restore from your last complete backup set - including full, incremental, differential
                 and working set backups. For more information, see “VERITAS Backup Exec -
                 Intelligent Disaster Recovery Option” on page 881.
            ◆    VERITAS Backup Exec Admin Plus Pack Option provides features designed for
                 distributed data management of your media and remote servers, including the ability
                 to create a clone CD image so you can install Backup Exec on additional servers using
                 the same installation settings. This option also allows you to copy jobs, selection lists,
                 and templates between media servers and provides advanced reporting capabilities,
                 such as scheduling a report and e-mailing report output. For more information, see
                 “VERITAS Backup Exec - Admin Plus Pack Option” on page 851.
            ◆    VERITAS Backup Exec Agent for Microsoft Exchange Server provides a fast and
                 flexible way of protecting your online Exchange 5.5 and Exchange 2000 and 2003
                 Server data. This agent provides complete individual mailbox backup (also utilizing
                 single instance restore), including protection for embedded messages, objects,
                 attributes and all Outlook components. For more information, see “VERITAS Backup
                 Exec - Agent for Microsoft Exchange Server” on page 1093.




Chapter 1, Introducing Backup Exec                                                              37
Backup Exec Options


             ◆   VERITAS Backup Exec Agent for Microsoft SQL Server fully protects active databases
                 and verifies all of your SQL v7.0 and SQL 2000 data automatically. SQL 7.0 and SQL
                 2000 users can customize their data protection needs down to the filegroup level. For
                 fast point-in-time backups, you can use this option to run transaction log backups
                 with truncation. Redirected restores allow you to easily restore SQL data to other SQL
                 servers on the network. Multi-pipe support along with SQL VDI provides users the
                 easiest and fastest way to complete SQL database protection. For more information,
                 see “VERITAS Backup Exec - Agent for Microsoft SQL Server” on page 999.
             ◆   VERITAS Backup Exec Remote Agent for NetWare Servers expands network-wide
                 data protection by providing a Client Access License (CAL), fully protecting all NDS
                 information across NetWare 5.1 and 6.x environments. In addition to backing up
                 NetWare servers from your Windows media server, you get 100 percent SMS
                 compatibility supporting the current versions of NetWare. The exclusive Agent
                 Accelerator ™ technology maximizes backup performance and reduces network
                 traffic by using source level compression and distributed processing. For more
                 information, see “VERITAS Backup Exec - Remote Agent for NetWare Servers” on
                 page 1353.
             ◆   VERITAS Backup Exec Remote Agent for Windows® Servers provides a Client Access
                 License (CAL) to enable protection of remote Windows servers. With its exclusive
                 Agent Accelerator™ technology, the Remote Agent uses source compression and
                 distributed processing to optimize backup performance. For more information, see
                 “VERITAS Backup Exec - Remote Agent” on page 843.
             ◆   VERITAS Backup Exec Agent for Oracle® provides seamless online backup protection
                 for Oracle Database Server versions 8.0.5, 8i-8.1.6, 9i and Oracle Application Server 9i.
                 Integrating Oracle backup with the advanced features of Backup Exec provides data
                 protection of both individual table spaces as well as complete Oracle databases. You
                 can also include archived redo files and control files without taking them offline. For
                 more information, see “VERITAS Backup Exec - Agent for Oracle Server” on
                 page 1281.
             ◆   VERITAS Backup Exec Agent for R/3™ for Oracle® Server provides superior data
                 protection by allowing backups of critical data while the application is still online and
                 in use. The R/3 Agent, certified by SAP, is a reliable solution that allows Backup Exec
                 to provide both local and remote protection of the latest versions of SAP™R/3™
                 databases utilizing the SAP (BC-BRI BACKINT) interface while enabling you to
                 efficiently manage your data. For more information, see “VERITAS Backup Exec -
                 Agent for R/3 for Oracle Server” on page 1329.
             ◆   VERITAS Backup Exec Agent for Lotus® Domino™ provides seamless online backup
                 protection for versions 5 and 6. Using Lotus Domino APIs, the Agent for Lotus
                 Domino now fully supports transactional logging, providing users with
                 uncompromising data protection of the entire Lotus Domino server. For more
                 information, see “VERITAS Backup Exec - Agent for Lotus® Domino™” on
                 page 1309.


        38                                                                            Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                                             Introduction
                                                                                      Backup Exec Options


            ◆    VERITAS Backup Exec SAN Shared Storage Option (SAN SSO) allows Backup Exec to
                 operate in a Storage Area Network (SAN), providing a high performance LAN-free
                 backup solution. SAN SSO allows multiple distributed media servers to share
                 common, centralized storage devices connected over a SAN. This configuration
                 provides greater efficiency and fault tolerance. In addition to increasing performance
                 and backup speeds in the SAN environment, the Shared Storage Option load balances
                 backup activity across multiple Backup Exec media servers and centralizes
                 management tasks while lowering the total cost of hardware ownership. For more
                 information, see “VERITAS Backup Exec - SAN Shared Storage Option” on page 939.
            ◆    VERITAS Backup Exec - Tivoli Storage Manager (TSM) Option lets you combine the
                 speed and localized control of Backup Exec with the TSM policy-based system of
                 centralized storage management. This option allows the TSM server’s storage
                 resources to appear as a robotic library in the list of target devices on the Backup Exec
                 server. Backup Exec administrators can then direct the output of any Backup Exec job
                 to the TSM server simply by selecting the name of the TSM robotic library as the
                 destination when submitting the job. For more information, see “VERITAS Backup
                 Exec - Tivoli Storage Manager Option” on page 1371.
            ◆    VERITAS Backup Exec - Agent for Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server protects all of
                 the files and attributes associated with an installation of SharePoint Portal Server.
                 Backup Exec, which offered the first complete backup and recovery solution for
                 SharePoint Portal Server, now allows backup and restore of individual workspaces
                 and documents. Restores can be made to the original SPS information store or
                 redirected to another SPS information store without affecting other workspaces. For
                 more information, see “VERITAS Backup Exec - Agent for Microsoft SharePoint Portal
                 Server” on page 1341.
            ◆    VERITAS Backup Exec - ServerFree Option enables you to increase backup
                 performance by freeing up media server processor resources and moving the backup
                 processing operations to hardware solutions that may be installed in your storage
                 area network environment. Use of this option requires VERITAS Backup Exec
                 Advanced Open File Option and VERITAS Backup Exec SAN Shared Storage Option.
                 For more information, see “VERITAS Backup Exec - ServerFree Option” on page 967.
            ◆    VERITAS Backup Exec - Desktop and Laptop Option enables you to protect all
                 business data. It provides continuous backup protection whether users are in the
                 office or on the road. Users can synchronize files between their desktop and laptop.
                 For more information, see “VERITAS Backup Exec - Desktop and Laptop Option” on
                 page 1181.




Chapter 1, Introducing Backup Exec                                                             39
How Backup Exec Works


How Backup Exec Works
            In Backup Exec, backup, restore, and utility operations, called jobs, are submitted using
            the Administration Console. Administrators can run the Administration Console from the
            media server, a Windows server with storage hardware attached, or from a remote system.
            After jobs are created, they are processed by the Backup Exec server components running
            on the media server. All interaction to the Backup Exec system, such as submitting jobs,
            viewing results, and performing device and media operations, can be done through the
            Administration Console.
            The following diagram illustrates how the components work together to provide
            complete backup and restore functionality to the entire network:

            How Backup Exec Works

                                                                Backup Exec
                                                            administration console




                                            Backup Exec database




                                        Backup Exec media server
                                         running the Backup Exec
                                                  engine                 Backup Exec workstation
               storage devices                                              and server agents
                  and media



            Through the Administration Console, you configure settings, called default options, that
            you want Backup Exec to use for most jobs. However, you can select to override these
            default options while setting up a specific jobs, such as a weekly backup of selected
            workstations. You can create a once-only job, such as a restore of a particular file to a
            server, or you can schedule recurring jobs, such as daily backup jobs.




       40                                                                            Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                                           Introduction
                                                                                 How Backup Exec Works


            Wizards guide you through most Backup Exec operations, including the creation of a
            backup or restore job, setting up media rotation jobs, and setting media overwrite
            protection.
            You can monitor a job’s progress through the Job Monitor, or use Backup Exec’s Calendar
            to quickly view all jobs scheduled to run for the day.
            The media server contains media and device databases designed to simplify the process of
            organizing and allocating storage devices attached to your media server and to aid in
            preventing media from being accidentally overwritten. Through Backup Exec’s device
            management functions, you can logically group storage devices together in drive pools.
            Through the media management function, you can organize, track, and troubleshoot all of
            the media in your library. You can define overwrite protection periods to ensure that
            media is not accidentally overwritten, set up automatic media labeling, and view media
            statistics such as the media’s age, hours of use, number of mounts, bytes written and read,
            and errors encountered, which are automatically tracked by Backup Exec.
            After a job has been processed, the job’s results are stored in a job history database. A
            record of the data that was backed up is kept in Backup Exec’s catalog. The job history is a
            report of what happened during the processing of the job (statistics, errors, and so on),
            and the catalog file is the record from which restore selections are made.




Chapter 1, Introducing Backup Exec                                                            41
How Backup Exec Works




       42               Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                                  Installation
Installing Backup Exec                                                                       2
     Backup Exec installation on the media server includes:
     ◆   Installing the storage device hardware (controller, drives, robotic libraries) in the
         media server. Refer to the documentation included with your storage device
         hardware for installation instructions. Use the appropriate Windows hardware setup
         functions to configure your controller and storage devices. (Refer to your Microsoft
         Windows documentation for more information.)
     ◆   Installing Backup Exec software on the media server. All Backup Exec program files
         are installed on the media server from the Backup Exec installation CD. During
         installation, files required for workstation agent installation are also copied to the
         media server.
     ◆   Rebooting the media server to initialize changes (when necessary).
     The installation program installs Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Desktop Engine (with Service
     Pack 3a) components required to run Backup Exec. These include SQL Server 2000 core
     components, MDAC 2.8, and ODBC 3.0. With ODBC, the installation program installs and
     configures the base 32-bit ODBC administrator v3.0, including runtime DLLs, and the
     ODBC driver for the Backup Exec catalogs.
     If you are running applications that use earlier versions of these components, problems
     may occur due to the upgraded drivers. If problems occur, contact the vendor of the
     incompatible software to obtain a version compatible with the MDAC.

     Caution The MDAC version that Backup Exec installs as part of the MSDE 2000
             installation is incompatible with a clustered version of Microsoft SQL Server
             7.0. Do not install Backup Exec on a clustered version of SQL 7.0 server.




                                                                                      43
System Requirements


            If SQL Server 2000 is already installed on the server, you are prompted to do one of the
            following:
            ◆   Install the required Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Desktop Engine (MSDE 2000)
                components with Backup Exec and create a default Backup Exec instance.
            ◆   Select a SQL Server 2000 instance that already exists on which to run Backup Exec.

            Note If you choose to install Backup Exec into an existing SQL 2000 instance, make sure
                 that SQL 2000 service pack 3a or later is installed before you continue with the
                 installation.

                  When Backup Exec is installed into an existing instance, the automated master
                  database restore feature is not available. To recover the Master database, you must
                  replace it with the Master database copy that Backup Exec automatically creates and
                  updates when the Master database is backed up.

                  When Backup Exec is installed into an instance other than a default Backup Exec
                  instance, the Cluster Configuration Wizard is not available.

            After installing Backup Exec on the media server, Backup Exec Workstation Agent
            software can be installed and configured on remote workstations on the network.



System Requirements
            The following are the minimum system requirements for running this version of Backup
            Exec:

            Minimum System Requirements

            Operating System           Microsoft Windows NT Workstation v4.0 or Microsoft Windows NT
                                       Server Operating System v4.0; Service Pack 6a or later.
                                       Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional version, Windows 2000 Server
                                       version, Windows 2000 Advanced Server, or Windows 2000
                                       Datacenter.
                                       Microsoft Windows Server 2003 server family.
                                       Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 1 or later.

            Internet Browser           Internet Explorer 5.01 or later; however, version 5.5 is recommended.

            Processor                  Pentium system.




       44                                                                               Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                         System Requirements

             Minimum System Requirements (continued)

             Memory                    Required: 256 MB RAM
                                       Recommended: 512 MB (or more for better performance).




                                                                                                               Installation
                                       Note RAM requirements may vary depending on operations
                                            performed, the options installed, and the specific machine
                                            configuration.
                                       Virtual Memory Recommendations: 20 MB above Windows
                                       recommended size for total paging file size (total for all disk
                                       volumes). To view or set the paging file size:
                                          On Windows NT, click the Start button, point to Settings, and
                                          then click Control Panel. Double-click System, and then click the
                                          Performance tab.
                                          On Windows 2000 or Windows Server 2003, click the Start
                                          button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel.
                                          Double-click System, click the Advanced tab, and then click
                                          Performance Options.

             Disk Space                550 MB hard disk space required after Microsoft Windows is
                                       installed (typical installation).

             Other Hardware               (Recommended if remote activity is to be performed) Network
                                          interface card or a virtual network adapter card.
                                          CD-ROM drive.
                                          (Optional) Printer supported by Microsoft Windows.
                                          (Recommended) A mouse.
                                          (Optional for pager notification) Modem supported by Windows.

             Storage Hardware          Backup Exec requires at least one storage media drive and/or robotic
                                       library and the appropriate controller card. Removable storage
                                       devices and non-removable hard drives can also be targeted for
                                       backups. Refer to the Backup Exec hardware compatibility list for a
                                       complete list of devices that are supported. Support for multi-drive
                                       robotic libraries is available separately. Refer to the Windows
                                       Hardware Compatibility list for a complete list of supported SCSI
                                       controllers.




Chapter 2, Installing Backup Exec                                                                   45
Changing Windows Security


Changing Windows Security
            You can set up Windows security with the Backup Exec service account to protect your
            data. Depending on how the Windows network is configured, change security properties
            for the following scenarios:
            ◆   Servers in one domain.
            ◆   Servers and selected workstations in one domain.
            ◆   Servers in more than one domain.
            ◆   Servers and workstations in more than one domain.
            The following procedures give the Backup Exec service account administrative rights in
            the appropriate domains and workstations. You must grant the Backup Exec service
            account administrative rights to give Backup Exec access to the administrative shares (for
            example, C$) and the ability to protect the Windows registry.
            Use one of the following procedures, as appropriate for the environment.
            ◆   For Windows NT 4.0, use the User Manager for Domains tool in the Administrative
                Tools group.
            ◆   For Windows 2000, use the Active Directory Users and Computers tool and Domain
                and Trusts tool in the Active Directory administrative tools group.

       ▼    If You Are Backing Up Servers (only) in One Domain:

            ❖   When prompted for a user name in the Service Account window, add the name of an
                existing or new Service Account (for example, Administrator) as a member of the
                local Administrators group for the Domain. It is highly recommended that you also
                enter a password.

       ▼    If You Are Backing Up Servers and Selected Workstations in One Domain:

            1. Add the name of an existing or new Service Account (for example, Administrator) as
               a member of the Global Domain Admins group.

            2. Ensure that on each workstation in the domain you want to back up, the Global
               Domain Admins group is a member of the workstation’s local Administrators group.




       46                                                                          Administrator’s Guide
                                                                           Changing Windows Security


        ▼    If You Are Backing Up Servers in More Than One Domain:

             1. Establish a One Way Trust Relationship between the Host Domain (the domain in
                which the media server resides) and the Target Domains (the domains that are to be




                                                                                                       Installation
                backed up):

                 a. In the Host Domain, permit the Target Domains to trust the Host Domain.

                 b. In each Target Domain, trust the Host Domain.

             2. In each Target Domain, add the Host Domain’s name of an existing or new Service
                Account (for example, Administrator) in the local Administrators group.

        ▼    If You Are Backing Up Servers and Workstations in More Than One Domain:

             1. Establish a One Way Trust Relationship between the Host and Target Domains:

                 a. In the Host Domain, permit the Target Domains to trust the Host Domain.

                 b. In each Target Domain, trust the Host Domain.

             2. In each Target Domain, add the Host Domain’s name of an existing or new Service
                Account (for example, Administrator) in the Local Administrators group.

             3. On each workstation to back up, add the Host Domain’s name of an existing or new
                Service Account (e.g., Administrator) in the Local Administrators group.




Chapter 2, Installing Backup Exec                                                          47
Installing Backup Exec


Installing Backup Exec
             When installing Backup Exec, use the installation program on the Backup Exec CD, or
             install it from the command line, which is referred to as Silent Mode Installation. The silent
             mode installation uses the setup.exe program on the Backup Exec CD.
             If you are installing an evaluation version of Backup Exec, you can install any additional
             options. To install the Backup Exec Web Administration Console, you must be installing
             Backup Exec on a server appliance or on a Windows Server 2003 server with the Remote
             Administration (HTML) components installed.
             Please note the following information before installing Backup Exec:

             Minimum system requirements

             Hardware                    Make sure that storage device hardware and associated drivers are
                                         properly installed and recognized by the Windows operating system.

             System                      Exit all programs before installing Backup Exec.

             Rights                      To install Backup Exec, Administrator rights are required, or the
                                         account must belong to an Administrator-equivalent group.




        48                                                                                  Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                       Installing Backup Exec

             Minimum system requirements

             The Backup Exec Service   All Backup Exec services on the media server run in the context of a
             Account                   user account configured for Backup Exec’s system services. This
                                       account can be created during Backup Exec’s installation, or an




                                                                                                                Installation
                                       existing user account can be used. To create a service account for
                                       Backup Exec during installation, supply a user name and password
                                       when prompted. The account designated for Backup Exec’s services -
                                       whether it is a new account or an existing user account - will be
                                       assigned the following rights:
                                           Authenticate as any user and gain access to resources under any
                                           user identity.
                                           Create a token object, which can then be used to access any local
                                           resources.
                                           Log on as a service.
                                           Administrative rights (provides complete and unrestricted rights
                                           to the computer).
                                           Backup operator rights (provides rights to restore files and
                                           directories).
                                           Manage auditing and security log.
                                       Due to security implementations in Microsoft Small Business Server,
                                       the service account must be "Administrator."
                                       On a computer running Windows Server 2003 or Windows XP, you
                                       cannot install Backup Exec using a service account that has a blank
                                       password. If you attempt to do so, the following error message
                                       displays when Backup Exec services are created:
                                       "The given password is not correct for account [server]\[username]."
                                       You can configure Windows to allow for blank passwords. For more
                                       information, see your Windows documentation.



             See also:
                 “Installing Backup Exec Using the Installation Program” on page 50
                 “Installing Backup Exec from the Command Line (Silent Mode)” on page 60




Chapter 2, Installing Backup Exec                                                                  49
Installing Backup Exec


        Installing Backup Exec Using the Installation Program
             The Backup Exec CD includes an installation program that guides you through the
             installation process.

             Note On Windows NT 4.0 Terminal Server Edition, you must install Backup Exec locally
                  on the Terminal Server using Add/Remove Programs, instead of using the Backup
                  Exec installation program. Because the Add/Remove program does not support
                  UNC paths, you will receive an error message if you attempt to install Backup Exec
                  from a Terminal Server Client.


             Note If you are installing Backup Exec through Terminal Services and the installation
                  media is on a shared drive (CD-ROM or network share), you must install it using a
                  UNC path. Installation via mapped drives is not supported in this situation.


        ▼    To install Backup Exec using the installation program:

             1. From the installation CD browser, select the option to install VERITAS Backup Exec.
                 The Welcome window appears.

             2. Click Next to proceed with the installation.
                 The License Agreement appears.

             3. Select I accept the terms of the license agreement, and then click Next.

             4. Do any of the following:
                 -   To install to a local computer, select Local Install and Install Backup Exec
                     software and options, click Next, and then continue with step 5 on page 51.
                 -   To install the Remote Administrator, go to “Installing the Backup Exec Remote
                     Administrator” on page 72.
                 -   To install Backup Exec media servers and options to remote computers, go to
                     “Installing Backup Exec Media Servers to Remote Computers” on page 54.
                 -   To install the Backup Exec Remote Agent for Windows Servers or the Advanced
                     Open File Option to remote computers, or the Backup Exec NetWare Agent to a
                     remote NetWare server, go to “Installing Backup Exec Remote Agents and
                     Options on Remote Servers” on page 58.




        50                                                                          Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                   Installing Backup Exec


             5. If Backup Exec Setup detects an existing installation of MS SQL Server 2000, you can
                allow the required Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Desktop Engine (MSDE 2000)
                components to be installed with Backup Exec and create a default Backup Exec
                instance, or you can choose to use a SQL Server 2000 instance that already exists on




                                                                                                            Installation
                which to run Backup Exec.
                 Select an option, and then click Next.
                 A dialog that requests your serial numbers appears.

             6. You can manually enter the serial numbers for Backup Exec and any options, or you
                can import an existing besernum.xml file to enter the serial numbers.
                 -    To manually enter the serial numbers for Backup Exec and any additional options,
                      type the serial number into the field, and then click Add. When finished, click
                      Next.
                 -    To import the serial numbers from a file, click Import, and then browse for and
                      select an existing besernum.xml file. When finished, click Next.

             Note When you click Next, the serial numbers you entered are saved to the file
                  besernum.xml, located in the Windows directory.

                      If another installation of Backup Exec 9.1 for Windows Servers is found on the
                      computer, the serial number appears in the Existing Serial Numbers field. To
                      remove an older serial number, select the number and click Remove. A serial
                      number is not required for Backup Exec’s fully functional evaluation version.
                 -    To install a 60-day evaluation copy of the software, click Next without entering
                      serial number information.
                      Installing an evaluation copy enables many options that must be purchased
                      separately and are not included as part of Backup Exec.

             Note For information about clustering Backup Exec, see “Installing Backup Exec on a
                  Cluster” on page 762.


             7. Review the local features to be installed.
                 All features that are not to be installed have an "X" displayed in the feature icon. To
                 enable any of these options, click the icon to clear the X, and then follow the prompts
                 to install it. If the feature icon is gray, the option is not available for change.




Chapter 2, Installing Backup Exec                                                             51
Installing Backup Exec


             8. To accept the local features for installation, and to accept the default Destination
                Folder for Backup Exec, click Next. To select another destination folder for Backup
                Exec, click Change, and follow the prompts.

             Note Selecting a mount point as the destination directory is not recommended because
                  the mount point is deleted if Backup Exec is uninstalled.


             9. Provide a user name and password that the Backup Exec system services can use (see
                “The Backup Exec Service Account” on page 49), and then click Next.

             10. If prompted, select how to install device drivers for the tape storage devices that are
                 connected to the server, and then click Next.
                 It is recommended that you select Use VERITAS device drivers for all tape devices.

             11. If you are prompted, enter information or choose settings for additional options being
                 installed. Click Next after each selection.

             12. Read the Backup Exec installation review, and then click Install.
                 The MSDE 2000 (if selected), VERITAS Update, and Backup Exec program files are
                 installed.

             13. When the installation is complete, you can choose to register Backup Exec online,
                 view the readme, create a shortcut to Backup Exec on the desktop, and restart the
                 computer.
                 If Restart System appears, restart the computer in order for the configuration to take
                 effect.
                 If the installation fails, an installation job log named bkupinst.log is created in the
                 Windows root directory on the computer where Backup Exec is installed; this file lists
                 any errors that may have occurred during installation. When prompted, click View
                 Installation Log.
             See also:
                  “Getting Started” on page 79




        52                                                                            Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                   Installing Backup Exec


        Installing Backup Exec Options on a Local Server
             You can install additional options, such as the Library Expansion Option, when you are
             installing Backup Exec by following the procedures described in “Installing Backup Exec
             Using the Installation Program” on page 50. However, if you have already installed




                                                                                                            Installation
             Backup Exec and want to install additional options, you should first review the section on
             that option to ensure that you have met all minimum requirements and then continue
             with the following steps.
             If you have installed the evaluation version of Backup Exec or have installed the Not For
             Resale (NFR) or the Open Option Suite edition, you can install evaluation versions of the
             additional options.

             Note If you are installing Backup Exec through Terminal Services and the installation
                  media is on a shared drive (CD-ROM or network share) you must install using a
                  UNC path. Installation via mapped drives is not supported.


        ▼    To install an option on a local media server:

             Note You can also install Backup Exec options using Add/Remove Programs in the
                  Windows Control Panel.


             1. Start Backup Exec for Windows Servers or verify that it is running.

             2. On the Tools menu, click Serial Numbers and Installation.

             3. Click Next when the Welcome window appears.

             4. Make sure Local Install and Additional Options are selected, and then click Next.

             5. Type the option’s serial number and click Add, or click Import to import the serial
                number from an existing besernum.xml file, and then click Next.

             6. Review the local features to be installed, and then click Next.
                 All features that are not to be installed have an "X" displayed in the feature icon. To
                 enable any of these options, click the icon to clear the X, and then follow the prompts
                 to install it. If the feature icon is gray, the option is not available for change.

             7. If you are prompted, enter information or choose settings for additional options being
                installed. Click Next after each selection.




Chapter 2, Installing Backup Exec                                                             53
Installing Backup Exec


             8. Read the Backup Exec installation review, and then click Install.
                 When the installation is complete, you can choose to register Backup Exec online,
                 view the readme, create a shortcut to Backup Exec on the desktop, and restart the
                 computer.

             9. Make your selections, and then click Finish.
                 If Restart System appears, you should restart the computer in order for the
                 configuration to take effect.
                 If the installation fails, an installation job log named bkupinst.log is created in the
                 Windows root directory on the computer where Backup Exec is installed; this file lists
                 any errors that may have occurred during installation. If prompted, click View
                 Installation Log, and check this log.

             10. After the computer has rebooted, restart Backup Exec for Windows Servers.


        Installing Backup Exec Media Servers to Remote Computers
             You can install Backup Exec media servers and options to remote computers.
             To install a Backup Exec media server to a remote computer, you must have one of the
             following installed on the local media server:
             ◆    The Admin Plus Pack option
             ◆   An evaluation version of Backup Exec
             ◆   The Not For Resale (NFR) option
             If you are installing Backup Exec through Terminal Services and the installation media is
             on a shared drive (CD-ROM or network share) you must install using a UNC path.
             Installation via mapped drives is not supported.




        54                                                                           Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                    Installing Backup Exec


        ▼    To install Backup Exec to a remote computer:

             1. Do one of the following:
                  -   If you are installing Backup Exec for the first time, from the installation CD




                                                                                                             Installation
                      browser, select the option to install VERITAS Backup Exec, and then when
                      prompted, click Next to proceed with the installation. Select I accept the terms of
                      the license agreement, and then click Next.
                  -   If Backup Exec is already installed, make sure that it is running, and then on the
                      Tools menu, click Serial Numbers and Installation. Click Next when the
                      Welcome window appears.

             Note You can also use Microsoft’s Add/Remove Programs utility to install Backup Exec
                  to a remote computer. See your Microsoft documentation for more information.


             2. To install Backup Exec media servers and options to remote computers, select
                Remote Install, and then click Next.

             Note If you do not need to install any Backup Exec options to the local computer, clear the
                  Local Install selection.


             3. On the Backup Exec Remote Features dialog box, in the Destinations Systems pane,
                right-click Windows Media Servers.

             4.   Do one of the following:
                  -   Select Add Remote Computer, browse to select the remote server, and then click
                      Next.
                  -   Select Add Remote Computer Manually, type the Domain and Computer Name,
                      and then click OK.

             5. Enter the user name, password and domain credentials of an account that has
                administrative rights on the remote computers, and then click OK.




Chapter 2, Installing Backup Exec                                                              55
Installing Backup Exec


             6. Select one of the following options:



                 Item                    Description

                 Remote install with     Select this option to enter serial numbers for the remote computers.
                 serialized options      During the install, you are prompted for the serial numbers for the
                                         remote computers.
                                         If you select this option to install a Backup Exec media server
                                         (Windows Media Server) to a remote computer, then you are
                                         prompted to select a destination folder.
                                         You can accept the default destination folder on the remote
                                         computer, or make changes.
                                         After selecting this option, continue with step 7 on page 56.

                 Remote install with     Select this option to install remotely using all of the installation
                 cloned local settings   options installed on the local computer. When this option is used,
                                         you cannot change any settings on the remote computer. For
                                         example, if you have installed the Intelligent Disaster Recovery
                                         option locally, this option will also be installed remotely.
                                         After selecting this option, continue with step 13 on page 52.

                 Remote install from     Select this option to install remotely using the clone file settings that
                 clone file settings     may be contained on a clone CD image or that could also be
                                         contained in a previously created parameter file (see “Creating and
                                         Using Installation Parameter Files” on page 66). When this option is
                                         selected, you can browse to a parameter file.
                                         After selecting this option, continue with step 13 on page 52.


                 A dialog that requests your serial numbers appears.

             Note Each remote computer targeted for an option installation must have a unique
                  option serial number.


             7. Do one of the following:
                 -   Enter the serial numbers for Backup Exec and any additional options, clicking
                     Add after entering each serial number. When finished, click Next.
                 -   Click Import, and then browse for and select an existing besernum.xml file. When
                     finished, click Next.

             Note When you click Next, the serial numbers you entered are saved to the file
                  besernum.xml, located in the Windows directory.


        56                                                                                   Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                     Installing Backup Exec


             8. Provide a user name and password that the Backup Exec system services can use (see
                “The Backup Exec Service Account” on page 49), and then click Next.

             9. If prompted, select how to install device drivers for the tape storage devices that are




                                                                                                              Installation
                connected to the server, and then click Next.
                 It is recommended that you select Use VERITAS device drivers for all tape devices.

             10. If you are prompted, enter information or choose settings for additional options being
                 installed. Click Next after each selection.

             11. Review the features to be installed, and then click Next.
                 All features that are not to be installed have an "X" displayed in the feature icon.

             12. Read the Backup Exec installation review, and then click Install.

             13. When the installation is complete, click Next, and then click Finish. You may need to
                 restart the computer in order for the configuration to take affect.
                 If the installation fails, an installation job log named bkupinst.log is created in the
                 Windows root directory on the computer where Backup Exec is installed; this file lists
                 any errors that may have occurred during installation. If prompted, click View
                 Installation Log, and check this log.




Chapter 2, Installing Backup Exec                                                               57
Installing Backup Exec


        Installing Backup Exec Remote Agents and Options on
        Remote Servers
             You can install the Backup Exec Remote Agent to remote Windows computers, the Backup
             Exec Advanced Open File option to remote computers, and the Backup Exec NetWare
             Agent to remote NetWare computers.
             These features are push installed to remote computers from a media server. Push
             installations save time by eliminating the need for local access at the target computer for
             the installation to be successful.
             You cannot push install Backup Exec to a remote Windows XP Professional computer
             when the operating system on the remote computer is in the ForceGuest configuration
             and the remote computer is not in a domain. ForceGuest is a configuration that limits
             incoming users to Guest-level access. Instead, you must locally install the Remote Agent
             on the Windows XP computer by using the installation CD, or over the network by
             following the procedure in “Installing Backup Exec from the Command Line (Silent
             Mode)” on page 60.
             You cannot push install the 64-bit version of the Remote Agent for Windows Servers. If
             you are using the Desktop and Laptop Option, you cannot push install the Desktop
             Agent.

             Note If you are installing Backup Exec remote agents and options through Terminal
                  Services and the installation media is on a shared drive (CD-ROM or network share)
                  you must install using a UNC path. Installation via mapped drives is not supported.


        ▼    To install a feature to a remote computer:

             1. Do one of the following:
                 -   If you are installing Backup Exec for the first time, from the installation CD
                     browser, select the option to install VERITAS Backup Exec, and then when
                     prompted, click Next to proceed with the installation. Select I accept the terms of
                     the license agreement, and then click Next.
                 -   If Backup Exec is already installed, make sure that it is running, and then on the
                     Tools menu, click Serial Numbers and Installation. Click Next when the
                     Welcome window appears.

             Note You can also use Microsoft’s Add/Remove Programs utility to install Backup Exec
                  to a remote computer. See your Microsoft documentation for more information.




        58                                                                            Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                    Installing Backup Exec


             2. To install Backup Exec remote agents and options to remote computers, select
                Remote Install, and then click Next.

             Note If you do not need to install any Backup Exec options to the local computer, clear the




                                                                                                             Installation
                  Local Install selection.


             3. On the Backup Exec Remote Features dialog box, in the Destinations Systems pane,
                right-click either of the following:
                  -   Windows Agent/Options Computers. Enables you to install the Backup Exec
                      Remote Agent to a remote Windows computer, or to install the Advanced Open
                      File Options to a remote computer.
                  -   NetWare Agent Server. Enables you to install the Backup Exec NetWare Agent to
                      a remote NetWare server.

             4.   Do one of the following:
                  -   Select Add Remote Computer, browse to select the remote server, and then click
                      Next.
                  -   Select Add Remote Computer Manually, type the Domain and Computer Name,
                      and then click OK. This option is not available for NetWare servers.

             5. Enter the user name, password and domain credentials of an account that has
                administrative rights on the remote computers, and then click OK.

             6. Review the features to be installed, and then click Next.
                  All features that are not to be installed have an "X" displayed in the feature icon. To
                  enable any of these options, click the icon to clear the X, and then follow the prompts
                  to install it. If the feature icon is gray, the option is not available for change.

             7. Read the installation review, and then click Install.

             8. When the installation is complete, click Next, and then click Finish. You may need to
                restart the computer in order for the configuration to take effect.
                  If the installation fails, an installation job log named bkupinst.log is created in the
                  Windows root directory on the computer where Backup Exec is installed; this file lists
                  any errors that may have occurred during installation. If prompted, click View
                  Installation Log, and check this log.
                  You can try to manually install the Remote Agent for Windows Servers (see
                  “Installing and Uninstalling the 32-bit Remote Agent to Remote Windows Computers
                  Using the Command Line” on page 847.)



Chapter 2, Installing Backup Exec                                                              59
Installing Backup Exec


        Installing Backup Exec from the Command Line (Silent Mode)
             Installing Backup Exec from the command line is referred to as Silent Mode Installation.
             This method of installation uses the setup.exe program on the Backup Exec CD, a series of
             command switches, and the -S switch. Silent mode installation is only supported if
             Backup Exec is being installed on a computer for the first time.
             Requirements for Command Line Installation include:
             ◆   Backup Exec installation CD.
             ◆   Administrator privileges on the computer where you want to install, configure, or
                 uninstall Backup Exec.

        ▼    To install Backup Exec from the command line:

             1. Open a Windows command prompt.

             2. Change to the drive containing the Backup Exec CD.

             3. Change directories to \WINNT\INSTALL\BE.

             4. Type setup /TS: and the appropriate switches. For example:
                 setup /TS: /USER:<user> /DOM:domain /PASS:password /SNO:serial
                 number -S
                 For descriptions of the switches, see “Command Line Switches for Backup Exec Silent
                 Mode Installation” on page 61.
                 If you use the command line switches without the -S switch, the Backup Exec
                 installation program launches with the command line parameters as defaults for the
                 installation options. For example, if -S had been left in the above example, the Backup
                 Exec installation program launches with the user name, domain, password, and serial
                 number appearing on the installation dialog boxes.

             5. Press <Enter>.
                 An installation job log named bkupinst.log is created in the Windows root
                 directory on the computer where Backup Exec is installed; this file lists any errors that
                 may have occurred during installation, and is the only source of feedback when
                 running setup.exe. Check this job log to determine if you need to reboot the computer
                 to complete the installation.




        60                                                                            Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                       Installing Backup Exec


             Command Line Switches for Backup Exec Silent Mode Installation
             The command line switches used for silent mode installation of Backup Exec are
             described in the following table. Note the following general rules for using these switches:




                                                                                                                Installation
             ◆      Substitute values appropriate for your environment for values shown in italics; for
                    example substitute your password for password.
             ◆      Enclose the value in quotation marks if it contains spaces, such as “Operations Weekly
                    Backup”.

             Note Additional switches appearing in BOLD are required.


             Command Line Switches for Silent Mode Installation of Backup Exec

             Switch                 Additional Switches           Description

             /TS:                                                 Installs Backup Exec using the options
                                                                  specified with the additional switches. The
                                                                  /USER:"user" /DOM:"dm" /PASS:"pw" is
                                                                  required.

                                    /USER:"user"                  Required. Specifies an existing user,
                                    /DOM:"dm"                     domain, and password for the Backup
                                                                  Exec system service account. Silent mode
                                    /PASS:"pw"
                                                                  installation will not create a user.
                                                                  Note When using /PASS:, if a quote is
                                                                       needed as part of the password,
                                                                       specify it as \". For example, if the
                                                                       password is pass"word, type it as
                                                                       /PASS:pass\"word. If the characters
                                                                       \" are used as part of the password,
                                                                       you must precede each character
                                                                       with a \. For example, if the
                                                                       password is pass\"word, type it as
                                                                       /PASS:pass\\\"word.

                                    /DEST:"path"                  Specifies the path where Backup Exec will
                                                                  be installed. Otherwise, the default path
                                                                  Program Files\VERITAS\Backup
                                                                  Exec\NT is used.

                                    /DOCS:                        Installs online documentation.




Chapter 2, Installing Backup Exec                                                                  61
Installing Backup Exec

             Command Line Switches for Silent Mode Installation of Backup Exec (continued)

             Switch               Additional Switches             Description

                                  /NOINSTALL:                     Allows you to select all install options
                                                                  without actually installing the Backup
                                                                  Exec software. This option can be used in
                                                                  conjunction with the /CPF: or /XML:
                                                                  switches.

                                  /SNO:serial number              Specifies one or more serial numbers to
                                                                  use for installing Backup Exec and
                                                                  additional options. Serial numbers are not
                                                                  required to install the Remote
                                                                  Administrator. You may specify up to 99
                                                                  serial numbers. If none are specified, then
                                                                  an Evaluation copy of Backup Exec is
                                                                  installed.
                                                                  The following examples show how the
                                                                  /SNO switch can be used:
                                                                  /SNO:s1
                                                                  /SNO:s1 s2 s3 s4
                                                                  /SNO:s1 /SNO:s2 /SNO:s3 /SNO:s4

                                  /TD:NEW or ALL                  /TD:NEW installs tape drivers only for
                                                                  drives that do not have drivers loaded.


                                                                  /TD:ALL installs tape drivers for all
                                                                  drives.

                                  /CPF:"file name"                Creates a file containing all of the
                                                                  installation parameters provided. This file
                                                                  is encrypted.

                                  /XML:"file name"                Creates an XML file containing all of the
                                                                  installation parameters provided.
                                                                  Note The XML file is not encrypted, which
                                                                       exposes parameters such as the
                                                                       password.




        62                                                                               Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                       Installing Backup Exec

             Command Line Switches for Silent Mode Installation of Backup Exec (continued)

             Switch                 Additional Switches           Description

             Note The following switches are designed for use with Not For Resale, Open Option, and




                                                                                                                Installation
                  Evaluation versions of Backup Exec only.

                                    /LOADER:                      Installs the Library Expansion Option.

                                    /IDR:                         Installs the Intelligent Disaster Recovery
                                                                  Option.

                                    /R3:                          Installs the Backup Exec Agent for R/3™
                                                                  for Oracle® Server.

                                    /OFO:                         Installs the Advanced Open File Option.

                                    /TSM:IP address:port          Installs the IBM ADSM/TSM Option.

                                    /SSO:                         Installs the SAN Shared Storage Option
                                                                  with this server as the primary server.

                                    /SSO:server name              Installs the SAN Shared Storage Option
                                                                  with this server as the secondary and the
                                                                  <server name> as the primary.

                                    /SHAREPT:                     Installs the Agent for Microsoft SharePoint
                                                                  Portal Server.

                                    /EXCH:                        Installs the Agent for Microsoft Exchange
                                                                  Server.

                                    /LOTUS:                       Installs the Agent for Lotus Domino.

                                    /ORACLE:                      Installs the Agent for Oracle Server.

                                    /SQL:                         Installs the Agent for Microsoft SQL
                                                                  Server.

                                    /NTA:                         Installs the Remote Agent for Windows
                                                                  Servers.

                                    /NWA:                         Installs the NetWare Agent.

                                    /SVRFREE:                     Installs the ServerFree Option.




Chapter 2, Installing Backup Exec                                                                   63
Installing Backup Exec

             Command Line Switches for Silent Mode Installation of Backup Exec (continued)

             Switch               Additional Switches             Description

                                  /BEWSA:                         Installs the Backup Exec Web
                                                                  Administration Console

                                  /DLO:                           Installs the Backup Exec Desktop and
                                                                  Laptop Option.

                                  /ECM:<EIS server 1> <EIS        Installs the ExecView Communication
                                  server 2>...                    Module.
                                                                  Type setup.exe /? to get the syntax.
                                                                  For example: setup.exe
                                                                  /ECM:myserver1 myserver2
                                                                  myserver3 -s
                                                                  If a server is not specified, ECM will not be
                                                                  enabled.

             See also:
                 “Installing Backup Exec Using the Installation Program” on page 50
                 “Uninstalling Backup Exec from the Command Line” on page 66


             Installing the Remote Administrator from the Command Line
             You can also use Silent Mode Installation to install the Remote Administrator. Options for
             the Remote Administrator are specified with the use of additional command switches.

        ▼    To install the Remote Administrator from the command line:

             1. Open a Windows command prompt.

             2. Change to the drive containing the Backup Exec CD.

             3. Change directories to \WINNT\INSTALL\BE

             4. Type setup /RA: and the appropriate switches. For example:
                 setup /RA: -s




        64                                                                                Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                       Installing Backup Exec


                 The command line switches used for silent mode installation of the Remote
                 Administrator are described in the following table. Remember the following general
                 rules for using these switches:
                 -    Substitute values appropriate for your environment for values in italics; for




                                                                                                                Installation
                      example, substitute your password for password.
                 -    Enclose the value in quotation marks if it contains spaces, such as “Program
                      Files\VERITAS\Backup Exec\NT”.

             Command Line Switches for Remote Administrator Silent Mode Installation

             Switch                 Additional Switches           Description

             /RA:                                                 Installs Remote Administrator using the
                                                                  options specified with the additional
                                                                  switches.

                                    /DEST:"path"                  Specifies the path where Remote
                                                                  Administrator will be installed. Otherwise,
                                                                  the default path Program
                                                                  Files\VERITAS\Backup Exec\NT is
                                                                  used.

                                    /DOCS:                        Installs online documentation.

                                    /NOINSTALL:                   Allows you to select all install options
                                                                  without actually installing the Backup
                                                                  Exec software. This option can be used
                                                                  with the /CPF: or /XML: switches.

                                    /CPF:"file name"              Creates a file containing all of the
                                                                  installation parameters provided. This file
                                                                  is encrypted.

                                    /XML:"file name"              Creates an XML file containing all of the
                                                                  installation parameters provided.
                                                                  Note The XML file is not encrypted, which
                                                                       exposes parameters such as the
                                                                       password.




Chapter 2, Installing Backup Exec                                                                  65
Installing Backup Exec


             Uninstalling Backup Exec from the Command Line
             If Backup Exec is already installed, you can use the setup.exe program to uninstall Backup
             Exec program files and Backup Exec data.

        ▼    To uninstall Backup Exec using the command line:

             1. Open a Windows command prompt.

             2. Change to the drive containing the Backup Exec CD.

             3. Change directories to \WINNT\INSTALL\BE.

             4. To remove the Backup Exec program files but keep all of the Backup Exec data, type:
                 SETUP   /UNINSTALL:
                 To remove the Backup Exec program files and the Backup Exec data, type:
                 SETUP   /REMOVEALL:

             Creating and Using Installation Parameter Files
             If you use the command line switches without the -S switch, the Backup Exec installation
             program launches with the command line parameters as defaults for the installation
             options. For example, suppose you type:
                 SETUP /TS: /USER:user /DOM:domain /PASS:password /SNO:serial
                 number
             The Backup Exec installation program is launched. The screens that allow you to enter the
             logon credentials and the serial number will appear with the information you provided on
             the command line. Unless you are installing a Not For Resale (NFR) or Open Options
             Suite edition, you do not have to enter commands for installing options such as Agent for
             Microsoft SQL Server or Agent for Microsoft Exchange Server.
             You can also use the /CPF: and /XML: commands to create a parameter file that contains
             all of the command line options you provided. This parameter file can then be used to
             provide the options for installing either Backup Exec or the Remote Administrator.

        ▼    To create a parameter file for Backup Exec:

             1. Open a Windows command prompt.

             2. Change to the drive containing the Backup Exec CD.

             3. Change directories to \WINNT\INSTALL\BE.


        66                                                                          Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                  Installing Backup Exec


             4. Type setup /TS: and the appropriate switches, including /CPF: and the full path
                name of the parameter file. For example, type:
                 setup /TS: /USER:user /DOM:domain /PASS:password /SNO:serial
                 number /CPF:"A:\file name" -S




                                                                                                           Installation
                 Backup Exec will be installed on your server and a parameter file containing the user
                 name, domain, password, and serial number will be saved to a floppy diskette. You
                 can use this parameter file to install to another computer.

        ▼    To use this parameter file:

             1. Open a Windows command prompt.

             2. Change to the drive containing the Backup Exec CD.

             3. Change directories to \WINNT\INSTALL\BE.

             4. Type:
                 SETUP /PARAMS:"A:\file name" -S

             5. If you want to overwrite a parameter, specify the new parameter. For example, to
                change the password, type:
                 SETUP /PARAMS:"A:\file name" /PASS:new password -S

             Note To create an XML file containing all parameters, use the /XML: switch. The XML
                  file is not encrypted, which exposes parameters such as the password.

             See also:
                 “Installing Backup Exec from the Command Line (Silent Mode)” on page 60
                 “Command Line Switches for Backup Exec Silent Mode Installation” on page 61




Chapter 2, Installing Backup Exec                                                            67
Registering Backup Exec Online


Registering Backup Exec Online
             Launch the VERITAS Backup Exec Online Registration Wizard from either the install
             program or from the Help menu.

        ▼    To register Backup Exec online from the Administration Console:

             1. On the Help menu, click Register VERITAS Backup Exec.

             2. Follow the wizard prompts.
             The Online Registration Wizard guides you through submitting a registration form to
             VERITAS Software Corporation and provides a survey designed to aid VERITAS in
             understanding how you use the product and in better understanding your needs.

             Note If your LAN uses a proxy server to connect to the Internet, the online registration
                  may fail with the error "Logon request was denied". To correct this error, change the
                  LAN settings to automatically detect the proxy settings. Refer to your web browser
                  documentation for details on how to change the LAN settings.



Repairing Backup Exec
             If you have missing or corrupted Backup Exec files or registry keys on the local media
             server, run the Backup Exec installation program and select the Repair option. The
             program stops all Backup Exec services, reinstalls corrupted files and registry keys,
             reinstalls tape devices (stand-alone drives and libraries), and restarts the services. The
             database is not reinstalled.
             Any changes made to Backup Exec program files and registry keys will be reset to the
             original settings.

        ▼    To run the Repair option:

             1. Close the Backup Exec application.

             2. Click Start, point to Settings, click Control Panel, and then double-click
                Add/Remove Programs.




        68                                                                             Administrator’s Guide
                                                                             Repairing Backup Exec


             3. Do one of the following:
                 -    For Windows NT, on the Install/Uninstall tab on the Add/Remove Programs
                      Properties dialog box, select VERITAS Backup Exec, and then click
                      Add/Remove.




                                                                                                     Installation
                 -    For Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003, at the Add/Remove
                      Programs dialog box, select VERITAS Backup Exec for Windows Servers, and
                      then click Change.

             4. Click Next.

             5. Select Local Install and Repair, and then click Next.

             Note Make sure the option Remote Install is not selected.


             6. Select Install.

             7. Click Finish.




Chapter 2, Installing Backup Exec                                                      69
Starting and Stopping Backup Exec Services


Starting and Stopping Backup Exec Services
        ▼    To stop or start Backup Exec services:

             1. On the Tools menu, click Backup Exec Services.

             2. Select the appropriate options as follows:

                 Backup Exec Services Manager options

                 Item                        Description

                 Server                      Type the name of a server you want to add to the list, and then click
                                             Add. To import a list of servers, click Import List and select the file
                                             containing the server list.

                 Start all services          Click this to start all Backup Exec services for the selected server.

                 Stop all services           Click this to stop all Backup Exec services for the selected server.

                 Services credentials        Click this to change service account information or to change startup
                                             options.

                 Refresh                     Click this to refresh this dialog box.

                 Remove Server(s)            Click this to remove a selected server or servers from the server list.




        70                                                                                      Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                 Uninstalling Backup Exec


Uninstalling Backup Exec
             Use Microsoft’s Add/Remove Programs option to remove Backup Exec from a computer.
             For additional information on Add/Remove Programs, refer to your Microsoft




                                                                                                            Installation
             documentation.

             Note When using the Shared Storage Option, you must uninstall Backup Exec from the
                  secondary servers before uninstalling from the primary server.


        ▼    To uninstall Backup Exec:

             1. Close the Backup Exec application.

             2. Click Start, point to Settings, click Control Panel, and then double-click
                Add/Remove Programs.

             3. Do one of the following:
                 -    For Windows NT, on the Install/Uninstall tab on the Add/Remove Programs
                      Properties dialog box, select VERITAS Backup Exec, and then click
                      Add/Remove.
                 -    For Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003, at the Add/Remove
                      Programs dialog box, select VERITAS Backup Exec for Windows Servers, and
                      then click Remove.

             4. When prompted to confirm the deletion of Backup Exec from your computer, click
                Yes.

             5. When prompted to remove Backup Exec program files or all data, click Yes; click No
                to retain user-created data such as catalogs and job information.

             6. If the uninstall program fails, click the View Installation Log File button for
                additional information.

             7. When the uninstall is completed, click Finish.

             8. If prompted, reboot the computer after uninstalling Backup Exec.
             Uninstalling Backup Exec also removes VERITAS tape class drivers. If you reinstall
             Backup Exec and want to use VERITAS tape class drivers, you must reinstall them.
             See also:
                 “Uninstalling Backup Exec from the Command Line” on page 66



Chapter 2, Installing Backup Exec                                                             71
Installing the Backup Exec Remote Administrator


Installing the Backup Exec Remote Administrator
             The Backup Exec Remote Administrator allows you to administrate the media server from
             a remote Windows server or workstation.
             To remotely administrate both Backup Exec 9. 0 and 9.1 media servers, install the Remote
             Administrator for both versions on the same computer but in different directories.
             To support the Remote Administrator, the media server requires that the Backup Exec
             system services must be running.

             Note The Remote Administrator and the media server to which it is connecting must be
                  the same version.


        ▼    To install the Backup Exec Remote Administrator:

             1. From the installation CD browser, choose to install VERITAS Backup Exec.
                 The Welcome window appears.

             2. Click Next.
                 The Software License Agreement appears.

             3. Select I accept the terms of the license agreement, and then click Next.

             4. Select Local Install and Install Administration Console only, and then click Next.
                 A dialog box appears requesting the destination directory for your Backup Exec
                 program files.

             5. Click Next to install the Backup Exec program files in the default directory, or click
                Change to select another directory for the installation, and then click Next.

             6. Click Install.
                 The installation copies the Backup Exec program files to the computer.

             7. Click Finish.
                 The Remote Administrator is installed. You can begin using Backup Exec. For more
                 information, see “Getting Started” on page 79.




        72                                                                           Administrator’s Guide
                                                             Installing the Backup Exec Remote Administrator


        ▼    To run the Remote Administrator:

             1. Click Start.




                                                                                                                 Installation
             2. Point to Programs, and then click VERITAS Backup Exec for Windows Servers.

             Note If you are connecting to a remote administration console from a media server, from
                  the Network menu, click Connect to Local Media Server to break the connection.
                  Click Connect to Media Server to connect to another media server.


             3. Select the appropriate options as follows:

                 Connect to Server dialog options

                 Item                       Description

                 Server                     Select the name of the media server from the Server drop-down
                                            list box or type the name of the server if you are running the
                                            Remote Administrator from a media server. The media server
                                            should appear in the list if the Backup Exec naming services are
                                            running on both machines.
                                            Note Each Windows 2000 server in the domain that has Backup
                                                 Exec installed will automatically appear in the list box.

                 Low Speed Connection       Select this option to minimize the amount of information initially
                 (RAS)                      retrieved from the media server to which you are connecting.
                                            When this option is selected, views such as the device and media
                                            views will not automatically be expanded when the
                                            administration console is loaded. This reduces the time required
                                            to connect to the remote media server. Information for each view
                                            is updated when the view is selected.
                                            This option is useful if you are connecting to the media server
                                            over a modem line.

                 Login Information

                 User name                  Type an administrator user name for the server to which you are
                                            connecting.
                                            Note On Windows Server 2003 and Windows XP, you cannot log
                                                 on to the remote administration console with a user name
                                                 that has a blank password, unless you set Windows to allow
                                                 blank passwords. The error message "Logon failure: user
                                                 account restriction" displays. For more information, see
                                                 your Windows documentation.




Chapter 2, Installing Backup Exec                                                                   73
Installing the Backup Exec Remote Administrator


                 Connect to Server dialog options (continued)

                 Item                        Description

                 Password                    Type the password.

                 Domain                      From the drop-down list, select the domain to which the user
                                             belongs, or type the appropriate domain name if it does not
                                             appear in the list.

                 Services                    Click this to access the Backup Exec Services Manager to stop and
                                             start services or to set the logon credentials used to run the
                                             services.

                 The status of the local services appear at the bottom of this dialog box. If you try to
                 connect to a server and the connection fails, this dialog box displays the services
                 status for the server you attempted to connect to.

             4. Click OK.
                 The administration console will now connect to the services running on the media
                 server. You should now be able to operate the media server as though you were
                 running the administration console from there.
             You may be prompted for a user name and password to browse some network shares
             even if you are logged into the Remote Administrator computer under an account that is
             valid for those shares. Provide a domain-qualified user name and password when
             prompted (e.g., domain1\howard). This also applies to workgroup accounts (e.g.,
             machinename\george).




        74                                                                                Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                   Using VERITAS Update


Using VERITAS Update
             VERITAS Update, which allows users of Backup Exec to be informed of updates,
             upgrades, and new versions of Backup Exec, automatically installs with Backup Exec. If




                                                                                                            Installation
             you enable the automated option, you can configure VERITAS Update to poll the main
             VERITAS web server for any available updates. You can select to have VERITAS Update
             poll on a daily, weekly, or monthly interval, and can configure when the polling will start.
             If updates are available, VERITAS Update alerts you of the update so you can download
             and install any selected updates.
             VERITAS Update cannot be used if the security setting for Internet Explorer is set to high.

        ▼    To set Internet Explorer security:

             1. On the Internet Explorer Tools menu, click Internet Options, and then click the
                Security tab.

             2. Click the Internet icon, and then click Custom Level.

             3. Set the security to medium or lower.

             4. Verify that the following settings are set to Enable or Prompt
                 -    Download signed ActiveX Controls
                 -    Run ActiveX Controls and plug-ins Script
                 -    ActiveX Controls marked safe for scripting
                 -    Active scripting

        ▼    To configure VERITAS Update:

             1. On the Tools menu, click VERITAS Update.

             2. On the VERITAS Update Welcome screen, click Configure.

             3. Click Notify me when new updates are available.




Chapter 2, Installing Backup Exec                                                              75
Upgrading from Previous Versions of Backup Exec


             4. Select the date and time for Backup Exec to start polling for updates.

             5. Select the Frequency for polling to occur. Options are:
                 -   Daily. If you selected Daily as the polling Frequency, Backup Exec polls every
                     day at the time you selected.
                 -   Weekly. If you selected Weekly as the polling Frequency, Backup Exec polls every
                     week on the same day of the week and at the same time you selected.
                 -   Monthly. If you selected Monthly as the polling Frequency, Backup Exec polls
                     every month on the same date and at the same time you selected.

             6. Enter Local Task Credentials.

             7. Click Apply.



Upgrading from Previous Versions of Backup Exec
             This current version of Backup Exec for Windows Servers replaces any previous versions;
             no separate migration or upgrade utility is necessary. Most settings and all data from
             previous versions of Backup Exec (for example, when the TSM option adds registry
             settings) are kept. At the end of the installation, the upgrade process is summarized. Only
             Backup Exec version 8.0 and later can be migrated to this release.
             When upgrading, only the Backup Exec for Windows Servers options for which you have
             provided serial numbers are upgraded. Components that are already selected in the
             Backup Exec Install Options dialog box in the install program must remain selected so
             that all licensed components are upgraded. It is recommended that you add all previous
             version serial numbers before installing the new version of Backup Exec so that these
             options are automatically upgraded.

             Note Evaluation versions of Backup Exec for Windows Servers will replace any current
                  installation. You cannot have separate installations of different versions on the same
                  server.




        76                                                                           Administrator’s Guide
                                                      Upgrading Backup Exec Options on Remote Computers


Upgrading Backup Exec Options on Remote Computers
             In order to upgrade options installed on remote computers, you must reinstall them. The
             following options are push-installed, and will not be upgraded until they are reinstalled:




                                                                                                          Installation
             ◆   Backup Exec Remote Agent for Windows Servers. For more information, see
                 “Installing the Remote Agent to Remote Windows Servers” on page 845.
             ◆   Backup Exec NetWare Agent. For more information, see “Installing the Remote Agent
                 for NetWare Servers” on page 1355 and “Installing Backup Exec Remote Agents and
                 Options on Remote Servers” on page 58.
             ◆   Backup Exec Agent for Lotus Domino. For more information, see “Installing the Lotus
                 Domino Agent on the Media Server” on page 1311.
             ◆   Backup Exec Advanced Open File Option. For more information, see “Installing the
                 Advanced Open File Option” on page 981.
             To reinstall these options, repeat the installation steps for each option.




Chapter 2, Installing Backup Exec                                                            77
Upgrading Backup Exec Options on Remote Computers




       78                                           Administrator’s Guide
Getting Started                                                                                  3
      In Getting Started, you’ll find:




                                                                                                     Getting Started
      ◆   A checklist that will help you prepare for the First Time Startup Wizard.
      ◆   Details on the Backup Exec Assistant, Administration Console, and the Information
          Desk.
      ◆   Details of default options set when Backup Exec is installed.
      ◆   Layouts and descriptions of Backup Exec menus.



Before Starting Backup Exec
      For best results before starting Backup Exec, do the following:
      ❏   Make sure your storage devices are connected and configured properly.
      ❏   Decide if your backup will be to a tape device or a disk device. You will be able to
          configure both during the First Time Startup Wizard.
          -   If you’re backing up to a tape device, verify that the device is supported. You can
              install drivers for the devices during the First Time Startup Wizard.
          -   If you’re backing up to a disk device using the Backup-to-Disk feature, decide
              where you can create a backup folder. You should create it on a disk that won’t be
              included in the backup jobs and that has enough free space to contain the backup
              job. For more information, see “Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files” on
              page 149.
      ❏   Understand how Backup Exec provides overwrite protection for your media. For
          more information, see “Media Overwrite Protection” on page 191.
      ❏   Understand the default media set and its infinite overwrite protection period. For
          more information, see “Media Overwrite Protection Levels” on page 196.




                                                                                       79
Starting Backup Exec


             ❏   Learn about creating new media sets with weekly, monthly, or quarterly retention
                 periods. For more information, see “Default Media Set” on page 195.
             ❏   Decide what Windows credential you want your Backup Exec logon account to use
                 when browsing and making backup selections. You can use an existing account, or
                 create a new one. You’ll be prompted for a default Backup Exec logon account during
                 the First Time Startup Wizard. For more information, see “Configuring Logon
                 Accounts” on page 363.



Starting Backup Exec
             ❖   To start the Backup Exec Administration Console, click Start, point to Programs, and
                 then click VERITAS Backup Exec for Windows Servers.
                 If you selected the option to add an icon to your desktop when you installed Backup
                 Exec, you can also double-click the icon to start Backup Exec.
             See also:
                 “Using the Administration Console” on page 82
                 “Using Backup Exec Dialog Boxes” on page 85



First Time Startup Wizard
             The first time you run Backup Exec, the First Time Startup Wizard appears. The First Time
             Startup Wizard is a collection of wizards that help you set up the important features of
             Backup Exec, including media sets, overwrite protection settings, devices, and logon
             accounts. You must complete the applicable sections of this wizard as it guides you in
             preparing Backup Exec for operations. To begin the wizard, click Next on the Welcome
             page. The following wizards are part of the First Time Startup Wizard:
             ◆   Media Management with Media Sets. To learn more about managing media through
                 media sets, read “Media Overwrite Protection” on page 191.
             ◆   Preferred Overwrite Media Type. Review the circumstances and order in which Backup
                 Exec searches for overwritable media in “Media Overwrite Options” on page 198.
             ◆   Overwrite Protection Level. The media overwrite protection levels are global settings
                 that designate groups of media as overwritable or write-protected. For more
                 information, see “Media Overwrite Protection Levels” on page 196.




        80                                                                           Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                    First Time Startup Wizard


             ◆    Detected Hardware. The Device Configuration wizard allows you to verify that all of
                  the storage devices attached to your system appear, and to verify that robotic libraries
                  and storage devices are properly configured.
                  If you do not see one or more of your attached storage devices in the Backup Devices
                  window, click the Configure Devices button. This will guide you through installing
                  the appropriate drivers for the storage hardware connected to your system.
                  -   Detected Backup-to-Disk Folders. Click the Add Backup-to-Disk Folder button to
                      set up folders on your hard drive to target for backup jobs. For more information,
                      see “Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files” on page 149.
                      The backup folders you add here will be included in the All Drives drive pool,




                                                                                                                Getting Started
                      which is Backup Exec’s default target for backup jobs. Backups submitted to the
                      All Drives drive pool may be processed on an attached media device or to one of
                      the backup folders on your hard disk.
                  -   Drive Configuration. Verify that Backup Exec has configured all of your drives
                      correctly. If all of your drives do not display on the list, follow the instructions in
                      the wizard to install the VERITAS device drivers.
             ◆    Configure IDR Options. If you installed the Intelligent Disaster Recovery Option, you’ll
                  be prompted to configure IDR. For details, read “Getting Started with IDR” on
                  page 885.
             ◆    Logon Accounts. Use the Logon Account Wizard to set up Backup Exec logon accounts
                  to access resources such as servers, shares, and databases. For details, read about
                  logon accounts in “Configuring Logon Accounts” on page 363.
             After you use the First Time Startup Wizard, you can access some of the wizards that
             make up the First Time Wizard individually. To access the wizards individually, from the
             Tools menu, select Wizards, and then select the wizard you want to use.




Chapter 3, Getting Started                                                                         81
Using the Administration Console


Using the Administration Console
             Backup Exec’s Administration Console has been updated with this release to incorporate
             new features and to make it easier for you to take advantage of Backup Exec’s features
             and capabilities.

             Note If you are using Backup Exec Web Administrative Console (BEWAC), the
                  Administration Console displays differently. For more information, see “Navigating
                  in BEWAC” on page 806.



             Administration Console


             Menu bar
             Navigation bar



                                                                                      Columns


              Task pane
                                                                                    Results pane


                                                                                        Preview pane




                                                           Selection pane

              Status bar

             The main Administration Console screen includes the following components:
             ◆   Menu bar. Backup Exec’s menu bar appears across the top of your screen. To display a
                 menu, click the menu name. Backup Exec operations can be launched by clicking
                 options from a menu. Some options may be unavailable until an item is selected from
                 the console screen. For example, Rename cannot be selected from the Edit menu
                 unless you have first selected an item to be renamed from either the Devices or Media
                 views.




        82                                                                         Administrator’s Guide
                                                                            Using the Administration Console


             ◆    Navigation bar. The navigation bar appears under the menu bar and allows you to
                  quickly create a backup or restore job or to navigate to Backup Exec’s seven views.
                  Click Backup or Restore to create a job. Change views by clicking the name of the
                  view you want. The seven views that can be accessed through the navigation bar
                  include:
                  -   Overview. Use this view to access the Information Desk, view a summary of the
                      system you are logged on to, or launch and configure the connection settings for
                      ExecView.
                  -   Job Setup. Use this view to perform tasks for new backup, restore, and media
                      rotation jobs, as well as to launch some utility jobs.




                                                                                                                 Getting Started
                  -   Job Monitor. Use this view to monitor jobs and job history. Through this view, you
                      can also access the Outlook-like job calendar.

             Note If you are using BEWAC, the Outlook-like calendar is not available.

                  -   Alerts. Use this to view and respond to alerts, view alert history, apply alert filters,
                      and set up notification recipients to receive e-mail or pager communications when
                      alerts occur.

             Note If you are using BEWAC, the Alerts view is not available. You can access alerts
                  through the Status area. For more information, see “Viewing, Clearing, and
                  Responding to Alerts” on page 808.

                  -   Reports. Use this to view, print, save, and schedule reports about your media
                      server, its operations, and its device and media usage.
                  -   Devices. Use this view to create drive pools, cascaded drive pools, and
                      backup-to-disk folders, and to perform device operations and access device
                      properties pages.
                  -   Media. Use this view to manage your media, create media sets, and create media
                      locations.
             ◆    Task pane. The task pane displays on the left side of the Administration Console by
                  default, but can be hidden by selecting View, and then selecting Task Pane. Through
                  the task pane, you can initiate actions such as creating a new backup job or
                  responding to an alert. The contents of the task pane are dynamic, changing according
                  to the view selected from the navigation bar. Some options may be unavailable until
                  an item is selected from the console screen or a prerequisite task is performed. For
                  example, you cannot select Rename from the Devices task pane unless you have first
                  selected an item that can be renamed, such as a user-created drive pool.
             ◆    Selection pane. The Selection pane is where you select items to work with. For example,
                  it is where you select files to back up or restore.



Chapter 3, Getting Started                                                                         83
Using the Administration Console


             ◆   Results pane. The Results pane is the large pane on the right side of the screen that
                 usually contains a list or tree view of items that correspond to items that are selected
                 in the Selection pane. For example, if you select a Backup-to-Disk folder in the
                 Selection pane, the Backup-to-Disk files that are contained in the folder display in the
                 Results pane. This pane may be divided to display a preview pane.
             ◆   Preview pane. The preview pane displays on the bottom right of the Administration
                 Console. It displays information about the item selected in the list or tree view. This
                 pane can be hidden by selecting View, and then selecting Preview Pane.

             Note If you are using BEWAC, the Preview pane is not available.

             ◆   Status bar. The status bar appears on the bottom of the Administration Console and
                 provides information about the media server, jobs running or scheduled to run on the
                 server, alerts, and services running.
             ◆   Columns. You can change the location of columns by dragging and dropping them. In
                 addition, you can change the order of the entries in a column by clicking the column
                 heading. For example, names of reports display in alphabetical order by default. To
                 display report names in reverse alphabetical order, click the Name column heading on
                 the Reports view.




        84                                                                            Administrator’s Guide
                                                                       Using the Administration Console


         Using Backup Exec Dialog Boxes
             When an option is selected from a menu, a shortcut menu, or the task pane, a dialog box
             usually displays.



             Dialog box



                Nodes




                                                                                                          Getting Started
             Subnodes




                                 Properties
                                   pane




             Most of Backup Exec’s dialog boxes contain a Properties pane on the left side. Options
             that correspond to the selected subnode display on the right side of the dialog box.


         Using the Overview View
             The Overview view includes the Information Desk and the System Summary. From the
             Overview view you also can configure ExecView connection settings. When Backup Exec
             is started for the first time, the Administration Console’s Information Desk appears.
             The Information Desk has links to the list of new features in this release, the technical
             support web site, the supported device list, device configuration information, default
             options for Backup Exec, and tasks such as backing up data and monitoring jobs. Links are
             also provided to the ReadMe, the online Administrator’s Guide, the wizards, and the
             VERITAS company web site.



Chapter 3, Getting Started                                                                  85
Using the Administration Console


        ▼    To view the Information Desk:

             ❖   On the navigation bar, click Overview, and then under Views on the task pane, click
                 Information Desk.

             Information Desk




             The System Summary briefly details Backup Exec activity for the last 24, 48, or 72 hours,
             such as the number of jobs that were run, the number of jobs that failed, the amount of
             data backed up, and the number of media used.
             You can also see the number and type of active alerts, the number of scratch media
             available in the storage devices, a list of upcoming jobs, and the number of jobs that are
             currently running.




        86                                                                            Administrator’s Guide
                                                                       Using the Administration Console


         ▼   To view the System Summary:

             ❖    On the navigation bar, click Overview, and then under Views on the task pane, click
                  System Summary.



             System Summary




                                                                                                          Getting Started




Chapter 3, Getting Started                                                                  87
Frequently Asked Questions


        Using the Backup Exec Assistant
             The Backup Exec Assistant provides easy access to commonly used features, such as
             Backup Exec’s wizards, the job monitor, and job setup. If you want the Backup Exec
             Assistant to display each time Backup Exec is started, on the Tools menu, select Backup
             Exec Assistant, and then select the Always show me this at startup checkbox.
             The Backup Exec Assistant is not available in BEWAC.



             Backup Exec Assistant




Frequently Asked Questions
        How do I run a backup job?
             There are several ways to run a backup, depending on your backup needs and level of
             experience with Backup Exec.
             ◆   If you are new to Backup Exec, you can use the Backup Wizard, which helps guide
                 you through the setup of a backup job.
             ◆   If you are an experienced Backup Exec user:
                 -   On the navigation bar, click Backup to set up the options for a backup job.
                 -   On the navigation bar, click Job Setup to create a template to use for multiple
                     backup jobs.


        88                                                                           Administrator’s Guide
                                                                              Frequently Asked Questions


             ◆    To quickly create a backup job to back up the media server, click the one-button
                  backup link on the Information Desk.
             ◆    Use Windows Explorer to create a backup job.
             For details about the various ways to create a backup job, see “Creating a Backup Job” on
             page 241.

         Where can I find the wizards?
             ◆     On the Information Desk. On the navigation bar, click Overview, then under View on
                  the task pane, click Information Desk.




                                                                                                           Getting Started
             ◆    On the Tools menu, click Backup Exec Assistant, or further down the Tools menu,
                  click Wizards.

         Where can I find the Readme file?
             ◆    On the Information Desk. On the navigation bar, click Overview, then under View on
                  the task pane, click Information Desk. Under Documentation, click View ReadMe
                  file.
             ◆    In the directory where Backup Exec was installed.
             ◆    On the Help menu, click View ReadMe File.

         Where can I find the online documentation for Backup Exec?
             ◆    On the Information Desk. On the navigation bar, click Overview, then under View on
                  the task pane, click Information Desk. Under Documentation, click View VERITAS
                  Backup Exec Administrator’s Guide.
             ◆    On the Help menu, click Topics to see the online help. Or on the Help menu, click
                  View VERITAS Backup Exec Administrator’s Guide to view an online version of the
                  System Administration Guide in the Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF).

         How do I get in touch with Technical Support?
             ◆    From the Information Desk. On the navigation bar, click Overview, then under View
                  on the task pane, click Information Desk. Under Technical Support, click VERITAS
                  Backup Exec support.




Chapter 3, Getting Started                                                                    89
Backup Exec Defaults


Backup Exec Defaults
             When you start Backup Exec for the first time, defaults are already set. You can adjust the
             defaults to meet the needs of your environment. Default settings are available for various
             types of jobs, such as backup, restore, and test run. You also can set defaults for catalogs,
             media management, bar code rules, and database maintenance.
             The defaults that will probably affect you the most are the backup job defaults. You will
             probably want to change many of these defaults after devising a media rotation strategy
             and creating additional media sets and drive pools. In the short term though, you can run
             Backup Exec and backup and restore jobs safely by using only the defaults set during
             installation.
             See also:
                 “Setting Default Backup Options” on page 320
                 “Setting Restore Defaults” on page 457
                 “Setting Test Run Default Options” on page 318
                 “Setting Default Pre/Post Commands” on page 328
                 “Configuring Default Job Log Options” on page 400
                 “Specifying the Default Backup Network” on page 334
                 “Setting Advanced Open File Option as the Default Setting for All Backup Jobs” on
                 page 989
                 “Setting Default Backup and Restore Options for SQL 2000” on page 1035
                 “Setting Default Backup and Restore Options for SQL 7.0” on page 1079
                 “Setting Default Backup and Restore Options for Exchange 2000 and 2003” on
                 page 1127
                 “Setting Default Backup and Restore Options for Exchange 5.5” on page 1161
                 “Configuring Default Lotus Domino Options” on page 1314
                 “Default Settings for the Remote Agent for NetWare Servers” on page 1365
                 “Configuring Default Schedule Options” on page 379
                 “Changing Default Preferences” on page 91
                 “Setting Catalog Defaults” on page 415
                 “Setting Default Media Options” on page 209
                 “Bar Code Labeling in Mixed Media Libraries” on page 205
                 “Configuring Database Maintenance” on page 405



        90                                                                             Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                            Backup Exec Defaults


         Changing Default Preferences
             You can set defaults for the way you prefer Backup Exec to display various screens,
             indicators, and alerts.

         ▼   To set default preferences:

             1. On the Tools menu, click Options.

             2. On the Properties pane, under Settings, click Preferences.




                                                                                                                   Getting Started
             3. Select the appropriate options as follows:.

                  Options - Set Application Defaults - Preferences

                  Item                       Description

                  Show splash screen at      Select this option to display the splash screen when you start
                  startup                    Backup Exec. If this option is cleared, the Backup Exec
                                             Administration Console is the first thing to display on startup.

                  Inventory all drives on    Select this option to have Backup Exec inventory all of the
                  Backup Exec services       media in the storage devices when Backup Exec’s services are
                  startup                    starting. Depending on the number of storage devices attached
                                             to your system, this process may take a few minutes. If you are
                                             using a robotic library, all of the robotic library’s slots are
                                             inventoried.

                  Enable backup from         Select this option to create and submit backup jobs from
                  Windows Explorer           Windows Explorer. For more information, see “Using Backup
                                             Exec’s Windows Explorer Interface” on page 293. If this option
                                             is cleared, you will not be able to submit backups using the
                                             Backup Exec Windows Explorer interface.

                  Display the job            Select this option to have Backup Exec display a summary of
                  summary dialog before      the backup job options you selected before submitting the job
                  creating a backup job      to the job queue.




Chapter 3, Getting Started                                                                             91
Backup Exec Defaults


                Options - Set Application Defaults - Preferences (continued)

                Item                        Description

                Display progress            Select this option to display the percent completed number
                indicators for backup       while a backup job is processing. These indicators appear in
                jobs (requires additional   the Job Activity tab, and they allow you to monitor the
                time to pre-scan            progress of the job. Backups might take a little longer to
                devices)                    complete when this option is selected because the target
                                            resources must be scanned to determine the amount of data to
                                            be backed up.
                                            Note Due to the time required to scan the target resources,
                                                 selecting this option when backing up remote resources
                                                 is not recommended.

                Alerts

                Automatically display       Select this option to have alerts automatically appear on the
                new alerts                  desktop when they are sent. If you do not choose this option,
                                            you are required to view and respond to alerts through the
                                            Alerts view.

                Play sound after            Select this option to have Backup Exec send an audible tone
                receiving alert             when an alert is generated. Information about alerts can be
                                            found in the Alerts view.




        92                                                                                 Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                             Backup Exec Defaults


         Changing General Job Defaults
             You can set the default priority, device, and media set to use for each job created.

         ▼   To change general job defaults:

             1. On the Tools menu, click Options.

             2. On the Properties pane, under Job Defaults, click General.

             3. Select the appropriate options as follows:




                                                                                                                    Getting Started
                  Options-Set General Application Defaults

                  Item                     Description

                  Job priority             Select the default priority that you want to assign to all jobs. The
                                           choices are Highest, High, Medium, Low, and Lowest. You can
                                           change this default for each job individually.

                  Device                   Select the device that you want to be used as the default device for
                                           jobs. You can change this default for each job individually.

                  Media set                Select the media set that you want to be used as the default media
                                           set for jobs. You can change this default for each job individually.




Chapter 3, Getting Started                                                                              93
Backup Exec Defaults




        94             Administrator’s Guide
Managing Devices                                                                                  4
     Device management in Backup Exec simplifies how you organize and allocate the storage
     devices recognized by Backup Exec, including:
     ◆   Tape drives or robotic libraries physically attached to a media server.
     ◆   Virtual devices called Backup-to-Disk Folders created through Backup Exec’s
         Backup-to-Disk feature.
     ◆   Shared devices used in a SAN environment.
     ◆   Removable storage devices shared by applications through the use of Microsoft’s
         Removable Storage Feature.




                                                                                                      Managing
                                                                                                       Devices
     For a list of supported devices, see http://support.veritas.com.
     With Backup Exec, you can maximize your hardware investment by organizing your
     drives in one or both of the following methods:
     ◆   Drive pools. Drives are grouped so that jobs assigned to the drive pool are run on the
         first available drive. Setting up drive pools offers the following benefits:
         -   Automatic job rescheduling. If a drive fails while a job is running on it, that job is
             rescheduled and placed on hold. Other scheduled jobs are rerouted to working
             devices in the drive pool.
         -   Concurrent processing. Drives in the drive pool run different jobs at the same time,
             allowing maximum hardware efficiency.
         -   Dynamic load balancing. Jobs are more evenly distributed between all of the drives
             included in the drive pool when running simultaneous jobs.
     ◆   Cascaded drive pools. Drives of the same type are linked together so that large backup
         jobs that exceed the capacity of the media in one drive automatically continue on the
         media in the next drive that is defined in the pool. The cascaded drives appear
         logically as one device.
     Or, you can use the storage devices as they are configured by Backup Exec at installation,
     without making any changes. The default drive pool, All Drives (Server Name) is the
     default destination device when you create a backup job. By default, the All Drives drive




                                                                                          95
Viewing Devices


             pool contains all locally-attached drives, or if you are using the SAN Shared Storage
             Option, both locally-attached and shared storage devices appear in All Drives (Server
             Name).
             In addition to drive pools and cascaded drive pools, Backup Exec provides other device
             management capabilities. You can:
             ◆    Identify and monitor the current status of all storage devices.
             ◆    Change physical tape devices without rebooting the Backup Exec server.
             ◆    Monitor device usage statistics and track hardware errors. Backup Exec keeps track of
                  the device’s age, hours of use, mounts, number of bytes processed (written and read),
                  errors, when the device was last cleaned, and so on.
             ◆    Manage the physical drives attached to the media server and perform operations on
                  these devices and the media contained in them.

             Note Most of the benefits derived from Backup Exec’s device management functionality
                  are realized when using more than one storage device. However, users with only
                  one drive can still take full advantage of Backup Exec’s device monitoring to help
                  make sure their drives are working properly.

             See also:
                  “VERITAS Backup Exec - SAN Shared Storage Option” on page 939



Viewing Devices
             When Backup Exec is installed, all storage devices connected to the media server are
             automatically recognized as either robotic libraries or stand-alone drives.

             Note Support for a single robotic library drive is included with Backup Exec for Windows
                  Servers. Licenses for additional robotic library drives are available for purchase.

             If you group one or more robotic library slots into partitions, the partition drive pools
             appear in the Devices view under the Drive Pools icon. For information about
             partitioning robotic library slots, see “Creating Robotic Library Partitions” on page 146.
             Click Devices on the navigation bar to see how devices are organized logically in drive
             pools, and how drives are arranged physically on servers. All devices that are displayed
             under All Devices are available, including drive pools, stand-alone drives, robotic
             libraries, backup-to-disk folders, and cascaded drive pools. If the Shared Storage Option is
             installed, you can also view available secondary storage devices on the storage area
             network.




        96                                                                            Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                         Viewing Devices


            Devices view




                                                                                                           Managing
                                                                                                            Devices
            All logical groupings of the physical drives are displayed under Drive Pools and
            Cascaded Drive Pools. Cascaded drive pools are displayed under servers because they
            only consist of drives from that server; they effectively act as a single device under that
            server.
            The default drive pool All Drives (Server Name) contains the server’s locally attached
            drives as well as any Backup-to-Disk Folders created. Backup-to-Disk Folders are
            destination devices for backups that are directed to your hard disk. The data from these
            backups is saved on disk as backup files. If you are using the SAN Shared Storage Option,
            each server on the SAN will have an All Drives (Server Name) node that contains both
            local and shared devices available to the server. At installation, all storage devices are
            automatically assigned to All Drives (Server Name).
            See also:
                “Viewing Media Information” on page 98
                “Viewing Drive Pool Properties” on page 111
                “Viewing Properties of a Cascaded Drive Pool” on page 117
                “Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics” on page 122
                “About Devices in the Shared Storage Environment” on page 943


Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                    97
Viewing Devices


        Viewing Media Information
             If you select a drive or select Slots from the Devices view, information for the media
             contained in the drive or slot appears in the right pane. This information also appears
             when All Media is selected from the Media view.
             Information appearing includes:
             ◆    Slot number. Number of the slot. This field only appears if Slots has been selected.
             ◆    Bar Code. Label obtained from a bar code reader. This field only appears if Slots has
                  been selected. Bar code information only appears if the robotic library has a bar code
                  reader and a bar code label is on the media.
             ◆    Media Label. Name of the media label. The name can be:
                  -   Assigned automatically by Backup Exec.
                  -   Assigned or changed by the administrator.
                  -   A pre-assigned bar code label.
             ◆    Media Description. By default, displays the original media label if the media is
                  imported media. If the media description has been edited, the new description
                  appears. Otherwise, this field is blank.
             ◆    Allocated Date. Date and time that the media was allocated to a media set as a result of
                  an overwrite operation.
             ◆    Media Set. Name of the media set in which the media is assigned.
             ◆    Overwrite Protected Until. Date and time on which the media’s overwrite protection
                  ends. Until that date and time, the media cannot be overwritten.
             ◆    Appendable Until. Date and time until which the media can be appended.
             ◆    Available Capacity. The amount of expected raw capacity on the media that remains
                  unused. Some tape devices support the ability to read the amount of remaining
                  capacity of the media that is currently loaded in the device. If a tape device supports
                  reading of the remaining capacity amount, then Available capacity is derived from
                  the remaining capacity amount. Otherwise, Available capacity is calculated by
                  subtracting Bytes written from Total capacity. Because Free space is reported in terms
                  of unused raw capacity, review Bytes written and Compression ratio to better
                  estimate if there is enough free space to accommodate a specific job.
             ◆    Total Capacity. The amount of expected total raw capacity of the media. Some tape
                  devices support the ability to read the amount of Total capacity of the media that is
                  currently loaded in the device. If a tape device supports reading of the total capacity
                  amount, then Total capacity is derived from the total capacity amount. Otherwise,
                  Total capacity is estimated based on past usage of the media.




        98                                                                             Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                    Configuring Devices


            ◆   Bytes Written. The amount of data that has been written into blocks on the media.
                Bytes written may differ from Used capacity due to the effects of data compression
                and media flaws. Data compression will tend to increase Bytes written when
                compared to Used capacity. Media flaws will decrease Bytes written when compared
                to Used capacity.
            ◆   Compression Ratio. The ratio of Bytes written to Used capacity. Compression ratio will
                show the overall effect that data compression and media flaws are having on the
                amount of data that is being stored on the media.
            See also:
                “VERITAS Backup Exec - Library Expansion Option” on page 1175
                “About Devices in the Shared Storage Environment” on page 943



Configuring Devices
            Backup Exec provides two wizards for configuring and adding storage devices to your
            media server:




                                                                                                          Managing
            ◆   The Device Configuration Wizard. This wizard, which appears when Backup Exec is first




                                                                                                           Devices
                started, allows you to verify that all of the storage devices attached to your system
                appear, and to ensure that robotic libraries and storage devices are properly
                configured. You can also use the Device Configuration Wizard to configure Backup
                Folders on your hard disk. On the Tools menu, point to Wizards, and then select
                Device Configuration Wizard to run this wizard at any time.
            ◆   The Hot-swappable Device Wizard. This wizard allows you to replace or add storage
                devices without having to reboot the media server.
            If you are using a robotic library, make sure the robotic library hardware is configured
            properly.
            See also:
                “First Time Startup Wizard” on page 80
                “Hot Swap for Storage Devices” on page 100
                 “Setting Up Robotic Library Hardware” on page 1175




Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                  99
Configuring Devices


        Hot Swap for Storage Devices
              You can replace or add a hot-swappable tape drive on a Backup Exec media server
              without having to reboot the server, provided the media server is not a Windows NT 4.0
              server. The Hot-swappable Device Wizard guides you through the process.
              After you start the Hot-swappable Device Wizard and close the Backup Exec
              Administration console, the Hot-Swappable Device Wizard waits until any jobs that were
              processing are completed. The wizard pauses the Backup Exec media server and stops the
              Backup Exec services. You can then add or replace any storage devices. The wizard detects
              the new or replaced device, and adds information about the device to the Backup Exec
              database. The wizard is then completed, and you can reopen the Backup Exec console.
              The new storage device is displayed in the Devices view, and usage statistics for the
              drives begin accumulating. You may want to add the new drive to a drive pool or
              cascaded drive pool.
              The replaced storage device is displayed in the Devices view with a status of Offline. To
              remove the storage device from Backup Exec, you must disable it and then delete it from
              the Devices view.

              Note Only tape drives are supported for hot swapping and adding. The tape drives must
                   be hot-swap capable. See the owner’s manual for your tape drive for more details.


        ▼     To start the Hot-swappable Device Wizard:

              1. On Tools menu, point to Wizards, and then click Hot-swappable Device Wizard.

              2. Follow the on-screen prompts.


        Pausing, Resuming, and Renaming Devices
              You can pause and resume the media server and all of its storage devices, including
              robotic library drives, stand-alone drives, and backup-to-disk folders. You can also
              rename the media server’s storage devices as well as any attached robotic libraries.

        ▼     To pause or resume the media server:

              1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

              2. Click the server icon.




        100                                                                          Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                    Configuring Devices


            3. Under Drive Tasks in the task pane, select Paused.
                A check mark appears next to the Paused option if the media server is currently
                paused.
                If the media server was not already paused, it is now paused. If the media server was
                already paused, it is now resumed.

        ▼   To pause or resume a robotic library or drive:

            1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

            2. Click the robotic library drive or stand-alone drive.

            3. Under Drive Tasks in the task pane, select Paused.
                A check mark appears next to the Paused option if the drive is currently paused.
                If the drive was not already paused, it is now paused. If the drive was already paused,
                it is now resumed.

        ▼   To rename a robotic library or drive:




                                                                                                          Managing
                                                                                                           Devices
            1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

            2. Click the robotic library or drive that you want to rename.

            3. Under General Tasks in the task pane, click Rename.

            4. On the Rename dialog box, type the new name, and then click OK.
            See also:
                “Renaming a Backup Folder” on page 154
                “Pausing and Resuming a Backup Folder” on page 157
                “Renaming a Drive Pool” on page 110
                “Renaming a Cascaded Drive Pool” on page 117




Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                 101
Using Drive Pools


Using Drive Pools
              A drive pool is a grouping of drives for Backup Exec operations. Drives can belong to more
              than one drive pool, unless a drive is in a cascaded drive pool. Drive pools can contain
              different types of drives, including specific drives in multi-drive robotic libraries.
              In a drive pool, Backup Exec selects the oldest recyclable media in all of the drives in the
              drive pool to use first. If more than one media meeting the requirements is found, Backup
              Exec then searches the drives in a drive pool according to drive priority and uses the
              oldest recyclable media in the drive that has the highest priority.
              When you submit a backup job to a drive pool, the job is automatically sent to the first
              available storage device in that drive pool. As other jobs are created and started, they can
              run concurrently on other storage devices in the drive pool. By dynamically allocating
              drives as jobs are submitted, Backup Exec processes jobs quickly and efficiently.
              Drive pools also provide automatic job rescheduling. For example, if a drive pool contains
              four stand-alone devices and the first device fails because of a hardware error, the job that
              was running on the failed device is resubmitted and placed on hold, and the other jobs are
              automatically routed to the working devices in the drive pool.
              You can assign priorities to drives in a drive pool so that a specific drive is used before
              other drives in the drive pool. The priority assigned to a drive in one drive pool is
              unrelated to that drive’s priority in any other drive pool. For example, if Drive 1 is placed
              in both Drive Pool A and Drive Pool B, you can assign different priorities to it in each
              drive pool. Drive 1 can have a high priority in Drive Pool A and a low priority in Drive
              Pool B.
              You can also send backup jobs to specific drives in a drive pool. However, if that drive is
              busy, the job must wait until the drive becomes available. When a specific drive is
              assigned, the job cannot be automatically routed to the next available drive.
              All Drives (Server Name) is the default drive pool, created when Backup Exec is installed.
              All devices recognized by Backup Exec at startup are automatically assigned to All Drives
              (Server Name). You can create other drive pools to meet your particular requirements, and
              assign and reassign storage devices to these pools. For example, you may want to separate
              high-performance drives from lower performance drives in a separate drive pool in order
              to send high-priority jobs to the fast drive pool for quicker completion.
              See also:
                    “Using Cascaded Drive Pools” on page 112




        102                                                                             Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                           Using Drive Pools


        Creating Drive Pools
            You can place any stand-alone drives, and any drives in single or multiple drive robotic
            libraries, into a drive pool.
            Drives that are in a cascaded drive pool are not available to be placed in another drive
            pool unless they are deleted from the cascaded drive pool first.

        ▼   To create a drive pool:

            1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

            2. Click Drive Pools.

            3. Under Drive Pool Tasks in the task pane, select New drive pool.

                New Drive Pool dialog box




                                                                                                               Managing
                                                                                                                Devices
            4. Select the appropriate options as follows:

                New Drive Pool fields

                Item                     Description

                Drive Pool Name          Type the name of the new drive pool that you want to create.

                Select the drives to be Select the drives you want to include in the new drive pool.
                included in this Drive
                Pool


            5. Click OK.
            See also:
                “Using Cascaded Drive Pools” on page 112
                “Creating a Cascaded Drive Pool” on page 113


Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                      103
Using Drive Pools


        Adding Drives to a Drive Pool
              You can add a drive to an existing drive pool, unless the drive is in a cascaded drive pool.
              Drives that are in a cascaded drive pool will be automatically deleted from the cascaded
              drive pool if they are placed in another drive pool.

        ▼     To add a drive to a drive pool:

              1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

              2. Select the drive pool.

              3. Under Drive Pool Tasks in the task pane, select Add device.

                  Add Drives to Drive Pool dialog box




              4. Select the appropriate options as follows:

                  Add Drives to Drive Pool options

                  Item                     Description

                  Drive Pool Name          Displays the name of the drive pool to which you want to add
                                           drives.

                  Select the drives to be Select the drives you want to include in the drive pool.
                  included in this Drive
                  Pool


              5. Click OK.




        104                                                                                Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                         Using Drive Pools


        Setting Priorities for Drives in a Drive Pool
            You can set a priority that determines the order in which the drives in a drive pool are
            used. The default priority is 10 so all drives have the same priority initially. The drive to
            which you assign the lowest number is the first drive to be used in the drive pool; for
            example, a drive with a priority of 1 is used before a drive with a priority of 5. You can set
            a priority of 1 to 99.

            Note Overwrite and append periods for media take precedence over drive priority.

            The Priority option is only displayed when viewing drive properties under a drive pool
            icon. Drives displayed under the Stand-alone Drives icon or Robotic Libraries icon do
            not display a Priority option because the drive may belong to multiple drive pools and
            have a different priority in each drive pool.

        ▼   To set drive priority in a drive pool:

            1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

            2. Under Drive Pools, select the drive pool containing the drive for which you want to




                                                                                                             Managing
                                                                                                              Devices
               set a priority.

            3. Select the drive.

            4. Under General Tasks in the task pane, select Properties.




Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                   105
Using Drive Pools


              5. Click Configuration.

                  Configuration tab




              6. In Priority, Type a number from 1 to 99, with 1 designating this drive as the first drive
                 to be used in the drive pool.

              7. Click OK.
              See also:
                  “Viewing Drive Configuration Properties” on page 125




        106                                                                            Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                          Using Drive Pools


        Deleting Drives from a Drive Pool
            You can delete a drive from a drive pool. The drive will still be in the Backup Exec device
            database and will still be available for use in other drive pools. It is not necessary to delete
            drives from a drive pool before you delete that pool; the drives are automatically removed
            when the pool is deleted.

        ▼   To delete a drive from a drive pool:

            1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

            2. Under Drive Pools, select the drive pool from which you want to delete a drive.

            3. Select the drive you want to remove from the drive pool.
                Make sure you select a drive under Drive Pools and not under the server icon; if you
                delete a drive under the server icon, the drive is deleted from the database, not just
                from the drive pool.

            4. Under Drive Pool Tasks in the task pane, select Remove device.




                                                                                                               Managing
                                                                                                                Devices
                Delete Drive From Drive Pool dialog box




            5. To remove the displayed drive from a drive pool, click Yes.




Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                     107
Using Drive Pools


        Deleting Drive Pools
              It is not necessary to delete drives from a drive pool before you delete that pool; the drives
              are automatically removed when the pool is deleted.
              You cannot delete the All Drives drive pool, but you can delete all of the drives in it.
              If there are scheduled jobs assigned to the deleted drive pool, you are prompted to
              redirect them to another drive pool.

        ▼     To delete a drive pool:

              1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

              2. Under Drive Pools, select the drive pool you want to delete.

              3. Under General Tasks on the task pane, select Delete.

                  Delete Drive Pool dialog box




              4. Click Yes or Yes to All to delete the drive pool or pools that are displayed.

              5. If there are scheduled jobs assigned to the deleted drive pool, you are prompted to
                 redirect the jobs to another drive pool or stand-alone device.
              See also:
                  “Deleting Drives from a Drive Pool” on page 107
                  “Retargeting Jobs from a Deleted Drive Pool or Media Set” on page 109




        108                                                                             Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                          Using Drive Pools


        Retargeting Jobs from a Deleted Drive Pool or Media Set
            If a drive pool or media set is deleted, and there are scheduled jobs assigned to that drive
            pool or media set, you are prompted to redirect the jobs to another drive pool or
            stand-alone device, or to another media set.

        ▼   To redirect a scheduled job:

            1. When prompted to redirect the jobs, click Yes.

                Retarget Job dialog box




                The job to be redirected is displayed in the Retarget Job dialog box. If there are
                scheduled jobs assigned to the deleted drive pool or media set, you are prompted to
                redirect the jobs to another drive pool or media set.




                                                                                                              Managing
                                                                                                               Devices
            2. Click the <Down arrow> to see more drive pools, and then select the new drive pool,
               standalone drive, or media set to which you want to redirect the scheduled jobs.

            3. Click Yes or Yes to All to redirect the job or jobs that are displayed to the new drive
               pool, drive, or media set.

            Note If you choose not to retarget a job, the job will fail. To later target the job to another
                 device, you will need to manually edit the job.




Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                     109
Using Drive Pools


        Renaming a Drive Pool
              The default All Drives drive pool cannot be renamed, but you can rename any
              user-created drive pool using either the Rename option or the drive pool’s Properties
              dialog box.

        ▼     To rename a drive pool:

              1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

              2. Under Drive Pools, select the drive pool you want to rename.

              3. Under General Tasks, select Rename.

              4. On the Rename dialog box, type the new name to assign to this drive pool, and then
                 click OK.
                  The drive pool is listed with the new name.
              See also:
                  “Viewing Drive Pool Properties” on page 111




        110                                                                         Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                      Using Drive Pools


        Viewing Drive Pool Properties
            Use Properties to view properties for a drive pool, or to rename the drive pool.

        ▼   To view properties for a drive pool:

            1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

            2. Under Drive Pools in the tree view, select the drive pool.

            3. Under General Tasks in the task pane, select Properties.

                Drive Pool Properties dialog box




                                                                                                          Managing
                                                                                                           Devices




Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                111
Using Cascaded Drive Pools


                  The Drive Pool Properties dialog box provides the following information:

                  Drive Pool properties

                  Item                      Description

                  Name                      Displays the name of the drive pool. Rename the drive pool by
                                            typing a new name in this field.

                  Creation date             The date and time that this drive pool was created.

                  Full name                 Displays the drive pool name.


              4. After viewing the drive pool properties, click OK.



Using Cascaded Drive Pools
              You can cascade (link) multiple stand-alone drives together to create one logical drive. By
              cascading the drives, backup jobs can automatically “roll” to the media in the next drive
              when the media is filled. Although multiple drives are linked to form the cascaded drive
              pool, only the name of the cascaded drive pool is listed as the destination device when a
              backup job is created.
              Drives in a cascaded drive pool are not available for concurrent operations. Only one
              drive is used at a time. The next drive in the cascaded drive pool is used only when a
              backup job fills the current media, or when the next job requires a different media (such as
              an overwrite job).
              Use cascaded drive pools to run unattended backup jobs, or to make sure a large backup
              job will complete without operator intervention. You may also want to use cascaded drive
              pools if you want data from a job or group of jobs to reside on the same tape family.
              See also:
                  “Using Drive Pools” on page 102




        112                                                                               Administrator’s Guide
                                                                            Using Cascaded Drive Pools


        Requirements for Using Cascaded Drive Pools
            In order to cascade drives, the drives must be the same drive type, such as DLT 32K. To
            determine the drive type, look in the drive’s property page. For more information, see
            “Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics” on page 122.

            Caution If a drive that does not support hardware compression is added to a cascaded
                    drive pool, the hardware compression option on all other drives in that pool is
                    automatically disabled. You can enable the hardware compression option on the
                    other drives again, but the pool will then have mixed compression, which could
                    make restore operations difficult.



        Creating a Cascaded Drive Pool
            When you select drives for a cascaded drive pool, only drives of the same drive type are
            displayed for selection.

            Note Overwrite and append periods for media take precedence over drive priority.




                                                                                                         Managing
                                                                                                          Devices
        ▼   To create a cascaded drive pool:

            1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

            2. Select Cascaded Drive Pools.

            3. Under Drive Pool Tasks in the task pane, select New drive pool.

                New Cascaded Drive Pool dialog box




Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                113
Using Cascaded Drive Pools


              4. Select the appropriate options as follows:

                  New Cascaded Drive Pool options

                  Item                    Description

                  Drive Pool Name         Type the name of the new cascaded drive pool that you want to
                                          create.

                  Drive Type              Select the type of drive you want to use in this cascaded drive pool.
                                          After you select a drive type, only drives of that same type are
                                          displayed in the selection list.

                  Select the drives to be Add the drives you want to include in the new cascaded drive pool
                  included in the         by selecting the drive.
                  Cascaded Drive Pool. Any drives moved to a cascaded drive pool will be removed from
                                          any drive pools they are currently in.


              5. Click OK.
                  The new cascaded drive pool is displayed in the Cascaded Drive Pool list in the
                  Devices view.
              See also:
                  “Deleting Drives from a Cascaded Drive Pool” on page 115
                  “Deleting a Cascaded Drive Pool” on page 116


        Adding Drives to a Cascaded Drive Pool
              You can add a drive to an existing cascaded drive pool provided the drive is of the same
              type as the drives already in the pool and provided that the drive is not in another
              cascaded drive pool. Drives that are part of a normal drive pool will be removed from the
              other pool when added to a cascaded drive pool. Also, drives added to a cascaded drive
              pool will be removed from other drive pools.

        ▼     To add a drive to a cascaded drive pool:

              1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

              2. Select the cascaded drive pool to which you want to add a drive.

              3. Under Drive Pool Tasks in the task pane, select Add device.




        114                                                                                Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                  Using Cascaded Drive Pools


            4. Select the appropriate options as follows:

                Add Drives to Cascaded Drive Pool fields

                Item                     Description

                Drive Pool Name          Displays the name of the drive pool to which you want to add
                                         drives.

                Select the drives to be Select the drives you want to include in the drive pool.
                included in this Drive
                Pool


            5. Click OK.


        Deleting Drives from a Cascaded Drive Pool
            Use Delete to remove a drive from a cascaded drive pool, or drag the drive you want to
            delete from the cascaded drive pool to the Stand-alone Drives icon. If the move is allowed,




                                                                                                               Managing
            the mouse arrow icon displays a plus sign (+) in a box. The drive will still be in the Backup




                                                                                                                Devices
            Exec device database and will still be available for use in other drive pools. It is not
            necessary to delete drives from a cascaded drive pool before you delete that pool; the
            drives are automatically removed when the cascaded drive pool is deleted.
            The following instructions describe the menu-driven method.

        ▼   To delete a drive from a cascaded drive pool:

            1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

            2. Select the cascaded drive pool from which you want to delete a drive.

            3. Select the drive you want to delete from the cascaded drive pool.




Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                        115
Using Cascaded Drive Pools


              4. Under Drive Pool Tasks in the task pane, select Remove device.

                  Delete Drive From Cascaded Drive Pool dialog box




                  The name of the drive you want to remove from the cascaded drive pool is displayed.

              5. Click Yes to remove this drive from the cascaded drive pool.
              See also:
                  “Deleting a Cascaded Drive Pool” on page 116
                  “Erasing Media” on page 174


        Deleting a Cascaded Drive Pool
              It is not necessary to delete drives from a cascaded drive pool before you delete that pool;
              the drives are automatically removed from the pool when the pool is deleted.
              If there are scheduled jobs assigned to the deleted cascaded drive pool, you are prompted
              to redirect them to another device or drive pool.

        ▼     To delete a cascaded drive pool:

              1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

              2. Under Cascaded Drive Pools, select the drive pool you want to delete.

              3. Click Delete on the shortcut menu.
                  The name of the cascaded drive pool you selected to delete appears.

              4. Click Yes.

              5. If there are scheduled jobs assigned to the deleted drive pool, you are prompted to
                 redirect the jobs to another drive pool or stand-alone device.
              See also:
                  “Retargeting Jobs from a Deleted Drive Pool or Media Set” on page 109



        116                                                                            Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                Using Cascaded Drive Pools


        Renaming a Cascaded Drive Pool
            You can rename a cascaded drive pool using either the Rename option or by typing a new
            name on the cascaded drive pool’s Properties dialog box.

        ▼   To rename a cascaded drive pool:

            1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

            2. Under Cascaded Drive Pools, select the drive pool you want to rename.

            3. Under General Tasks in the task pane, select Rename.

            4. On the Rename dialog box, type the new name for the cascaded drive pool, and click
               OK.


        Viewing Properties of a Cascaded Drive Pool
            Use Properties to view properties for a cascaded drive pool, or to rename the cascaded




                                                                                                             Managing
            drive pool.




                                                                                                              Devices
        ▼   To view properties of a cascaded drive pool:

            1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

            2. Under Cascaded Drive Pools, select the drive pool for which you want to view
               properties.

            3. Under General Tasks in the task pane, select Properties.
                The Cascaded Drive Pool Properties dialog box provides the following information:

                Cascaded Drive Pool properties

                Item                      Description

                Name                      Displays the name of the drive pool. Rename the drive pool by
                                          typing a new name in this field.

                Creation Date             Displays the date and time that this drive pool was created.

                Full Name                 Displays the drive pool name.


            4. After viewing the properties of the cascaded drive pool, click OK.


Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                     117
Viewing Server Properties and Running Server Diagnostics


Viewing Server Properties and Running Server Diagnostics
              Use Properties to view information about your media server, including the version of
              Backup Exec installed, and system information. From the properties’ System tab, you can
              also run BE Diagnostics, a Backup Exec diagnostic utility. This utility creates a file
              (bediag_(machine_name).txt) that includes useful configuration information for the server.
              For more information on using BE Diagnostics, see “Using Backup Exec’s Diagnostic
              Utility BEDIAG” on page 572. Technical services can use the results of BE Diagnostics to
              troubleshoot problems.

              Note You can also run BE Diagnostics for a remote server (see “Running Diagnostics on
                   Remote Server” on page 575).


        ▼     To view server properties:

              1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

              2. Select the server from the tree view.

              3. Under General Tasks in the task pane, select Properties.

                  Server tab




        118                                                                          Administrator’s Guide
                                                   Viewing Server Properties and Running Server Diagnostics


                The Server Properties Server tab provides the following information:

                Server tab

                Item                     Description

                Name                     The name of the media server.

                Status                   The status of the media server. An active media server’s status
                                         displays “Running”.

                Version                  Backup Exec version and revision information.

                Description              The type of server.

                Serial #                 The serial number under which Backup Exec is installed. “Eval
                                         Edition” is displayed if a serial number was not provided during
                                         Backup Exec’s installation.

                Server time




                                                                                                                  Managing
                                                                                                                   Devices
                Start date and time      The date and time Backup Exec was initially installed and launched
                                         on this media server.

                Current date and time    The current date and time.

                Statistics

                Number of devices        The number of storage devices connected to this media server. In
                                         systems with multi-drive robotic libraries attached, each drive in the
                                         robotic library represents a separate device.

                Number of active jobs    The number of jobs currently in progress on this media server.

                Total number of alerts   The total number of alerts generated on this media server since the
                since server startup     Backup Exec services were last started.

                Total number of jobs     The total number of jobs executed on this media server since the
                completed since          Backup Exec services were last started.
                server startup




Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                        119
Viewing Server Properties and Running Server Diagnostics


              4. Click System to view additional information about the media server.

                 System tab




                 The Server Properties System tab provides the following information:

                 System tab for media server Properties dialog box

                 Item                     Description

                 Operating system

                 Type                     The type of operating system currently running on this media
                                          server.

                 Version                  The version of the operating system.

                 Build                    The build number of the operating system.

                 Processor

                 Type                     The type of processor installed in this media server.

                 Level                    The processor level on this server.

                 Number of processors The number of processors on this server.




        120                                                                                Administrator’s Guide
                                                   Viewing Server Properties and Running Server Diagnostics

                System tab for media server Properties dialog box (continued)

                Item                     Description

                Memory

                Physical                 The amount of hardware RAM installed in the media server.

                Page size                The size of a single Windows NT virtual memory page.

                Virtual remaining        The amount of virtual memory remaining on the system.

                Page file                The size of the Windows NT virtual memory paging file.

                Run diagnostics          Note If you call Technical Support with a problem, they may request
                                              that you run Diagnostics and provide them with the results.
                                              Technical Support can use the results of this utility to pinpoint
                                              your problem and quickly solve it.
                                         Click to run the Diagnostics utility to a file
                                         (bediag(machine_name).txt) that includes useful configuration
                                         information for the server such as:




                                                                                                                  Managing
                                                                                                                   Devices
                                             Account groups, account privileges, and environment settings.
                                             Backup Exec Software version and registry information, Backup
                                             Exec Agent listing, Windows NT version information, SCSI
                                             hardware configuration, SQL Server information, Driver services
                                             information, and NT Services information.
                                             File Server information, supported shared directories, and
                                             Windows sockets information.

            5. After viewing Properties for the media server, click OK.




Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                        121
Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics


Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics
              Backup Exec provides details on each drive connected to a media server and the first
              robotic library drive.

              Note Support for a single robotic library drive for use with Backup Exec is provided
                   when you purchase Backup Exec. To enable support for additional robotic library
                   drives, you must purchase the Library Expansion Option.

              Most of the details presented in the drive properties tabbed pages are for information
              only.

        ▼     To view a drive’s properties:

              1.   On the navigation bar, click Devices.

              2. Expand the server icon, click Stand-alone Drives, or if the drive is attached to a
                 robotic library, click Robotic Libraries.

              3.   Select the drive you want to view properties for.

              4. Under General Tasks in the task pane, select Properties.
              See also:
                   “Viewing General Drive Properties” on page 123
                   “Viewing Drive Configuration Properties” on page 125
                   “Viewing Drive SCSI Information Properties” on page 131
                   “Viewing Drive Statistics Properties” on page 132
                   “Viewing Drive Cleaning Properties” on page 134




        122                                                                           Administrator’s Guide
                                                          Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics


        Viewing General Drive Properties
            The Drive Properties General tab provides information about the drive. Most of this
            information is for viewing only; however, you can rename your drive from this tabbed
            page by typing the new name in the Name field.

            General drive properties




                                                                                                              Managing
                                                                                                               Devices
            The General tab for drive properties provides the following information:

            General drive properties

            Item                       Description

            Name                       The name of the drive. You can also rename the device by typing a
                                       new name in this field.

            Vendor                     The name of the vendor of the drive.

            Product ID                 The product ID from the SCSI Inquiry string.

            Firmware version           The version of the firmware used in the device.

            Drive type                 The media and memory specifications of the device.

            Media type                 The type of media used in the drive.



Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                    123
Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics

              General drive properties (continued)

              Item                         Description

              Date in service              The date this device was first detected by this installation of Backup
                                           Exec.

              Full name                    Displays the drive name and server name.

              Serial number                The serial number of the drive.

              See also:
                  “Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics” on page 122
                  “Viewing Backup Folder Properties” on page 158




        124                                                                                  Administrator’s Guide
                                                        Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics


        Viewing Drive Configuration Properties
            The Drive Properties Configuration tab allows you to:
            ◆   Enable or disable a device.
            ◆   Enable or disable hardware compression (if compression is supported by the drive).
            ◆   Pause and resume the drive.
            ◆   Change the preferred block size, buffer size, buffer count, and high water count.

            Caution Preferred Configuration settings are used to tune the performance of backup
                    and restore operations.

                       Changing Preferred Configuration settings is not generally recommended and
                       may have a negative effect on your backup and system performance. Any
                       changes should be thoroughly tested to make sure system performance does
                       not deteriorate before being put into general use.


            Configuration drive properties




                                                                                                            Managing
                                                                                                             Devices




Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                 125
Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics


              The Configuration tab for drive properties provides the following information:

              Drive configuration properties

              Item                             Description

              Enable device for Backup         Select this check box in order for Backup Exec to use this device.
              Exec                             Clear this check box to disable the device, and allow it to be available
                                               for other applications. If the box is clear, the device is disabled, and
                                               cannot be used by Backup Exec.
                                               After changing the option, click OK.

              Pause device                     Select this check box to pause the device, and then click OK. To
                                               resume the device, clear the check box and click OK.

              Device offline                   If the device is offline, this message is displayed. No operations are
                                               allowed on the device until it is online again. When the device is
                                               online, no message is displayed.
                                               The device is displayed as offline if:
                                                  The device was turned off after Backup Exec was started.
                                                  The device was being used by another application (such as a
                                                  Windows backup utility) when Backup Exec was started.
                                                  The device is removed from the computer.
                                                  A tape drive failure occurred.
                                                  A tape is stuck in the drive.
                                                  The firmware of the drive was updated; Backup Exec will behave
                                                  as if the drive with its old name or identity no longer exists.

                                               To put the device online, try the following:
                                                  Check to make sure the device has power and that cables are
                                                  properly attached. Turn the device on and reboot the server, or
                                                  stop and restart the Backup Exec services.
                                                  Stop the utility that is using the device, and then reboot the
                                                  server, or stop and restart the Backup Exec services.
                                                  To restart the Backup Exec services:
                                                  For Windows NT 4.0, go to Settings, select Control Panel, and
                                                  then select Services.
                                                  For Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003, go
                                                  to Computer Management, select System Tools, select Services,
                                                  and then select Applications.
                                                  If the drive firmware has changed, delete the drive and restart
                                                  Backup Exec services. After the drive appears with its new
                                                  firmware identity, retarget all jobs that were using the old drive
                                                  name to the new drive name.


        126                                                                                       Administrator’s Guide
                                                               Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics


            Drive configuration properties (continued)

            Item                          Description

            Enable compression            If this option is available, this device is capable of supporting
                                          hardware compression.
                                          Select this check box to enable hardware compression.
                                          If a job is configured to use hardware compression, but is run on a
                                          drive on which hardware compression is disabled (even though it is
                                          supported), hardware compression is considered unavailable and is
                                          not used.
                                          If a drive that does not support hardware compression is added to a
                                          cascaded drive pool, the hardware compression option on all other
                                          drives in that pool is automatically disabled. You can enable the
                                          hardware compression option on the other drives again, but the pool
                                          will then have mixed compression, and could make restore
                                          operations difficult.

            Priority                      The Priority field is only available when the drive belongs to a drive
                                          pool and is selected for viewing under the drive pool icon. Drive
                                          properties displayed under the Robotic Libraries or Stand-alone




                                                                                                                       Managing
                                                                                                                        Devices
                                          Drives icon do not display the Priority field. For more information,
                                          see “Setting Priorities for Drives in a Drive Pool” on page 105.
                                          Set a priority for a drive that determines the order in which the
                                          drives in a drive pool are used. In the Priority box, type a number
                                          from 1 to 99, with 1 designating this drive as the first drive to be used
                                          in the drive pool, or click the arrows to select a value.
                                          The default priority is 10 so all drives have the same priority initially.
                                          The drive to which you assign the lowest number is the first drive to
                                          be used in the drive pool; for example, a drive with a priority of 1 is
                                          used before a drive with a priority of 5.
                                          Note Overwrite and append periods for media take precedence over
                                               drive priority.




Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                             127
Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics


              Drive configuration properties (continued)

              Item                          Description

              Preferred configuration

              Note Preferred Configuration settings are used to tune the performance of backup and restore
                   operations.

                     Changing Preferred Configuration settings is not generally recommended and may have a
                     negative effect on your backup and system performance. Any changes should be thoroughly
                     tested to make sure system performance does not deteriorate before being put into general
                     use.

              Block size (per device)       The default is the preferred size of the blocks of data written to new
                                            media in this device.
                                            You can change the block size by selecting another size from the
                                            scroll list, and then clicking OK.
                                            Some devices (for example, DLT drives) provide better performance
                                            when larger block sizes are used. The preferred block size can range
                                            from 512 bytes to 64 kilobytes.
                                            Backup Exec does not ensure that the requested block size is in fact
                                            supported by that drive. You should check the drive specifications to
                                            make sure that the block size is supported. If the drive does not
                                            support a block size, it will default to its standard block size.
                                            If the drive does not support block size configuration, this option is
                                            unavailable.

              Buffer size (per device)      The default is the preferred amount of data sent to the drive on each
                                            read or write request. The buffer size must be an even multiple of the
                                            block size.
                                            You can change the buffer size by selecting another size from the
                                            scroll list, and then clicking OK. Depending on the amount of
                                            memory in your system, increasing this value may improve drive
                                            performance. Each type of drive requires a different buffer size to
                                            achieve maximum throughput.

              Buffer count                  The default is the preferred number of buffers allocated for this
                                            device.
                                            You can change the buffer count by selecting another count from the
                                            scroll list, and then clicking OK.
                                            Depending on the amount of memory in your system, increasing this
                                            value may improve drive performance. Each type of drive requires a
                                            different number of buffers to achieve maximum throughput.
                                            If you change the buffer count, you may need to adjust the high
                                            water count accordingly.


        128                                                                                    Administrator’s Guide
                                                               Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics


            Drive configuration properties (continued)

            Item                          Description

            High water count              The default is the preferred number of buffers to be filled before data
                                          is first sent to the drive, and any time after that if the drive
                                          underruns.
                                          You can change the high water count by selecting another count
                                          from the scroll list, and then clicking OK.
                                          The high water count cannot exceed the buffer count. A value of 0
                                          disables the use of high water logic; that is, each buffer is sent to the
                                          drive as it is filled.
                                          The default setting provides satisfactory performance in most
                                          instances; in some configurations, throughput performance may be
                                          increased when other values are specified in this field. If you increase
                                          or decrease the buffer count, the high water count should be adjusted
                                          accordingly. If a drive has a high water count default of 0, it should
                                          be left at 0.

            Default Settings              Click this button to return all the Preferred Configuration settings to
                                          their defaults, and then click OK.




                                                                                                                      Managing
                                                                                                                       Devices
            Read single block mode        Select this check box to have this device read only one block of data
                                          at a time. If this check box is selected, the drive will read a single
                                          block of data at a time, regardless of the size of the buffer block.
                                          VERITAS recommends selecting this option if the drive is a shared
                                          storage device.

            Write single block mode       Select this check box to have this device write only one block of data
                                          at a time. Selecting this check box provides greater control over the
                                          handling of data write errors.
                                          VERITAS recommends selecting this option if the drive is a shared
                                          storage device.

            Read SCSI pass-through        Select this check box to have this device read data without going
            mode                          through a Microsoft tape device API. Selecting this check box allows
                                          the data to pass directly through the device driver and allows more
                                          detailed information in the event device errors occur.
                                          VERITAS recommends selecting this option if the drive is a shared
                                          storage device.




Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                            129
Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics


              Drive configuration properties (continued)

              Item                          Description

              Write SCSI pass-through       Select this check box to have this device write data without going
              mode                          through the Microsoft tape device API. Selecting this check box
                                            allows data to pass directly through the device driver and allows
                                            more detailed information in the event device errors occur.
                                            VERITAS recommends selecting this option if the drive is a shared
                                            storage device.

              See also:
                  “Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics” on page 122




        130                                                                                  Administrator’s Guide
                                                            Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics


        Viewing Drive SCSI Information Properties

            Drive Properties SCSI Information tab




                                                                                                                Managing
                                                                                                                 Devices
            The Drive Properties SCSI Information tab provides the following information about the
            Small Computer System Interface (SCSI):

            Drive SCSI properties

            Item                         Description

            Inquiry                      The device information read from the device firmware.

            Port                         The identifying number of the port on the server to which the device
                                         is attached.

            Bus                          The identifying number of the bus to which the device is attached.

            Target ID                    The unique SCSI ID number (physical unit number).

            LUN                          The Logical Unit Number of the device.


            See also:
                   “Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics” on page 122



Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                       131
Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics


        Viewing Drive Statistics Properties
              The Drive Properties Statistics tab provides the date the drive was last mounted, drive
              totals such as the total number of bytes written and read, and drive errors. Error rates are
              affected by media, head cleaning, and head wear.
              The documentation included with your device should list the acceptable limits for hard
              and soft errors; if not, check with the hardware manufacturer.

              Drive Properties Statistics tab




              The Statistics tab provides the following information:

              Drive statistics properties

              Item                              Description

              Last mount date                   Last date that media was mounted by this device.

              Drive totals

              Total Bytes written               Number of bytes that have been written by this device.

              Total Bytes read                  Number of bytes that have been read by this device.

              Total mounts                      Number of times media has been mounted by this device.



        132                                                                                     Administrator’s Guide
                                                               Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics

            Drive statistics properties (continued)

            Item                           Description

            Total seeks                    The total number of seek operations (performed when a specific
                                           piece of information is being located) that have been performed by
                                           this device.

            Total Hours in use             The total number of hours that this drive has been in use (performing
                                           read, write, mount, and seek operations).

            Drive errors

            Seek errors                    The number of errors encountered while trying to locate data.

            Soft read errors               The number of recoverable read errors encountered. If you receive
                                           soft errors, it may indicate the beginning of a problem. If you receive
                                           excessive errors for your environment, check the device and perform
                                           maintenance on it, and check the media for damage.

            Hard read errors               The number of unrecoverable read errors encountered. If you receive




                                                                                                                     Managing
                                           hard errors, check the device and perform maintenance on it, and




                                                                                                                      Devices
                                           check the media for damage.

            Soft write errors              The number of recoverable write errors encountered. If you receive
                                           soft errors, it may indicate the beginning of a problem. If you receive
                                           excessive errors for your environment, check the device and perform
                                           maintenance on it, and check the media for damage.

            Hard write errors              The number of unrecoverable write errors encountered. If you
                                           receive hard errors, check the device and perform maintenance on it,
                                           and check the media for damage.

            See also:
                “Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics” on page 122




Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                           133
Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics


        Viewing Drive Cleaning Properties
              The Drive Properties Cleaning tab provides statistics on totals and errors since the last
              cleaning. The documentation included with your device should list the acceptable limits
              for hard and soft errors; if not, check with the hardware manufacturer.
              For robotic library drives, the statistics that appear on the Drive Properties Cleaning tab
              are automatically updated when a cleaning job successfully completes. (Cleaning jobs can
              only be created for a robotic library drive.) If you want to maintain accurate cleaning
              statistics for your stand-alone drives, click Reset Cleaning Statistics after the drive has
              been manually cleaned.

              Drive Properties Cleaning tab




              The Cleaning tab provides the following information:

              Drive cleaning properties

              Item                            Description

              Last cleaning date              The last time a cleaning operation was performed on the drive.

              Hours since last cleaning       The number of hours that the drive has been in use since the last
                                              cleaning.

              Reset Cleaning Statistics       Click this to reset all cleaning statistics to zero (stand-alone drives
                                              only).


        134                                                                                        Administrator’s Guide
                                                             Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics


            Drive cleaning properties (continued)

            Item                         Description

            Totals since last cleaning

            Bytes written                Number of bytes that have been written by this device since the last
                                         cleaning.

            Bytes read                   Number of bytes that have been read by this device since the last
                                         cleaning.

            Total mounts                 Number of times media has been mounted by this device since the
                                         last cleaning.

            Total seeks                  The total number of seek operations (performed when a specific
                                         piece of information is being located) that have been performed by
                                         this device since the last cleaning.

            Hours in use                 The total number of hours that this drive has been in use (performing
                                         read, write, mount, and seek operations) since the last cleaning.




                                                                                                                    Managing
                                                                                                                     Devices
            Errors since last cleaning

            Seek errors                  The number of errors encountered since the last cleaning while
                                         trying to locate data.

            Soft read errors             The number of recoverable read errors encountered since the last
                                         cleaning. If you receive soft errors, it may indicate the beginning of a
                                         problem. If you receive excessive errors for your environment, check
                                         the device and perform maintenance on it, and check the media for
                                         damage.

            Hard read errors             The number of unrecoverable read errors encountered since the last
                                         cleaning. If you receive hard errors, check the device and perform
                                         maintenance on it, and check the media for damage.

            Soft write errors            The number of recoverable write errors encountered since the last
                                         cleaning. If you receive soft errors, it may indicate the beginning of a
                                         problem. If you receive excessive errors for your environment, check
                                         the device and perform maintenance on it, and check the media for
                                         damage.




Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                          135
Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics


              Drive cleaning properties (continued)

              Item                         Description

              Hard write errors            The number of unrecoverable write errors encountered since the last
                                           cleaning. If you receive hard errors, check the device and perform
                                           maintenance on it, and check the media for damage.

              See also:
                  “Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics” on page 122


        Viewing and Specifying a Drive’s Media Types
              Through the Media Types tab of a drive’s Properties dialog box, you can view all known
              media types that can be placed in the drive and specify whether these media types can be
              used for Read or Write operations.

              Drive Properties - Media Type tab




        136                                                                                Administrator’s Guide
                                                             Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics


            The Media Types tab provides the following information:

            Media type options for a drive

            Item                       Description

            Media Type                 Type of media, such as 4mm, and any defined category of this media
                                       type, such as CLN for cleaning tape. Media types that have numbers
                                       appearing in brackets (for example, 4mm [6]) can be used to define
                                       specific bar code rules.

            Read                       Displays Yes if this media type can be read by the drive; otherwise,
                                       displays No.

            Write                      Displays Yes if this media type can be written to by the drive;
                                       otherwise, displays No.


            Backup Exec’s ADAMM database maintains a list of media types, such as 4MM, and then
            further defines the subcategories or specifics of a media type. For example, a 4MM media
            type can include 4MM DDS-1 with a length of 60m and the storage capacity of 1.3 GB.




                                                                                                                 Managing
            Another 4MM tape might also be a 4MM DDS-1 but have a length of 90m and a storage




                                                                                                                  Devices
            capacity of 2.0 GB.
            By default, the Media Types tab for a drive lists all known media type categories and
            allows all media types to be used for both read and write operations. If a number appears
            in brackets behind the media type, that media entry is available for use when creating a
            bar code rule. You can specify that the drive be limited to performing read and write
            operations on specific media types. For example, if your drive’s documentation states that
            the drive cannot perform write operations to a 4MM DDS-4 tape, you can select that
            media type from this dialog box, clear the Write check box, and then click OK. This
            information is then incorporated in the ADAMM database, allowing Backup Exec to
            exclude this media type when searching for media to be used for an operation (such as a
            backup job) requiring the writing of data to the media.
            See also:
                “Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics” on page 122
                “Bar Code Labeling in Mixed Media Libraries” on page 205




Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                         137
Using Robotic Libraries with Backup Exec


Using Robotic Libraries with Backup Exec
              Note Support for a single robotic library drive for use with Backup Exec is provided
                   when you purchase Backup Exec. To enable support for additional robotic library
                   drives, you must purchase the Library Expansion Option.

              Backup Exec’s Advanced Device and Media Management (ADAMM) feature provides
              powerful functionality for robotic libraries. With typical robotic library modules, you
              divide slots in the robotic library into defined groups, and then target backups to those
              groups. This arrangement works fine as long as there is enough media in the group to
              process the jobs targeted there. Problems occur when the data exceeds the available media
              in the group, because operations cannot continue until media is physically added. This
              situation can take place even though slots in the robotic library assigned to other groups
              contain usable media.
              Backup Exec’s Device and Media Management feature solves the problems associated
              with typical robotic library modules. Rather than targeting a backup job to a specific
              group of slots with a finite number of media, Backup Exec accesses all of the media in the
              robotic library and uses media that belongs to the job’s targeted media set. If the backup
              job exceeds the capacity of one piece of media, Backup Exec searches all media contained
              in the robotic library, finds a suitable media, and uses it for the job.
              For example:
                  An operator has a robotic library with six slots. She puts in six blank tapes and targets
                  backup jobs to various media sets within the robotic library. Depending on whether
                  the backups are overwrite or append jobs, Backup Exec automatically allocates
                  available tapes in the robotic library. If a job exceeds the capacity of one tape and
                  another overwritable tape is available in the robotic library, the job will automatically
                  continue on that tape. When Backup Exec runs out of tapes, it prompts the operator to
                  add more Scratch media.
              In a robotic library, Backup Exec selects the oldest recyclable media in the library to use
              first. If more than one media meeting the requirements is found, Backup Exec then selects
              the media in the lowest-numbered slot, that is, media in slot 2 would be chosen over
              equivalent media in slot 4.
              If a job requiring overwritable media is targeted to a robotic library and no overwritable
              media is available, the job is skipped and the next job targeted to the robotic library is
              queued. When overwritable media becomes available either by the addition of media to
              the robotic library or the overwrite protection period expiring for a media currently in the
              robotic library, the skipped job will run.
              See also:
                  “VERITAS Backup Exec - Library Expansion Option” on page 1175



        138                                                                            Administrator’s Guide
                                                                   Using Robotic Libraries with Backup Exec


        Configuring a Robotic Library
            Before installing Backup Exec, make sure the SCSI addresses of the robotic library and the
            storage device are configured properly.
            If you have not already enabled robotic library support, rerun the installation program
            and select Enable Robotic Library Support found in the list of install components. Enable
            Robotic Library Support provides support for a single-drive robotic library or for the first
            drive in a multi-drive robotic library. For support for each additional single-drive robotic
            library, or for each additional drive in a multi-drive robotic library, you must purchase
            and install a Library Expansion Option.
            After enabling robotic library support, check your robotic library’s configuration in the
            Device Configuration Wizard. This wizard appears automatically the first time Backup
            Exec is started, or it can be launched from the Tools menu by selecting Wizards, and then
            selecting Device Configuration Wizard.
            Make sure that each device in the robotic library is properly associated with the robotic
            library. If a robotic library storage device appears in the device list as a stand-alone device,
            you can correct the association by clicking and dragging the drive over the robotic library
            entry. If the robotic arm is not shown, run the installation program and select the Enable
            Robotic Library Support option.




                                                                                                               Managing
                                                                                                                Devices
            If your robotic library uses a zero-based slot configuration, be sure the Slot Base field on
            the Configuration tab of the robot’s Properties dialog box displays 0.
            After completing the configuration of your robotic library, you should perform an
            Inventory operation to update Backup Exec’s media database.
            During startup, Backup Exec expects the storage devices in the robotic library to be empty.
            If there is media in the device, Backup Exec tries to return the media to its original
            magazine slot. If, for any reason, it cannot return the media to the slot, an error message
            appears requesting that the media be ejected from the storage device.
            See also:
                “Setting Up Robotic Library Hardware” on page 1175
                “Installing Backup Exec” on page 48
                “First Time Startup Wizard” on page 80
                “Setting Up Cleaning Jobs for Robotic Library Drives” on page 184




Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                     139
Using Robotic Libraries with Backup Exec


         Viewing Properties of a Robotic Library
              Through the robotic library’s Properties dialog box, you can rename a robotic library,
              enable or disable the device for Backup Exec, specify the slot base numbering, and view
              information about the library.

        ▼     To view properties of a robotic library:

              1.   On the navigation bar, click Devices.

              2. Expand the server icon in the tree view, and then click Robotic Libraries.

              3. Select the robotic library.

              4. Under General Tasks in the task pane, select Properties.
              See also:
                   “Viewing General Robotic Library Properties” on page 141
                   “Viewing Robotic Library Configuration Properties” on page 142
                   “Viewing SCSI Information for a Robotic Library” on page 144
                   “Viewing Status Information for a Robotic Library” on page 145




        140                                                                         Administrator’s Guide
                                                                      Using Robotic Libraries with Backup Exec


            Viewing General Robotic Library Properties
            While most of the information appearing on the General tab for a robotic library’s
            properties dialog box is for viewing only, you can use this dialog to rename your robotic
            library.

            General robotic library properties




                                                                                                                 Managing
                                                                                                                  Devices
            The General tab provides the following information:

            General properties options for robotic library

            Item                        Description

            Name                        The name of the robotic library. You can rename the device by typing a
                                        new name in this field.

            Vendor                      The name of the vendor of the robotic library.

            Product ID                  The product ID from the SCSI Inquiry string.

            Firmware version            The version of the firmware used in the device.

            Robotic Library type        The manufacturer and model number of the robotic library.

            Date in service             The date this device was first detected by Backup Exec.



Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                         141
Using Robotic Libraries with Backup Exec

              General properties options for robotic library

              Item                        Description

              Full name                   Displays the robotic library name and server name; for example, robotic
                                          library name(server name).

              Serial number               Serial number of the robotic library.

              See also:
                  “Viewing Properties of a Robotic Library” on page 140


              Viewing Robotic Library Configuration Properties
              Through the Configuration tab of a Robotic Library’s Properties dialog box, you can
              enable or disable the robotic library for use by Backup Exec, enable startup initialization
              for the robotic library, enable bar code rules, enable Removable Storage, and specify slot
              base numbering.

              Robotic library configuration properties




        142                                                                                  Administrator’s Guide
                                                                         Using Robotic Libraries with Backup Exec


            The Configuration tab provides the following information:

            Configuration properties options for robotic library

            Item                        Description

            Enable device for           Select this check box to have Backup Exec use this device. Clear this
            Backup Exec                 check box to disable the device, and allow it to be available for other
                                        applications. If the check box is clear, the device is disabled, and cannot
                                        be used by Backup Exec.

            Enable startup              Select this option to have Backup Exec initialize the robotic library
            initialization              when Backup Exec is started. Depending upon the robotic library,
                                        initialization can include reading all bar code labels on media.

            Enable bar code rules       Select this check box to enable bar code rules (see “Bar Code Labeling in
                                        Mixed Media Libraries” on page 205).

            Enable Removable            Select this option if you want to allow Removable Storage to share the
            Storage (RSM)               devices in robotic libraries between two or more applications. If the
                                        device is enabled in Removable Storage, Backup Exec uses Removable




                                                                                                                        Managing
                                                                                                                         Devices
                                        Storage for device and media operations; if the device is disabled in
                                        Removable Storage, Backup Exec controls the device directly.
                                        For more information about using Removable Storage with Backup
                                        Exec’s Advanced Device and Media Management feature, see “Using
                                        Microsoft’s Removable Storage Feature with Backup Exec” on page 167

            Slot base                   Depicts the starting slot. Some robotic libraries have slots starting at "0";
                                        others start at "1". If your robotic library uses a zero-based slot
                                        configuration you can reassign how the slots are displayed by typing
                                        the appropriate number in the Slot Base field.


            See also:
                “Viewing Properties of a Robotic Library” on page 140




Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                              143
Using Robotic Libraries with Backup Exec


              Viewing SCSI Information for a Robotic Library
              Robotic library SCSI information




              The SCSI Information tab of a robotic library’s Properties dialog box displays the
              following information:

              SCSI Information for a robotic library

              Item                        Description

              Inquiry                     The device information read from the device firmware.

              Port                        The identifying number of the port on the server to which the device is
                                          attached.

              Bus                         The identifying number of the bus to which the device is attached.

              Target ID                   The unique SCSI ID number (physical unit number).

              LUN                         The Logical Unit Number of the device.


              See also:
                     “Viewing Properties of a Robotic Library” on page 140




        144                                                                                  Administrator’s Guide
                                                                       Using Robotic Libraries with Backup Exec


            Viewing Status Information for a Robotic Library
            Robotic library status properties




                                                                                                                  Managing
                                                                                                                   Devices
            The Status tab of a robotic library’s Properties dialog box provides the following
            information:

            Status information for a robotic library

            Item                        Description

            Slot count                  Number of slots in the robotic library.

            Drive element count         Number of drive elements contained in the robotic library.

            Total mounts                Number of times media has been mounted by this device.

            Mount errors                Number of errors encountered while mounting media in a drive.


            See also:
                “Viewing Properties of a Robotic Library” on page 140




Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                          145
Using Robotic Libraries with Backup Exec


        Creating Robotic Library Partitions
              You can group one or more robotic library slots into partitions. Partitioning robotic library
              slots provides more control over which media is used for backup jobs. When you set up
              robotic library partitions, Backup Exec creates a drive pool for each partition. Jobs
              targeted to a partition drive pool run on the media located in the partition’s slots. For
              example, if you set up a partition that contains slots 1 and 2 and you want to run a weekly
              backup only on the media in these slots, you would submit the job to the partition drive
              pool containing slots 1 and 2.
              The partition drive pools appear in the Devices view under the Drive Pools icon. If the
              robotic library is partitioned, Backup Exec searches for the oldest recyclable media in the
              targeted partition only. If more than one media meeting the requirements is found,
              Backup Exec then selects the media in the lowest-numbered slot, that is, media in slot 2
              would be chosen over equivalent media in slot 4.
              In order to fully benefit from Backup Exec’s partition management feature, VERITAS
              recommends that you create a partitioning scheme that best matches the manner in which
              you want to control your backups. For example, some administrators may feel that
              network backups are best managed by allowing access to partitions based on users and
              groups, while others may want to base their partitions on operation types (Backup, Tape
              Rotation, Archive, etc.).

        ▼     To create partitions:

              1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

              2. Expand the server icon, and then click Robotic Libraries.

              3. Select the robotic library containing the slots that you want to partition.

              4. Under Robotic Library Tasks in the task pane, select Configure partitions.




        146                                                                             Administrator’s Guide
                                                                     Using Robotic Libraries with Backup Exec


            5. Select the robotic library slots to include in each partition by clicking the slots on
               which each new partition should begin. A partition divider listing the range of slots
               included in the partition is inserted wherever you click.
                For example, if you want to create two, 5-slot partitions on a robotic library with 10
                slots, click Slot 1 and Slot 6. In this example, Slots 1-5 will be included in the first
                partition and Slots 6-10 will be included in the second.
                Partitions can include any number of robotic library slots; however, the first partition
                cannot be moved or deleted when other partitions exist.

            Note Depending upon your robotic library configuration, the first slot could be
                 numbered 1 or 0. If your robotic library uses a zero-based slot configuration and
                 you assign the first partition to begin with slot 1, the Partition Utility will actually
                 use slot 0 as the first slot for partition 1 and adjust the starting slot accordingly for
                 all other partitions.

                Configure Partitions dialog box
                 Partition
                 Divider




                                                                                                                  Managing
                                                                                                                   Devices
            6. While defining your partitions, use the following buttons to help you make selections:

               Configure Partitions dialog box

                Item                        Description

                Remove Partition            Remove the selected partition. The slots contained in the partition
                                            you are removing are added to the partition preceding it.

                Move Up                     Move the selected partition divider up to increase the number of
                                            slots in the partition. (The number of slots in the preceding
                                            partition is decreased.)



Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                        147
Using Robotic Libraries with Backup Exec


                 Configure Partitions dialog box

                  Item                        Description

                  Move Down                   Move the selected partition divider down to decrease the number
                                              of slots in the partition. (The number of slots in the preceding
                                              partition is increased.)

                  Remove All                  Remove all partition settings.

              7. Click OK after completing the configuration of your partitions.

              8. Click Yes to accept the partitions.
              The partition drive pools appear under Robotic Libraries for the robotic library on which
              they were created. All partition drive pools for a robotic library have the same name and
              display the slot ranges for the partition in parentheses within the name.
              After defining the partitions, you can submit jobs to those partitions’ drive pools. The
              partition drive pools appear in the list of devices along with other devices available to the
              media server. Click the target partition drive pool and run the job as you would any other
              Backup Exec job.


        Redefining Robotic Library Partitions
              You can reassign slots to different partitions or even create or delete partitions from a
              partition drive pool by repeating the steps for creating partitions and providing different
              beginning slot parameters. Suppose, for example, your current setup is a 6-slot robotic
              library with two partitions (partition 1 = slots 1-3 and partition 2 = slots 4-6). If you want
              to have three partitions with slots 1-2 in partition 1, slots 3-5 in partition 2, and slot 6 in
              partition 3, you would select slots 1, 3, and 6.
              Because the first two partition drive pools maintain the same identity, even though the
              slots have been reassigned, jobs submitted to those partition drive pools will not have to
              be retargeted.
              However, if you change from three partitions to two partitions, any jobs submitted to the
              third partition must be retargeted since that third partition no longer exists. Also, if you
              create a new partition that completely contains two or more of the old partitions, jobs
              submitted to the old partition must be retargeted.




        148                                                                                Administrator’s Guide
                                                                      Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files


            For example, if a robotic library that had been partitioned with partition 1 containing slots
            1-2, partition 2 containing slots 3-4, and partition 3 containing slots 5-10 is repartitioned so
            that partition 1 contains slots 1-4, partition 2 contains slots 5-6, and partition 3 contains
            slots 7-10. Any jobs targeted to the old partition 2 (slots 3-4) will need to be retargeted.

            Note If a job is targeted to a particular robotic library drive (or a drive pool that is not a
                 partition drive pool), the job defaults to the first partition in the robotic library.

            See also:
                “Creating Robotic Library Partitions” on page 146
                “Retargeting Jobs from a Deleted Drive Pool or Media Set” on page 109



Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files
            Backup Exec includes a feature called Backup-to-Disk, which allows you to back up data
            to a folder on a hard disk instead of to a tape device. Backup-to-Disk provides a faster
            method of backing up and restoring files, which is useful when you have a short amount
            of time to back up or restore data. You can use it as part of a two-stage backup process




                                                                                                               Managing
                                                                                                                Devices
            where you back up data to disk first and then transfer the data to a tape when more time is
            available.
            Before you can start using Backup-to-Disk, you need to create a backup folder, which is a
            virtual device that Backup Exec treats as any real tape device. Backup folders can be part
            of drive pools, but not cascaded drive pools. When you create a new backup folder,
            Backup Exec automatically assigns a name and a path to it, but you can change both. You
            can create as many backup folders as you need.
            When you back up to disk, Backup Exec places the data in a backup file in the backup
            folder you specify. Backup files are virtual media where backed up data is stored. Backup
            files are like any other type of media, so you can inventory, catalog, erase, and restore
            them.
            Since Backup Exec recognizes the backup folders as devices, you can view them by
            selecting Devices on the navigation bar. You can view the backup files from both the
            Devices view and the Media view in Backup Exec. In Windows Explorer, the backup
            folders display in the path you specified when you added the folders, and the backup files
            display with a.bkf file extension. Each backup folder also contains a changer.cfg file
            and a folder.cfg file, which store information about the backup files.

            Note You should not delete or edit the changer.cfg or folder.cfg files.




Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                     149
Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files


              If you use Backup Exec’s Intelligent Disaster Recovery (IDR) option, you must use remote
              IDR to recover computers that include backup-to-disk files. The backup folders must be
              available to the Backup Exec server you are using to restore the data.
              See also:
                  “Viewing Devices” on page 96


        Adding a Backup Folder
              Before you can start using the Backup-to-Disk feature, you must create at least one backup
              folder. When you create a new backup folder, it is recommended that you create it on a
              different physical disk than the disk you want to back up.
              You can create either a backup-to-disk folder or a removable backup-to-disk folder.
              You can create a backup-to-disk folder in any location where you can write a file, such as:
              ◆   NTFS partitions (local or remote)
              ◆   Network Attached Storage (NAS) devices
              ◆   DFS shares
              ◆   FAT/FAT32 partitions (local or remote)
              ◆   VERITAS Volume Manager partitions
              ◆   RAID drives with any configuration
              ◆   Mapped drives
              ◆   NFS volumes
              You can create removable backup-to-disk folders on any removable device, provided the
              device appears as a drive letter and is formatted with a file system. Removable devices
              can include:
              ◆   CDR-RW
              ◆   DVD-RW
              ◆   ZIP
              ◆   JAZZ
              ◆   Removable hard disk
              For CDR-RW and DVD-RW, third-party software must be used to format the media with a
              file system before it can be used with Backup Exec.
              You can use the following steps to manually add a new backup folder. You also can use
              the Device Configuration Wizard to create a new backup folder.


        150                                                                           Administrator’s Guide
                                                                  Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files


        ▼   To add a backup folder:

            1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

            2. Select Backup-to-Disk Folder.

            3. Under Backup-to-Disk Tasks in the task pane, select New folder.

            Note If a Backup-to-Disk Warning appears, read it and then verify that the disk where
                 you want to create the backup folder has sufficient free space. If you do not want to
                 see this message every time you add a new folder, select Do not display this
                 message again. Then, click OK.

                The Add New Backup-to-Disk Folder dialog box appears.

                Add New Backup-to-Disk Folder dialog box




                                                                                                           Managing
                                                                                                            Devices




Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                 151
Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files


              4. Select the appropriate options as follows:

                  New Backup-to-Disk Folder options

                  Item                    Description

                  Name                    Type a name for this folder.
                                          Note Backup folder names must not exceed 243 characters.

                  Path or Drive           Enter the location where the folder is to reside. Path is required if the
                                          option Backup-to-Disk folder is selected. Drive is specified if the
                                          Removable Backup-to-Disk folder option is selected.
                                          Note If you do not know the exact path, click the button next to the
                                               Path field to select the correct path.

                  Backup-to-Disk folder   Select this option if the folder is to exist on a device that has
                                          non-removable media. This type of folder supports concurrent
                                          operations from one or more media servers.
                                          You can create a backup folder in any location where you can write a
                                          file, such as:
                                             NTFS partitions (local or remote)
                                             Network Attached Storage (NAS) devices
                                             DFS shares
                                             FAT/FAT32 partitions (local or remote)
                                             VERITAS Volume Manager partitions
                                             RAID drives with any configuration
                                             Mapped drives
                                             NFS volumes
                                          Note Backup Exec does not determine if the device is a
                                               non-removable device; however, VERITAS recommends that
                                               you do not select this option if you want to use removable
                                               media, such as a zip drive.




        152                                                                                   Administrator’s Guide
                                                                       Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files

                New Backup-to-Disk Folder options

                Item                    Description

                Removable               Select this option if the folder is to exist on a device that has
                Backup-to-Disk folder   removable media. This type of folder supports spanning of backup
                                        sets from one piece of media to another, but does not support
                                        concurrent operations. This type of folder should not be shared
                                        between media servers. When creating this type of folder, you must
                                        specify only a device, not a path.
                                        You can create removable backup-to-disk folders on any removable
                                        device, provided the device appears as a drive letter and is
                                        formatted with a file system. Removable devices can include:
                                           CDR-RW
                                           DVD-R
                                           DVD-RW
                                           ZIP
                                           JAZZ
                                           Removable hard disk




                                                                                                                Managing
                                        For CDR-RW, DVD-R, and DVD-RW, third-party software must be




                                                                                                                 Devices
                                        used to format the media with a file system before it can be used
                                        with Backup Exec.

                Set Default Path        Click this button if you want to set a default path for all future
                                        backup folders. Then, type or select the default path.

            5. Click OK.
            The folder appears on the Devices tab below the Backup-to-Disk Folders icon and the All
            Drives icon. It also appears in Windows Explorer as a folder. You can back up data to this
            folder now.
            See also:
                “Viewing Devices” on page 96




Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                         153
Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files


        Renaming a Backup Folder
              When you use the Backup Exec Rename option to rename a backup folder, the name
              changes in Backup Exec, but not on the disk. If you also want to change the name of the
              Windows folder in Windows Explorer, use the Windows Rename option.

        ▼     To change the name of a backup folder:

              1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

              2. Under Backup-to-Disk Folders, click either Fixed Backup-to-Disk Folders or
                 Removable Backup-to-Disk Folders.

              3. Select the backup folder you want to rename.

              4. Under General Tasks in the task pane, select Rename.

              5. On the Rename dialog box, type the new backup folder name, and then click OK.

              Note Backup folder names must not exceed 243 characters.


              6. If you want to rename the Windows folder in Windows Explorer, use the Windows
                 Rename option.


        Changing the Path of a Backup Folder
              If you want to change the path of a backup folder, you cannot just move it from one place
              to another. First, you create a new backup folder. Then you move the backup files from the
              original backup folder to the new backup folder.

        ▼     To change the path of a backup folder:

              1. Add a new backup folder with a name and path that is different than the original
                 backup folder.

              2. In Windows Explorer, copy and paste the backup files from the original backup folder
                 to the new backup folder.

              3. On the Backup Exec navigation bar, click Devices.

              4. Right-click the new backup folder, and then click Refresh on the shortcut menu, or
                 select the new backup folder and press <F5>.



        154                                                                          Administrator’s Guide
                                                                    Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files


            5. Click the new backup folder and verify that the backup files appear in the right pane.

            6. To rename the new backup folder to match the name of the original backup folder,
               delete the original backup folder and then rename the new folder.
            See also:
                “Adding a Backup Folder” on page 150
                “Renaming a Backup Folder” on page 154.
                “Deleting a Backup File” on page 162


        Deleting a Backup Folder
            When you use the Backup Exec Delete option to delete a backup folder, the backup folder
            is removed from Backup Exec, but the backup folder and the files in it remain on the disk
            so you can recreate them later. If you also want to delete the folder from the disk, use the
            Windows Delete option. However, you cannot recreate the backup folder or files after you
            delete them from the disk.




                                                                                                             Managing
        ▼




                                                                                                              Devices
            To delete a backup folder:

            1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

            2. Under Backup-to-Disk Folders, click either Fixed Backup-to-Disk Folders or
               Removable Backup-to-Disk Folders.

            3. Select the backup folder you want to remove.

            4. Under General Tasks in the task pane, select Delete.

            5. Click Yes.
                The backup folder is removed from Backup Exec, but the files and the folder still exist
                on the disk. You can still recreate the backup folder at a later date if necessary. If you
                do not want to delete the folder from the disk, you have completed this procedure.

            6. If you want to delete the folder from the disk, use Windows Explorer to navigate to
               the folder.

            Caution If you delete the folder from the disk you cannot recreate it later. You lose all the
                    files from the folder.




Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                   155
Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files


              7. Select the folder you want to delete, and then under General Tasks in the task bar,
                 select Delete.

              8. Click Yes.
                  The folder is removed from the disk. You cannot recreate the folder or the files.


        Recreating a Backup Folder and Its Contents
              If you have deleted a backup folder from Backup Exec, but have not deleted it from the
              disk, you can recreate the backup folder and the files in it. You must know the name and
              path of the original backup folder in order to recreate it. If you deleted a backup folder
              from the disk, you cannot recreate it.

        ▼     To recreate a backup folder and the files in it:

              1. Add a new folder to Backup Exec using the same name and path as the deleted folder.

              2. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

              3. Expand either Fixed Backup-to-Disk Folders or Removable Backup-to-Disk
                 Folders.

              4. Select the new folder.

              5. Under Media Tasks in the task pane, select Inventory and create and run an
                 inventory job.
                  When the inventory is complete, the files display on the results pane.
              See also:
                  “Adding a Backup Folder” on page 150
                  “Inventorying Media in Devices” on page 171




        156                                                                           Administrator’s Guide
                                                                  Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files


        Pausing and Resuming a Backup Folder
            When you pause a backup folder, backup jobs do not run on it. If a backup job is already
            running on a backup folder when you pause it, the job will complete, but any subsequent
            backup jobs will not run until the folder is resumed.
            If a backup job fails and the backup folder goes offline, you must pause and resume the
            folder after you correct the problem.

        ▼   To pause or resume a backup folder:

            1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

            2. Expand the icon for the workstation where the backup folder is located.

            3. Under Backup-to-Disk Folders, click either Fixed Backup-to-Disk Folders or
               Removable Backup-to-Disk Folders.

            4. Select the backup folder you want to pause or resume.
                A check mark appears next to the Pause option if the backup folder is currently




                                                                                                           Managing
                                                                                                            Devices
                paused.

            5. Under Backup-to-Disk Tasks in the task pane, select Pause.
                If the folder was not already paused, it is now paused. If the folder was already
                paused, it is now resumed.




Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                 157
Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files


        Viewing Backup Folder Properties
              Use Properties to view information about the backup folder, and in some cases, to change
              configuration information for the backup folder. Information that can be changed through
              the Properties dialog box includes the folder’s name, file management settings, disk space
              settings, device settings, and concurrent operations settings.

        ▼     To view or change the properties of a backup folder:

              1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

              2. Expand the icon for the workstation where the backup folder is located.

              3. Under Backup-to-Disk Folders, click either Fixed Backup-to-Disk Folders or
                 Removable Backup-to-Disk Folders.

              4. Select the folder you want to view.

              5. Under General Tasks in the task pane, select Properties.

                  General properties of backup folder




        158                                                                          Administrator’s Guide
                                                                      Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files


                General properties of the backup folder include:

                General Backup Folder Properties dialog box

                Item                    Description

                Name                    Name of the backup folder. You can type a new folder name here.

                Path                    The path to the folder. You cannot change the path here.

                Enable device for       Select this check box to have Backup Exec use this device. Clear this
                Backup Exec             check box to disable the device, and allow it to be available for other
                                        applications. If the check box is clear, the device is disabled, and
                                        cannot be used by Backup Exec. After changing the option, click
                                        OK.

                Priority                The Priority field is only available when the backup folder belongs
                                        to a drive pool and is selected for viewing under the drive pool icon.
                                        Backup folder properties displayed under the Backup-to-Disk
                                        Folders and Removable Backup-to-Disk icons do not display the
                                        Priority field. For more information, see “Setting Priorities for




                                                                                                                  Managing
                                                                                                                   Devices
                                        Drives in a Drive Pool” on page 105.
                                        Set a priority for a backup folder that determines the order in which
                                        the devices in a drive pool are used. In the Priority box, type a
                                        number from 1 to 99, with 1 designating this device as the first
                                        device to be used in the drive pool, or click the arrows to select a
                                        value.
                                        The default priority is 10 so all devices have the same priority
                                        initially. The device to which you assign the lowest number is the
                                        first device to be used in the drive pool; for example, a device with a
                                        priority of 1 is used before a device with a priority of 5.
                                        Note Overwrite and append periods for media take precedence
                                             over drive priority.

                Pause device            Select this check box to pause the device, and then click OK. To
                                        resume the device, clear the box and click OK.

                Folder Type             Displays either Backup -to-Disk Folder or Removable
                                        Backup-to-Disk Folder, depending on which type of device this
                                        folder exists. This option cannot be changed.




Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                        159
Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files


              6. Click Advanced to view or change configuration information.

                 Advanced properties of book folder




              7. Select from the following options:

                 Advanced book folder property options

                 Item                     Description

                 Backup-to-Disk file management

                 Maximum size for         Type the maximum size for each backup-to-disk file contained in
                 Backup-to-Disk files     this folder and then select either MB or GB as the unit of size. The
                                          file size can be as small as 1 MB or as large as 4096 GB. The default is
                                          1 GB.

                 Maximum number of        Type the maximum number of backup sets to be written to each
                 backup sets per          backup-to-disk file in this folder. The maximum number can range
                 Backup-to-Disk file      from 1 to 8192. The default is 100.




        160                                                                                  Administrator’s Guide
                                                                      Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files


                Advanced book folder property options

                Item                    Description

                Disk Space Settings

                Disk space reserve      Type the minimum number of megabytes or gigabytes of disk space
                                        that can remain before the backup-to-disk folder stops accepting
                                        jobs. If the backup-to-disk folder is a removable storage folder, the
                                        jobs will span to new media after the reserved disk space reaches
                                        this minimum.

                Device settings

                Auto detect settings    Clear this check box if you have a storage device for which you can
                                        set buffer reads or writes. Otherwise, when this option is selected
                                        Backup Exec will detect the preferred settings for your device.

                Buffered reads          Select this check box if you do not want Backup Exec to auto-detect
                                        device settings and you know that your device allows buffered
                                        reads which is, the reading of large blocks of data.




                                                                                                                Managing
                                                                                                                 Devices
                Buffered writes         Select this check box if you do not want Backup Exec to auto-detect
                                        device settings and you know that your device allows buffered
                                        writes, which is the writing of large blocks of data.

                Concurrent Operations

                Allow x concurrent      This option only appears if the backup-to-disk folder is a
                operations for this     non-removable folder. Type the number of concurrent operations
                Backup-to-Disk Folder   that can be performed on this folder. This number can range from 1
                for this server.        to 16.

            8. Click OK.


        Renaming a Backup File
            When you rename a backup file, the name changes in Backup Exec and also on disk. The
            media label also changes.

        ▼   To rename a backup file:

            1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

            2. Double-click the icon for the workstation where the backup folder is located.


Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                      161
Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files


              3. Double-click Backup-to-Disk Folders.

              4. Click the folder that contains the file you want to rename.

              5. On the results pane, select the file you want to rename.

              6. Under General Tasks in the task pane, select Rename.

              7. Type a new name for the file, and then click OK.


        Deleting a Backup File
              You must move backup files to the Retired Media set before you can delete them. When
              you delete a backup file from the Media tab in Backup Exec, it is deleted from Backup
              Exec but the Windows folder and files still exist in Windows Explorer. You can recreate the
              deleted backup files if you have not used Windows Explorer to delete them from the disk.

        ▼     To delete a backup file:

              1. On the navigation bar, click Media.

              2. Click the media set that contains the backup file.

              3. Use the Windows drag-and-drop feature to move the backup file into the Retired
                 Media set.

              4. On the results pane, select the backup file you want to delete.

              5. Under General Tasks in the task pane, select Delete.

              6. Click Yes, or if you selected multiple backup files, click Yes to All.
                  The backup file is deleted from Backup Exec, but not from the disk. To delete the
                  backup file from the disk, continue to step 7. If you do not want to delete the backup
                  file from the disk, you have completed this procedure.

              Caution If you perform step 7 to delete the backup file from the disk, you can no longer
                      restore the deleted file.


              7. Using Windows Explorer, navigate to the location where the backup file is stored.

              8. Right-click the backup file.

              9. Click Delete, and then click Yes.

        162                                                                               Administrator’s Guide
                                                                  Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files


        Recreating a Deleted Backup File
            If you deleted a backup file from Backup Exec, but did not use Windows Explorer to
            delete the file from the disk, you can recreate it by running Inventory.

        ▼   To recreate a backup file:

            1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

            2. Expand the icon for the workstation where the backup folder is located.

            3. Under Backup-to-Disk Folders, click either Fixed Backup-to-Disk Folders or
               Removable Backup-to-Disk Folders.

            4. Select the folder where the backup file was located before you deleted it.

            5. Under Backup-to-Disk Tasks in the task pane, select Inventory and create and run an
               inventory job.
                The backup file appears on the results pane when the inventory job completes.




                                                                                                           Managing
                                                                                                            Devices
            See also:
                “Inventorying Media in Devices” on page 171


        Viewing and Changing Backup File Properties
            The file properties that you can view include the:
            ◆   File name and description.
            ◆   Creation, allocation, and modification dates.
            ◆   Number of bytes written and read, total mounts and seeks, and hours in use.
            ◆   Types of errors encountered on the file.
            In addition to viewing properties, you also can change the file name and description from
            the Properties dialog box.

        ▼   To view or change backup file properties:

            1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

            2. Expand the icon for the workstation where the backup folder is located.

            3. Under Backup-to-Disk Folders, click either Backup-to-Disk Folders or Removable
               Backup-to-Disk Devices.

Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                 163
Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files


              4. Click the backup folder that contains the file you want to view or change.

              5. On the results pane, select the file you want to view or change.

              6. Under General Tasks in the task pane, select Properties.

                  Backup-to-Disk File General Properties dialog box




                  The General properties of a backup-to-disk file include:

                  General properties of a backup-to-disk file

                  Item                      Description

                  Name                      Name of the backup file. You can change the name of the backup file
                                            by entering a new file name.

                  Description               Description of the backup file. The description displays on the
                                            Devices tab. You can type a new description here.




        164                                                                                  Administrator’s Guide
                                                                       Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files


            7. Click Management.

                Backup-to-Disk File Management Properties dialog box




                                                                                                                Managing
                                                                                                                 Devices
                The Management properties of a backup-to-disk file include:

                Management properties of a backup to disk file

                Item                     Description

                Creation date            The date and time this backup-to-disk file was created.

                Allocation date          The date and time that the backup-to-disk file was allocated to a
                                         media set.

                Modification date        The date and time when data was last written to the backup-to-disk
                                         file.




Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                        165
Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files


              8. If you want to view the statistics and errors for this file, select the Statistics tab.

                  Backup-to-Disk File Statistics Properties dialog box




                  The following information appears:

                  Statistics properties of a backup-to-disk file

                  Item                       Description

                  Totals

                  Total Bytes Written        Number of bytes that have been written to this media.

                  Total Bytes Read           Number of bytes that have been read from this media.

                  Total Mounts               Number of times this media has been mounted.

                  Total Seeks                Total number of seek operations (performed when a specific piece of
                                             information is being located) that have been performed on this
                                             media.

                  Total Hours in Use         Total number of hours that this media has been in use.

                  Errors

                  Seek Errors                The number of errors encountered while trying to locate data.



        166                                                                                  Administrator’s Guide
                                                Using Microsoft’s Removable Storage Feature with Backup Exec

                Statistics properties of a backup-to-disk file (continued)

                Item                       Description

                Soft Read Errors           The number of recoverable read errors encountered.

                Hard Read Errors           The number of unrecoverable read errors encountered.

                Soft Write Errors          The number of recoverable write errors encountered.

                Hard Write Errors          The number of unrecoverable write errors encountered.

            9. After viewing properties for the backup-to-disk file, click OK.



Using Microsoft’s Removable Storage Feature with Backup
Exec
            Removable Storage is a feature of Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003




                                                                                                               Managing
            systems that allows applications to share removable storage devices. Removable Storage




                                                                                                                Devices
            performs requests for device access from different applications on a first in, first out basis.
            It also tracks media usage for online media (media currently mounted in a robotic library)
            and for offline media that has been installed previously in a robotic library. Removable
            Storage does not manage single-slot tape drives.
            On the media server, you can allow Removable Storage to share the devices in robotic
            libraries between two or more applications, or you can allow some or all devices in robotic
            libraries to be controlled and used exclusively by Backup Exec’s Advanced Device and
            Media Management (ADAMM). If the device is enabled for Removable Storage through
            the robotic library’s Properties (see “Viewing Robotic Library Configuration Properties”
            on page 142), Backup Exec uses Removable Storage for device and media operations; if
            the Enable Removable Storage is cleared, Backup Exec controls the device directly.

            Note In some situations, Removable Storage does not support a robotic library, but may
                 still support some drives in the robotic library. When this happens, Removable
                 Storage disables the robotic libraries but enables the supported drives in the robotic
                 libraries. You should use the Removable Storage snap-in in an MMC to disable all of
                 the drives in the robotic library. This allows Backup Exec to control the robotic
                 library and all of the drives.




Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                        167
Using Microsoft’s Removable Storage Feature with Backup Exec


              If you do not need to share the devices, exclusive use by Backup Exec will allow faster
              tape backups and restores. If you allow exclusive use by Backup Exec, you can still enable
              or disable devices in Removable Storage while Backup Exec is running; Backup Exec will
              respond by switching to other devices in the robotic libraries as appropriate.

              Note You should not enable Removable Storage for devices used with the SAN Shared
                   Storage Option (SAN SSO). RSM does not appropriately manage devices and media
                   used by multiple servers.

              The Removable Storage database is automatically backed up by Backup Exec, and can be
              restored if necessary. For more information, see “Advanced options for restore” on
              page 428.

              Note The Backup Exec services account must have Administrator rights to protect the
                   Removable Storage database. If the account does not have Administrator rights, the
                   following error message is recorded in the job log: "An error occurred while
                   exporting the RSM Database files. The RSM Database could not be backed up."

              Only Microsoft tape class drivers can be used if you plan on using Backup Exec and the
              Removable Storage feature. If you want to use a third party tape class driver or a
              VERITAS tape class driver, you must disable the device through Removable Storage
              before installing the driver.


        Using Media in Drives Managed by Removable Storage
              Use the Removable Storage snap-in to manually control the movement of media into and
              out of the robotic libraries managed by Removable Storage, to allocate media to one
              application process or another, and to prepare new, imported, or unrecognized media for
              use within the Removable Storage domain. You must use appropriate processes to move
              media between applications. Media that is assigned by Removable Storage to an
              application other than Backup Exec cannot be accessed by ADAMM.
              Media in the Removable Storage Import and Free media pools are available for use in
              Backup Exec, and can be assigned to Backup Exec using one of the following methods:
              ◆   In Computer Management on the local machine, under the Storage node, open
                  Removable Storage, and then open Media Pools. Move media from the Import or
                  Free media pools into a Backup Exec media pool (see your Microsoft Windows 2000
                  documentation or online help for details). The next time that Removable Storage is
                  scanned, any media that is in the Backup Exec pool is allocated to Backup Exec and
                  marked as "in use" by Backup Exec.
              ◆   Acquire available media through normal Backup Exec operations. This media is then
                  placed in the Removable Storage Import pool and can be accessed by Backup Exec
                  using the policies you established for Imported media.


        168                                                                          Administrator’s Guide
                                            Using Microsoft’s Removable Storage Feature with Backup Exec


            Media that is in the Removable Storage Free media pool or that is unrecognizable by
            Removable Storage is marked as unknown media within Backup Exec. You must launch an
            Inventory job to mount and read the media header. The media is imported into Backup
            Exec and marked as "in use" by Backup Exec. If you do not want that media used by
            Backup Exec, delete it from the ADAMM database. For more information, see “Deleting
            Media” on page 224.
            Backup Exec cannot append to media prepared initially by Removable Storage. To be able
            to use this media, you must run an overwrite operation. If media is introduced for the first
            time into Removable Storage, but it was previously possessed by Backup Exec or written
            to by Backup Exec during a mount operation, even on another server, then that media is
            allocated to Backup Exec for exclusive use.


            Using Backup Exec Exclusively with Some Devices
            If you want to use Backup Exec exclusively on some devices, ensure the Enable Remote
            Storage (RSM) option is cleared on the robotic library’s Configuration tab; to allow other
            applications on the server to access Removable Storage to share other devices, select the
            Enable Remote Storage (RSM) option (see “Viewing Robotic Library Configuration
            Properties” on page 142).




                                                                                                           Managing
                                                                                                            Devices
            VERITAS recommends enabling or disabling devices using Removable Storage only when
            the device is not in use and the internal drives are empty.


            Monitoring Backup Exec and Removable Storage

        ▼   To view the Removable Storage Work Queue:

            1. Click Start and then point to Programs.

            2. Point to Administrative Tools, and then click Computer Management.

            3. Expand the tree view of Storage.

            4. Expand Removable Storage, and then click Work Queue.
            You can also track the location and status of media by viewing the media and drive objects
            associated with the loader being shared with Backup Exec. The status of the media is
            updated as the media is moved.




Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                 169
Creating Utility Jobs


               Removing the Backup Exec Pool from Removable Storage
               If you must uninstall Backup Exec at some time, you may want to delete the Removable
               Storage Backup Exec pool. Refer to your Microsoft documentation for details on how to
               use the Removable Storage snap-in to delete an application media pool.



Creating Utility Jobs
               Backup Exec allows creation of utility jobs to aid in managing devices and media. You can
               specify a job priority and select to have a recipient notified when these jobs run. Utility
               jobs, like backup and restore jobs, generate job history records and an XML job log when
               they run.
               Several of these jobs can be scheduled as recurring jobs. These include:
               ◆   Inventory robotic library or drive
               ◆   Erase media in a robotic library or drive
               ◆   Import media
               ◆   Export media
               ◆   Lock robotic library
               ◆   Unlock robotic library
               ◆   Clean drive
               Utility jobs that can be created only as run-once jobs, which are jobs that are scheduled to
               run now or to run once at a specified date and time, include:
               ◆   Label media
               ◆   Format media
               ◆   Retension media
               ◆   Eject media
               ◆   Initialize robotic library
               If you have a robotic library, you can perform utility operations on the robotic library, the
               robotic library drive, all slots, and individual slots.
               You can perform operations on devices in Backup Exec by doing one of the following:
               ◆   Right-click an object to display options on the shortcut menu.
               ◆   Select an object, and then click an available task on the task pane.




         170                                                                              Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                       Creating Utility Jobs


        Inventorying Media in Devices
            Run Inventory to mount the media in the drive and read the media label, which is then
            displayed in the Devices view. If this is the first time that Backup Exec has encountered
            this media, the media label is also added to the Media view.
            If you change the media in the robotic library or drive, run Inventory so that the current
            media in the drive is displayed in the views; otherwise, the previous media is still
            displayed as being in the drive.
            You should run an inventory operation when Backup Exec is launched for the first time
            following a new installation or a product upgrade. When Backup Exec is exited and
            restarted, it saves information pertaining to the location and contents of all of the media
            from the last Backup Exec session (provided the media in the devices hasn’t changed).
            With this information, Backup Exec can immediately begin processing operations when it
            is restarted.
            When media is changed in a robotic library, you can inventory all of the slots in the robotic
            library or select the slots to be inventoried. You are not required to re-inventory slots when
            adding media requested by Backup Exec. For example:
                If you are performing a restore operation, and the data is contained on media that is




                                                                                                               Managing
                                                                                                                Devices
                not currently in the robotic library, you are prompted to insert the media for the
                restore operation. In this case, you are not required to re-inventory the slot where the
                restore source media is placed.
            When media that is not requested by Backup Exec is added or removed from the
            magazine, you should perform an inventory operation on the changed slots. This updates
            the media database so Backup Exec doesn’t load and unload each media in the magazine
            searching for the correct media on which to process jobs. You can select specific slots to
            inventory. If you swap media often you may want Backup Exec to perform an inventory
            on the robotic library magazine each time Backup Exec services are started.




Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                    171
Creating Utility Jobs


               Inventorying All Drives When Backup Exec Services Start
               You can set a default so that all drives are inventoried whenever Backup Exec services are
               started. An inventory of all drives on startup is recommended if media is often moved
               between robotic libraries, but Backup Exec may take longer to start.

         ▼     To have Backup Exec perform an inventory each time Backup Exec starts:

               1. On the Tools menu, click Options.

               2. In the Properties pane, under Job Defaults, click Preferences.

               3. Click Inventory all drives on Backup Exec services startup.

               4. Click OK.


               Creating an Inventory Job

         ▼     To create an inventory job:

               1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

               2. Expand the server icon, click Stand-alone Drives, or if the device resides in a robotic
                  library, click Robotic Libraries.

               3. If you want to inventory a drive or slot, select the drive or slot containing the media
                  you want to inventory, or select Slots.

               4. If you want to inventory a backup file:

                   a. Double-click the icon for the workstation where the backup folder is located.

                   b. Double-click Backup-to-Disk Folders.

                   c. Double-click either Fixed Backup-to-Disk Folders or Removable
                      Backup-to-Disk Folders.

                   d. Click the backup folder that contains the file you want to inventory.

                   e. On the results pane, select the file you want to inventory.




         172                                                                           Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                              Creating Utility Jobs


            5. Under Media Tasks in the task pane, select Inventory.

                General options for inventory job




                                                                                                                      Managing
                                                                                                                       Devices
            6. Select the appropriate options as follows:

                Inventory Job Properties options

                Item                      Description

                Job name                  Type a name for the job or accept the default name.

                Job priority              Select the priority for the job. Available options are:
                                             Lowest
                                             Low
                                             Medium
                                             High
                                             Highest


            7. If you want a person or group to be notified when the job completes, on the
               Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification and select the options you want
               (see “Selecting Recipients for Job Notification” on page 509).




Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                           173
Creating Utility Jobs


               8. If you want to run the job now, click Run Now. Otherwise, on the Properties pane,
                  under Frequency, click Schedule to set the scheduling options you want to use (see
                  “Scheduling Jobs” on page 374).
               There may be a delay (up to several minutes for some drives) as the media is mounted and
               inventoried.
               The inventory operation can be monitored or canceled through the Job Monitor.
               See also:
                   “Media Labeling” on page 202
                   “Inventory all drives on Backup Exec services startup” on page 91


         Erasing Media
               You can choose to erase media using either Quick erase or Long erase. Not all devices
               support a long erase; those that do not will always perform a quick erase.
               Quick erase writes an indicator at the beginning of the media that makes the data
               contained on the media inaccessible. For most uses, a Quick erase is sufficient.
               Long erase instructs the drive to physically erase the entire media. If you have sensitive
               information on the media and you want to dispose of it, use Long erase. Running Long
               erase on media can take several minutes to several hours to complete (depending on the
               drive and the media capacity).
               Quick and Long erase do not change the media label. To change a media label, use Label
               Media or Rename prior to the Erase operation.

         ▼     To erase media:

               1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

               2. Expand the server icon, click Stand-alone Drives, or if the device resides in a robotic
                  library, click Robotic Libraries.

               3. Select the drive or slot containing the media you want to erase.




         174                                                                           Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                           Creating Utility Jobs


            4. Under Media Tasks in the task pane, select either Erase media, quick or Erase media,
               long.

            Note If the drive does not support a long erase, Erase media, long will not be available.

                The following warning is displayed:

            Caution This operation will be performed on the current media in the drive or slot. If the
                    media has been changed since the last inventory operation was performed, the
                    media label in the next dialog may not match the media in the drive or slot
                    selected.


            5. Click OK to continue.
                The media displayed was read during the last inventory operation; the display does
                not change until another inventory operation occurs. Therefore, if you change media
                in the slot or drive but did not run Inventory, the media label displayed may not
                match the actual media in the slot or drive.

            6. When prompted, click Yes to erase the media.




                                                                                                                   Managing
                                                                                                                    Devices
            7. Select the appropriate options as follows:

                Erase media options

                Item                   Description

                Job name               Type a name for the job or accept the default name.

                Job priority           Select the priority for the job. Available options are:
                                           Lowest
                                           Low
                                           Medium
                                           High
                                           Highest




Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                        175
Creating Utility Jobs


               8. If you want a person or group to be notified when the job completes, on the
                  Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification and select the options you want
                  (see “Selecting Recipients for Job Notification” on page 509).

               9. If you want to run the job now, click Run Now. Otherwise, on the Properties pane,
                  under Frequency, click Schedule to set the scheduling options you want to use (see
                  “Scheduling Jobs” on page 374).
               You can monitor the Erase operation through the Job Monitor.
               You cannot cancel an Erase operation after it has started; however, you can use Cancel to
               stop a queued erase operation.


         Erasing Backup Files
               Erasing backup files removes the data from both the backup folder and the disk, and
               removes the file references from the catalog. However, the backup file remains for use
               with future backup jobs. You cannot restore the data after you erase it. If you want to
               remove data from Backup Exec and restore it later, delete the file from the Media view
               (For more information, see “Deleting a Backup File” on page 162.) Unlike other types of
               devices, when you erase a file from a backup folder you cannot choose whether to
               perform a quick erase or a long erase. Backup Exec performs only a quick erase on backup
               files in backup folders.

         ▼     To erase a backup file:

               Caution You cannot restore the data that you erase. Before you erase files, be sure that
                       you no longer need them.


               1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

               2. Expand the icon for the workstation where the backup folder is located.

               3. Under Backup-to-Disk Folders, click the backup folder that contains the file you
                  want to erase.

               4. On the results pane, select the file you want to erase.

               5. Under Media Tasks in the task pane, select Erase media, quick.

               6. Click OK to continue.

               7. Click Yes, or if more than one file was selected, click Yes to All.



         176                                                                            Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                           Creating Utility Jobs


            8. Select the appropriate options as follows:

                Erase media options

                Item                   Description

                Job name               Type a name for the job or accept the default name.

                Job priority           Select the priority for the job. Available options are:
                                           Lowest
                                           Low
                                           Medium
                                           High
                                           Highest


            9. If you want a person or group to be notified when the job completes, on the
               Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification and select the options you want
               (see “Selecting Recipients for Job Notification” on page 509).




                                                                                                                   Managing
                                                                                                                    Devices
            10. If you want to run the job now, click Run Now. Otherwise, on the Properties pane,
                under Frequency, click Schedule to set the scheduling options you want to use (see
                “Scheduling Jobs” on page 374).




        Retensioning a Tape
            Use Retension media to run the tape in the tape drive from beginning to end at a fast
            speed so that the tape winds evenly and runs more smoothly past the tape drive heads.
            Refer to the documentation that came with your tape drive to see how often this utility
            should be performed.
            Retensioning is primarily for Mini Cartridge and quarter-inch cartridges and is not
            supported on most other types of tape drives.

        ▼   To retension a tape:

            1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

            2. Expand the server icon, click Stand-alone Drives, or if the drive is attached to a
               robotic library, click Robotic Libraries.

            3. Select the drive or slot containing the media you want to retension.


Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                        177
Creating Utility Jobs


               4. Under Media Tasks in the task pane, select Retension media.

               5. Select the appropriate options as follows:

                   Retension options

                   Item                   Description

                   Job name               Type a name for the job or accept the default name.

                   Job priority           Select the priority for the job. Available options are:
                                             Lowest
                                             Low
                                             Medium
                                             High
                                             Highest


               6. If you want a person or group to be notified when the job completes, on the
                  Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification, and select the options you want
                  (see “Selecting Recipients for Job Notification” on page 509).

               7. Click Run now.
               The job will be submitted as a Run now job, unless you submitted the job on hold. You
               can monitor the Retension operation from the Job Monitor.
               You cannot cancel a Retension operation after it has started; however, you can use Cancel
               to stop a queued retension operation.




         178                                                                                 Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                           Creating Utility Jobs


        Formatting Media in a Drive
            Use Format media to format the media currently in the drive. Most devices do not
            support formatting. If formatting is not supported, the option is not available.
            If you use Format on a DC2000 tape, the formatting may take two or more hours to
            complete.

            Caution Formatting erases the media. All data on the media is lost.


        ▼   To format media in a drive:

            1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

            2. Expand the server icon, click Stand-alone Drives, or if the drive is attached to a
               robotic library, click Robotic Libraries.

            3. Select the drive or slot containing the media you want to format.

            4. Under Media Tasks in the task pane, select Format media.




                                                                                                                   Managing
                                                                                                                    Devices
                The media label that is displayed was read during the last inventory operation. The
                media label displayed does not change until another inventory operation occurs.
                Therefore, if you changed media in the slot or drive but did not run Inventory, the
                media label displayed may not match the actual media in the slot or drive.

            5. To format the media that is displayed, click Yes.

            6. Select the appropriate options as follows:

                Format media options

                Item                   Description

                Job name               Type a name for the job or accept the default name.

                Job priority           Select the priority for the job. Available options are:
                                           Lowest
                                           Low
                                           Medium
                                           High
                                           Highest




Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                        179
Creating Utility Jobs


               7. If you want a person or group to be notified when the job completes, on the
                  Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification, and select the options you want
                  (see “Selecting Recipients for Job Notification” on page 509).

               8. Click Run now.
               The job will be submitted as a Run now job, unless you submitted the job on hold. You
               can monitor the Format operation from the Job Monitor.
               You cannot cancel a Format operation after it has started; however, you can use Cancel to
               stop a queued Format operation.


         Labeling Media
               Use Label media to immediately write a new media label on the media in the selected
               device; this operation destroys any data on the media. To change the media label without
               destroying the data on the media (until an overwrite operation occurs), use Rename.

         ▼     To label media:

               1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

               2. Expand the server icon, click Stand-alone Drives, or if the drive is attached to a
                  robotic library, click Robotic Libraries.

               3. Select the drive or slot containing the media you want to label.

               4. Under Media Tasks on the task pane, select Label media.
                   The following warning is displayed:

               Caution This operation will be performed on the current media in the drive or slot. If the
                       media has been changed since the last inventory operation was performed, the
                       media label in the next dialog may not match the media in the drive or slot
                       selected.




         180                                                                           Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                 Creating Utility Jobs


            5. Click OK.

                New Media Label dialog box




            6. Type the name you want to use as the recorded media label for this media.

            Note This media will be overwritten.


            7. Click OK to erase all data on the media and re-label the media.

                Label Media Job Properties




                                                                                                         Managing
                                                                                                          Devices




Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                181
Creating Utility Jobs


               8. Select the appropriate options as follows:

                   Label media options

                   Item                    Description

                   Job name                Type a name for the job or accept the default name.

                   Job priority            Select the priority for the job. Available options are:
                                              Lowest
                                              Low
                                              Medium
                                              High
                                              Highest


               9. If you want a person or group to be notified when the job completes, on the
                  Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification and select the options you want
                  (see “Selecting Recipients for Job Notification” on page 509).

               10. Click Run now.

               11. Write this same media label on an external label fixed to the outside of the physical
                   media.
               The job will be submitted as a Run now job, unless you submitted the job on hold. You
               can monitor the Label media operation from the Job Monitor.
               You cannot cancel a Label media operation after it has started; however, you can use
               Cancel to stop a queued Label media operation.
               See also:
                   “Renaming Media Labels” on page 208




         182                                                                                  Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                            Creating Utility Jobs


        Ejecting Media from a Drive
            Use Eject media to eject the media currently in the drive. If the media is a tape, Eject
            rewinds the media before ejecting it.
            Some drives do not support a software-driven media eject. If the media is a tape, the tape
            is rewound and you may be instructed to manually remove the media.

        ▼   To eject media from a drive:

            1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

            2. Expand the server icon, and then click Stand-alone Drives.

            3. Select the drive.

            4. Under Drive Tasks in the task pane, select Eject media.

            5. Select the appropriate options as follows:




                                                                                                                    Managing
                Eject media options




                                                                                                                     Devices
                Item                    Description

                Job name                Type a name for the job or accept the default name.

                Job priority            Select the priority for the job. Available options are:
                                           Lowest
                                           Low
                                           Medium
                                           High
                                           Highest


            6. If you want a person or group to be notified when the job completes, on the
               Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification, and select the options you want
               (see “Selecting Recipients for Job Notification” on page 509).

            7. Click Run Now.
            The job will be submitted as a Run now job, unless you submitted the job on hold.




Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                         183
Creating Utility Jobs


         Setting Up Cleaning Jobs for Robotic Library Drives
               You can submit once-only cleaning jobs for robotic library drives, or set up scheduled
               cleaning jobs. This option is not available for stand-alone drives.
               Before submitting a cleaning job, you must define a cleaning slot that contains the
               cleaning tape.

         ▼     To define a cleaning slot:

               1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

               2. Click Robotic Libraries, and then click the robotic library for which you are setting up
                  the cleaning.

               3. Click Slots to display the library’s slots in the right pane.

               4. Select the slot that contains the cleaning tape.

               5. Under General Tasks in the task bar, select Properties.

               6. Select the Cleaning Slot option and click OK.
                   Make sure that the cleaning tape is located in the slot that you defined as the cleaning
                   slot. After defining the cleaning slot, you can set up a cleaning job for the robotic
                   library drive.

         ▼     To set up a cleaning job:

               1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

               2. Click Robotic Libraries, and then click the robotic library containing the drive.

               3. Select the drive.

               4. Under Drive Tasks in the task pane, select Clean.




         184                                                                            Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                             Creating Utility Jobs


            5. Select the appropriate options as follows:

                Clean Robotic Library Drive options

                Item                     Description

                Job name                 Type a name for the job or accept the default name.

                Job priority             Select the priority for the job. Available options are:
                                             Lowest
                                             Low
                                             Medium
                                             High
                                             Highest


            6. If you want a person or group to be notified when the job completes, on the
               Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification and select the options you want
               (see “Selecting Recipients for Job Notification” on page 509).




                                                                                                                     Managing
                                                                                                                      Devices
            7. If you want to run the job now, click Run Now. Otherwise, on the Properties pane,
               under Frequency, click Schedule to set the scheduling options you want to use (see
               “Scheduling Jobs” on page 374).
            You can monitor the cleaning job through the Job Monitor. You can view cleaning
            statistics for the drive by right-clicking the drive and selecting Properties. For more
            information, see “Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics” on page 122.




Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                          185
Creating Utility Jobs


         Importing Media
               Backup Exec fully supports robotic libraries with portals through its Import and Export
               utility jobs. It is important to create Import and Export jobs when changing media in your
               robotic library so that the Backup Exec database is updated. You can select any number of
               slots to import and export.
               When you use the Import utility, the slots you highlighted are checked for media. If media
               is present, it is exported to the portals. After all the media has been exported, you are
               prompted to insert new media into the portal so it can be imported. This process
               continues until all of the requested media has been imported into the robotic library. If
               your robotic library uses a media magazine, make sure no jobs are currently running and
               that all media are ejected from the drive and are back in the magazine slots before
               swapping the magazine.

         ▼     To import media in the robotic library:

               1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

               2. Select the robotic library.

               3. Click Slots.

               4. On the results pane, select the slots you want to import media to.

               5. Under Media Tasks in the task pane, select Import media.

               6. Select the appropriate options as follows:

                   Import options

                   Item                    Description

                   Job name                Type a name for the job or accept the default name.

                   Job priority            Select the priority for the job. Available options are:
                                                Lowest
                                                Low
                                                Medium
                                                High
                                                Highest




         186                                                                                  Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                        Creating Utility Jobs


            7. If you want Backup Exec to inventory the media after the job completes, double-click
               Settings, click Options and select the following:

                Auto-inventory option

                Item                    Description

                Auto-inventory after    Select this option to have Backup Exec automatically create an
                import is completed     inventory job to run after the import job completes.


            8. If you want a person or group to be notified when the job completes, on the
               Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification and select the options you want
               (see “Selecting Recipients for Job Notification” on page 509).

            9. If you want to run the job now, click Run Now. Otherwise, on the Properties pane,
               under Frequency, click Schedule to set the scheduling options you want to use (see
               “Scheduling Jobs” on page 374).
            You can monitor the import job through the Job Monitor.




                                                                                                                Managing
                                                                                                                 Devices
        Exporting Media
            The Import media and Export media utilities allow Backup Exec to fully support robotic
            libraries with portals. When you use the Export media utility on one or more robotic
            library slots, the exported media is placed in the portals. If you select more media than
            there are portals, the robotic library will fill as many slots as possible, then you are
            prompted to remove the media from the portal. This process continues until all of the
            selected media has been removed from the robotic library.

        ▼   To export media:

            1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

            2. Select the robotic library.

            3. Click Slots.

            4. On the results pane, select the slots you want to export media from.

            5. Under Media Tasks in the task pane, select Export media.




Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                     187
Creating Utility Jobs


               6. Select the appropriate options as follows:

                   Export media options

                   Item                    Description

                   Job name                Type a name for the job or accept the default name.

                   Job priority            Select the priority for the job. Available options are:
                                                Lowest
                                                Low
                                                Medium
                                                High
                                                Highest


               7. If you want a person or group to be notified when the job completes, on the
                  Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification and select the options you want
                  (see “Selecting Recipients for Job Notification” on page 509).

               8. If you want to run the job now, click Run Now. Otherwise, on the Properties pane,
                  under Frequency, click Schedule to set the scheduling options you want to use (see
                  “Scheduling Jobs” on page 374).
               You can monitor the export job through the Job Monitor.


         Locking the Robotic Library
         ▼     To create a job to lock the robotic library’s front panel:

               1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

               2. Select the robotic library.

               3. Under Robotic Library Tasks in the task pane, select Lock.




         188                                                                                  Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                            Creating Utility Jobs


            4. Select the appropriate options as follows:

                Lock options

                Item                    Description

                Job name                Type a name for the job or accept the default name.

                Job priority            Select the priority for the job. Available options are:
                                             Lowest
                                             Low
                                             Medium
                                             High
                                             Highest


            5. If you want a person or group to be notified when the job completes, on the
               Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification and select the options you want
               (see “Selecting Recipients for Job Notification” on page 509).




                                                                                                                    Managing
                                                                                                                     Devices
            6. If you want to run the job now, click Run Now. Otherwise, on the Properties pane,
               under Frequency, click Schedule to set the scheduling options you want to use (see
               “Scheduling Jobs” on page 374).
            You can monitor the lock job through the Job Monitor.


        Unlocking the Robotic Library
        ▼   To create a job to unlock the robotic library’s front panel:

            1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.

            2. Select the robotic library.

            3. Under Robotic Library Tasks in the task pane, select unlock.




Chapter 4, Managing Devices                                                                         189
Creating Utility Jobs


               4. Select the appropriate options as follows:

                   Unlock options

                   Item                   Description

                   Job name               Type a name for the job or accept the default name.

                   Job priority           Select the priority for the job. Available options are:
                                             Lowest
                                             Low
                                             Medium
                                             High
                                             Highest


               5. If you want a person or group to be notified when the job completes, on the
                  Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification and select the options you want
                  (see “Selecting Recipients for Job Notification” on page 509).

               6. If you want to run the job now, click Run Now. Otherwise, on the Properties pane,
                  under Frequency, click Schedule to set the scheduling options you want to use (see
                  “Scheduling Jobs” on page 374).
               You can monitor the unlock job through the Job Monitor.




         190                                                                                 Administrator’s Guide
Managing Media                                                                                   5
      With Backup Exec’s media management tools you can:
      ◆   Protect data from being overwritten.
      ◆   Set up media rotation strategies.
      ◆   Track the location of media.
      ◆   Label media automatically.
      ◆   Read and track media labels with bar codes.
      ◆   Collect and report media statistics.
      On the navigation bar, click Media to view all the media used in Backup Exec, view how
      the media is organized into media pools, media sets, and media vaults, and view media
      properties.



Media Overwrite Protection




                                                                                                       Management
      With Backup Exec, you are not required to select media for jobs; it is done for you by the




                                                                                                         Media
      Advanced Device and Media Management (ADAMM) component. At any given time,
      Backup Exec is aware of all media that is loaded into attached storage devices, media that
      is offline, and media that has been placed in media vaults. Each media has a status that
      allows Backup Exec to identify which media can be written to and which media is
      overwrite-protected.
      Your media rotation strategy must balance between your need to save useful data as long
      as possible, and the fact that media are not in infinite supply. The trade-off between the
      longevity of stored backup data and the cost of more media is controlled in Backup Exec
      by restrictions placed on data that is written to media. A restriction is placed on how long
      new jobs can be written to the media after the first job has been written (the append period),
      and another restriction is placed on how long the data is preserved after it is written (the
      overwrite protection period).




                                                                                        191
Media Overwrite Protection


              These two restrictions, the append period and the overwrite protection period, combine to
              form a policy that can be applied to groups of media. These policies are called media sets,
              which are containers for media that have the same append period and the same overwrite
              protection period. The append period and overwrite protection period are attributes of
              the container.

              Media Set




                                                    Append
                                                    Period 5 Days


                                                Overwrite
                                                Protection
                                                Period 30 Days




              The append period is the amount of time that data can be appended (added) to a media.
              The append period is measured from the time the media was first allocated (assigned) to
              the media set. It can be specified in hours, days, weeks, or years.
              The overwrite protection period is the amount of time that media is protected from being
              overwritten. It can be specified in hours, days, weeks, or years. The overwrite protection
              period is measured from the time when the last append backup job completed. When the
              overwrite protection period is over, the media becomes recyclable and can be overwritten.




        192                                                                           Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                                                           Media Overwrite Protection




                                                                   The Append Period begins when the media is allocated to a
                                                                   Media Set.



                     APPEND_PERIOD
              TIME

                                     OVERWRITE_PROTECTION_PERIOD
                                                                      The Overwrite Protection Period
                                                                      begins each time data is appended
                                                                      to the media.

                                                                        During the Append Period, data can                            The media
                                                                        be added to the media. Any data                               cannot be
                                                                        already on the media is protected                             overwritten
                                                                        against loss.                                                 by another
                                                                                                                                      job during
                                                                      The Append Period ends.                                         this interval.
                                                                                                                                      (However,
                                                                                                                                      you could
                                                                        After the Append                                              erase the
                                                                        Period expires, and                                           media or
                                                                        while the Overwrite
                                                                        Protection Period is                                          move it to a
                                                                        still active, data                                            scratch
                                                                        cannot be added to                                            pool.)
              TIME




                                                                        the media. Any data
                                                                        already on the media
                                                                        is protected against
                                                                        loss.


                                                                       The Protection Period expires.




                                                                                                                                                        Management
                                                                            New




                                                                                                                                                          Media
                                                                            data               After the Overwrite Protection
                                                                                               Period expires, the media
                                                                                               becomes “Recyclable.” This
                                                                                               means that new data can be
                                                                                               written to the beginning of the
              TIME




                                                                                               media by a new backup job
                                                                                               (causing loss of the original data).

                                                                             Old
                                                                            data




            The append and overwrite protection periods that you specify apply to all the data on the
            media. Therefore, each time data is appended to a media, the time remaining in the
            overwrite protection period is reset and the countdown restarted.




Chapter 5, Managing Media                                                                                                                  193
Media Overwrite Protection




               Time                                        Time                                        Time
                                Append period = 5 days                      Append period = 5 days                   Append period = 5 days
               in days                                     in days                                     in days


                 1         Normal Bkup                       1         Normal Bkup                               Normal Bkup
                                                                                                        1
                 2                                           2         Normal Bkup 1                             Normal Bkup 1
                                                                                                        2
                 3                                           3                                                   Normal Bkup 1 2
                                                                                                        3
                 4                                           4                                                   Normal Bkup 1 2 3
                                                                                                        4
                 5                                           5                                                   Normal Bkup 1 2 3 4
                                                                                                        5
                 6                                           6
                                                                                                        6
                 7                                           7
                                                                                                        7
                 8                                           8
                                                                                                        8
                 9                   Protection              9         Protection                                        Protection
                                                                                                        9
                 10                    Period                10          Period                                            Period
                                      14 Days                           14 Days                         10                14 Days
                 11                                          11
                                                                                                        11
                 12                                          12
                                                                                                        12
                 13                                          13
                                                                                                        13
                 14                                          14
                                                                                                        14
                 15                                          15
                                                                                                        15
                 16                                          16
                                                                                                        16
                 17      The media can be overwritten at     17
                         this time                                                                      17
                 18                                          18      The media can be overwritten at
                                                                     this time                          18
                                                                                                                   Fifth Day
                 19                                          19
                                                                                                        19
                 20                                          20
                                                                                                        20   The media can be overwritten at
                                First Day                                Second Day                          this time




              Because the overwrite protection period does not begin until the job completes, the
              amount of time that the job takes to complete affects the amount of time until the media
              can be overwritten.
              For example, suppose you create a media set named Weekly with an overwrite protection
              period of seven days, and an append period of 0, and you schedule a full backup job to
              run each Friday at 9 p.m. When it is time for the full backup to run at 9 p.m. the following
              Friday, the job cannot run because the first backup job that ran the previous Friday did not
              complete until 10:10 p.m. Therefore, the overwrite protection period for the Weekly media
              set still has 70 minutes remaining.
              Typically, to prevent this situation, you would shorten the overwrite protection period to
              take into account the amount of time a job may run. For this example, the scheduled job
              recurring at 9 p.m. can run if the overwrite protection period is set to 6 days instead of 7
              days.




        194                                                                                                         Administrator’s Guide
                                                                               Media Overwrite Protection


        Default Media Set
            When Backup Exec is installed, three important defaults associated with overwrite
            protection of media are established:
            ◆   A media set named Media Set 1 is created.
            ◆   The append and overwrite protection periods for Media Set 1 are set to Infinite.
            ◆   All backup jobs you create are targeted to Media Set 1, unless you change the target
                during the First Time Startup Wizard.
            By using these defaults, you can keep all of your backup data safe from overwriting
            forever (unless you erase, label, or format the media, or move it to Scratch Media). You
            will eventually run out of overwritable media unless you continually introduce scratch
            media into Backup Exec.
            To ensure that Backup Exec has media available, you can:
            ◆   Create new media sets with append and overwrite protection periods set to intervals
                of time that accommodate your needs (such as weekly, monthly, etc.) and then assign
                jobs to these media sets. When the overwrite protection period expires, the media
                become recyclable and Backup Exec can use them for other overwrite jobs.
            ◆   Change the append and overwrite protection periods of Media Set 1 to finite periods.
                The danger with changing the overwrite protection period in Media Set 1 is that if you
                continue to use Media Set 1 as the default destination media set for all backup jobs,
                your data may not be protected as long as you need it to be.
            The media for many jobs can be targeted to the same media set. Allocated media are media
            that belong to a media set. As long as the append and overwrite protection periods are




                                                                                                            Management
            current, the media are allocated to that media set. Backup Exec automatically allocates




                                                                                                              Media
            media. When the overwrite protection period expires, the media become recyclable. The
            media are still displayed as being in that media set, but with a status of recyclable. You do
            not need to move recyclable media to or from a media set; Backup Exec can overwrite the
            recyclable media in any media set whenever more media are needed for other jobs.
            See also:
                “Creating Media Sets” on page 233
                “Deleting a Media Set” on page 235
                “Renaming a Media Set” on page 236
                “Editing and Viewing Media Set Properties” on page 236




Chapter 5, Managing Media                                                                    195
Media Overwrite Protection


        Media Overwrite Protection Levels
              With the media overwrite protection levels, you choose the types of media that you want to be
              available for overwrite backup jobs.
              Although the terms are similar, the media overwrite protection levels and the media
              overwrite protection period are different. The media overwrite protection levels are global
              settings that designate groups of media as overwritable, whereas the media overwrite
              protection period is a time interval that changes from one media set to another.
              The media overwrite protection levels are:
              ◆   Full. Allows you to overwrite scratch (media that contains data you are willing to
                  discard) and recyclable media (media with an expired overwrite protection period).
              ◆   Partial. Allows you to overwrite imported media, which is media that was created by
                  another installation of Backup Exec or some other backup product. You can also
                  overwrite scratch media with the Partial protection level.
              ◆   None. Allows you to overwrite all media, including those that have current overwrite
                  protection periods (allocated media).

              Caution The None option is not recommended because it does not protect data from being
                          overwritten.

              Section 1 in the figure “Media Overwrite Protection” on page 200 illustrates the Media
              Overwrite Protection level.
              See also:
                  “Setting Default Media Options” on page 209


        Media Categories
              Backup Exec recognizes media that is inserted into storage devices and categorizes it as:
              ◆   All Media. All media that has been introduced into Backup Exec. Any media that is
                  available for overwriting in backup operations, such as scratch or recyclable media,
                  displays in blue. When you click the All Media icon, the Results pane displays
                  properties for the media in Backup Exec. For more information, see “Viewing Media
                  Information” on page 98.
              ◆   System Media. All media that has been introduced into Backup Exec, except those
                  media that have been allocated to a media set. System Media includes Scratch,
                  Retired, and Imported Media. Scratch media displays in blue in the Media and
                  Devices views.
                  -   Scratch Media. Media that do not belong to a media set and can be overwritten,
                      including:

        196                                                                             Administrator’s Guide
                                                                               Media Overwrite Protection


                    -   New or blank media.
                    -   Media that you have moved from another group, such as a media set or
                        Imported Media.
                    -   Erased media.
                -   Retired Media. Media that you have taken out of service, usually because of an
                    excessive number of errors. After a media has been categorized as retired, it is not
                    selected for use in a media set by Backup Exec. It is still available for restore
                    operations, if it has not been damaged.
                    You can delete media that is in Retired Media to remove it from Backup Exec. You
                    may want to delete media, for example, when you have a lot of offsite media that
                    you do not want to recycle or if you throw away the media. If you decide to use
                    deleted media in Backup Exec, it is recognized as Imported Media and must be
                    cataloged before you can restore from it.
                -   Imported Media. Media created by a product other than this installation of Backup
                    Exec. By default, Imported media have an overwrite protection period of Infinite,
                    but can still be overwritten if the Media Overwrite Protection Level is set to Partial
                    or None. You can overwrite imported media using several methods. Data can be
                    restored from imported media until that media is overwritten. Other media pools
                    that are contained in Imported Media are:
                    -   Backup Exec and Windows NT Backup Media. Media from another installation of
                        Backup Exec.
                    -   Backup Exec Archive Media. Media that was used for archive jobs.
                    -   Foreign Media. Media from a product other than Backup Exec.




                                                                                                             Management
            ◆   Media Sets. Media sets are groups of media that have the same overwrite protection




                                                                                                               Media
                period and append period. The overwrite protection period is the length of time that
                data is retained on a specific media before becoming available for overwriting. The
                append period is the length of time that data can be added to a media. You can create
                different media sets, each with different data overwrite protection and append
                periods. When a backup job is created, you target it to a specific media set that defines
                the particular data overwrite protection and append periods you want applied to the
                backup job. Use media sets to set up media rotation strategies. Media sets include:
                -   Allocated media. Media that belong to a media set. Allocated media are always
                    displayed in the allocated media set, even after the data overwrite protection date
                    expires.
                -   Recyclable media. Media that are allocated to a media set, but have expired
                    overwrite protection periods.
                    You can move recyclable media to Scratch Media, or you can let it remain in the
                    media set list. When a backup job runs, by default Backup Exec uses scratch
                    media first, and then selected recyclable media that is in the targeted media set for

Chapter 5, Managing Media                                                                     197
Media Overwrite Protection


                      overwriting if no scratch media are available. To change this default, on the Tools
                      menu, click Options, and then under Settings, click Media Management.
                      Recyclable media, along with scratch media, display in blue in the Media and
                      Devices views.


        Media Overwrite Options
              Media overwrite options set the order in which Backup Exec searches for overwritable
              media. When Backup Exec searches for overwritable media for a backup job, it searches
              for either scratch media or media that has an expired overwrite protection period. You are
              prompted to select the type of media that you want Backup Exec to use first:
              ◆   Overwrite scratch media before overwriting recyclable media contained in the
                  targeted media set.
                  If you choose to overwrite scratch media before recyclable media, more media may be
                  required for the same number of jobs, but the recyclable media may be preserved
                  longer for possible recovery.
              ◆   Overwrite recyclable media contained in the targeted media set before overwriting
                  scratch media.
                  If you choose to overwrite recyclable media before scratch media, you will re-use the
                  same media more frequently than if you choose to overwrite scratch media before
                  recyclable media.

              Note In a drive pool, Backup Exec selects the oldest recyclable media in all of the drives
                   in the drive pool to use first. In a robotic library, Backup Exec selects the oldest
                   recyclable media in the library to use first. If the robotic library is partitioned,
                   Backup Exec searches for the oldest recyclable media in the targeted partition only.


              Caution It is recommended that you physically write-protect media containing critical
                      data by using the write-protect tab on the media cartridge to protect against
                      unintentional move or erase operations, or expired overwrite protection
                      periods.

              See also:
                  “Setting Default Media Options” on page 209




        198                                                                           Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                  Media Overwrite Protection


            How Backup Exec Searches for Overwritable Media
            The following table describes the order in which Backup Exec searches for media to use
            for an overwrite job, depending on the combination of the overwrite protection level and
            the media overwrite option you select.

            How Backup Exec searches for overwritable media

            Overwrite protection level and overwrite         Media is overwritten in this order:
            option:

            Full + Overwrite scratch media first             1. Scratch media
            Note This combination provides the most          2. Recyclable media in the targeted media set
                 protection against overwriting media.       3. Recyclable media in any media set

            Full + Overwrite recyclable media first          1. Recyclable media in the targeted media set
                                                             2. Scratch media
                                                             3. Recyclable media in any media set

            Partial + Overwrite scratch media first          1. Scratch media
                                                             2. Recyclable media in the targeted media set
                                                             3. Recyclable media in any media set
                                                             4. Imported media

            Partial + Overwrite recyclable media first       1. Recyclable media in the targeted media set
                                                             2. Scratch media




                                                                                                               Management
                                                             3. Recyclable media in any media set




                                                                                                                 Media
                                                             4. Imported media

            None - No overwrite protection + overwrite       1. Scratch media
            scratch media first                              2. Recyclable media in the targeted media set
               Caution This option is not recommended        3. Recyclable media in any media set
               because it does not protect data from being
                                                             4. Imported media
               overwritten.
                                                             5. Allocated media in any media set


            None - No overwrite protection + overwrite       1. Recyclable media in the targeted media set
            recyclable media first                           2. Scratch media
               Caution This option is not recommended        3. Recyclable media in any media set
               because it does not protect data from being
                                                             4. Imported media
               overwritten.
                                                             5. Allocated media in any media set




Chapter 5, Managing Media                                                                           199
Media Overwrite Protection

              Media Overwrite Protection

                                                                                                                                                1
                                                                                               1
                                                                                                     1
                                                                                                                                Media Overwrite
                                                                                                                                Protection Level
                                                                                                     2




                                                                                                                   Media Overwrite Protection

                                                                                                                  None   Partial      Full



                            Media Overwrite Options
                                                                            2
                                                                                       Scratch Media
               Recyclable Media                Media Overwrite Option
               (current user media sets)       can reverse these, causing
                                               the Scratch media set to be
                                                                                      Recyclable Media
                                               examined second rather
               Scratch Media                                                          (current user media sets)
                                               than first.

                                                                                      Recyclable Media
                                                                                      (other media sets)


               Recyclable Media                                                       Imported Media
               (other media sets))

                                                                                      Allocated Media
                Imported Media


                                           With the Media Overwrite Options,
                Allocated Media            you can make Backup Exec favor
                                           scratch media over the expired
                                           (recyclable) media in the Media Set
                                           of the current job (on the right side of    When Backup Exec is unable to locate usable
                                           this page), or favor the latter over        media, it prompts you to provide one.
                                           the former (on the left of this page).




              The most obvious candidates for backup jobs requiring overwritable media are scratch
              media and recyclable media (media with expired overwrite protection periods). These are
              the first types of media for which Backup Exec searches when a backup requires media to
              overwrite. The search pattern is different according to whether you have chosen Full,
              Partial, or None. The media indicate that a type of media set is examined for availability.
              In addition to setting overwrite protection levels, you must set overwrite options, which
              set the order in which Backup Exec searches for overwritable media.
              See also
              “Media Overwrite Options” on page 198


        200                                                                                                                 Administrator’s Guide
                                                                              Media Overwrite Protection


        Media Append Options
            When you set up an append backup job, you can determine how Backup Exec should
            handle the job. The following append options are located on the Device and Media
            section of the Backup Job Properties dialog box.
            ◆   Append to media, overwrite if no appendable media is available. When you are performing
                an append backup operation and the backup job is set to this option, Backup Exec
                searches for available media as follows:
                1. Searches for appendable media in the Media set that is targeted in the backup
                    operation.
                2. If no appendable media can be found, Backup Exec changes the backup operation
                   to overwrite and continues searching for overwritable media as outlined in “How
                   Backup Exec Searches for Overwritable Media” on page 199.

            Caution If an append job fills a media, the job continues on another piece of overwritable
                    media. Depending on your configuration, overwritable media is selected from
                    Scratch Media or Recyclable Media. If the media in the drive is not
                    overwritable, a message prompts you to insert overwritable media.

            ◆   Append to media, terminate job if no appendable media is available. When you are
                performing an append backup operation and the backup job is set to this option,
                Backup Exec searches for available media as follows:
                1. Searches for appendable media in the media set targeted in the backup operation.
                2. If no appendable media is found, the backup operation is terminated.




                                                                                                           Management
            See also:




                                                                                                             Media
                “Creating a Backup Job” on page 241


        Overwriting Allocated or Imported Media
            Backup Exec protects allocated and imported media from being overwritten when full or
            partial overwrite protection is used. However, if necessary, you can allow allocated and
            imported media to be overwritten by Backup Exec before the data overwrite protection
            period expires, and without setting the media overwrite protection level to None. Several
            methods are available:
            ◆   Move the media to Scratch Media. The media is overwritten when it is selected for an
                overwrite job.
            ◆   Erase the media. Erased media is automatically recognized as scratch media and will be
                overwritten immediately.



Chapter 5, Managing Media                                                                   201
Media Labeling


              ◆   Label the media. The Label Media operation immediately writes a new media label on
                  the media, which destroys any data contained on the media.
              ◆   Format the media. Formatting destroys any data contained on the media.
              ◆   Change the overwrite protection period for the media set so that it is expired. Select the media
                  set, and then under General Tasks, click Properties.
              See also:
                  “Deleting Media” on page 224
                  “Editing and Viewing Media Set Properties” on page 236
                  “Media Overwrite Options” on page 198


        Removing Damaged Media
              Media that meets or exceeds the discard thresholds determined by the media
              manufacturer should be moved to Retired Media. Based on a measurement of soft errors
              generated by the storage device firmware, media that exceeds acceptable levels of these
              errors are reported to Backup Exec as potential candidates to be discarded.
              To decide which media to retire, run a Media Sets report to see the total number of errors
              for media, or view the properties for a specific media.
              Move any media with an unacceptable level of errors to Retired Media so that you are
              protected against using defective media before critical backup operations begin. After you
              mark media as retired, it will not be used by Backup Exec for future backup jobs. The
              media is still available to be restored from if it is not damaged.
              Media can only be deleted from Backup Exec when it is part of the Retired Media set.
              See also:
                  “Deleting Media” on page 224
                  “Viewing Media Statistical Properties” on page 229
                  “Media Set Report” on page 541



Media Labeling
              Media used in Backup Exec is identified by its media label. When new, blank, or unlabeled
              media is used during a backup operation, Backup Exec automatically labels the media.
              This label consists of a prefix that identifies the cartridge type, and an incrementing
              number. For example, if the media is a 4mm tape, then the prefix would be 4M, followed
              by 000001. The next media label generated for an unlabeled 4mm tape would be
              4M000002, and so on.

        202                                                                                  Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                         Media Labeling


            You can allow the media label to be assigned automatically by Backup Exec, or you can
            specify a label prefix and number to be assigned for a type of media. For example, you can
            specify that all 4mm media that are entered for the first time into this installation of
            Backup Exec are labeled with a prefix of ACCT, and with numbering starting from 1000.
            You can specify another media type to be labeled with a prefix of FIN, and with
            numbering starting at 10,000. Customizing labels in this manner can help you recognize
            and organize media.
            Another type of media label used by Backup Exec is the media ID, which is a unique label
            assigned by Backup Exec to individual media used in Backup Exec. The media ID is used
            internally by Backup Exec in order to keep statistics on each media. Because the media
            label or bar code label for media can be changed, Backup Exec must use the media ID,
            which cannot be changed or erased, to preserve continuity in record keeping for each
            individual media. The media ID has no effect on the media label, or on your ability to
            rename, label, or erase media.
            At times, you may need to use the media ID to distinguish media that have duplicate
            media labels. Duplicate labels can be automatically generated in instances when Backup
            Exec is reinstalled or media from another Backup Exec installation is used. Use the media
            ID to distinguish between duplicate labels. You can view the media ID in a media’s
            property page.
            Write the media label on an external label fixed to the outside of the physical media.
            Whenever you change the media label, you should also change the external label to
            match.
            Three methods are available in Backup Exec to change a media label:
            ◆   Label Media operation. Writes a new media label on the media. This write operation




                                                                                                          Management
                destroys any data on the media. This option is available on the Devices view.




                                                                                                            Media
            ◆   Rename operation. Changes the name of the media in the display, but does not write the
                new label to the media until an overwrite operation occurs. The data on the media is
                viable until the media is overwritten.
            ◆   Edit the label in the media’s property page. Editing the label changes the name of the
                media in the display, but does not write the new label to the media until an overwrite
                operation occurs. The data on the media is viable until the media is overwritten.
            See also:
                “Setting Default Media Options” on page 209
                “Labeling Media” on page 180
                “Bar Code Labeling” on page 204
                “Renaming Media Labels” on page 208
                “Viewing General Media Properties” on page 226



Chapter 5, Managing Media                                                                   203
Media Labeling


        Imported Media Labeling
              Backup Exec does not automatically relabel imported media. The imported media’s
              existing label is read and displayed in the Media view, in one of the Imported Media sets.
              Additionally, the imported media’s original media label is displayed under the heading
              Media Description in the Results pane of the Media view. You can edit the media
              description in the media’s property page to make it a more descriptive label.
              If the media overwrite protection level is set to Partial or None, the imported media may
              be selected for a job and be overwritten. The imported media is automatically labeled
              when it is overwritten during a job.
              If you want to label a specific imported media while maintaining full media overwrite
              protection for other imported media, erase the specific media and then label it.
              See also:
                  “Viewing General Media Properties” on page 226


        Bar Code Labeling
              If there is a bar code label on the physical cartridge, and the cartridge is in a robotic library
              that has a bar code reader, the bar code label automatically becomes the media label.
              You can change the media label in Backup Exec, but as long as the media has a bar code
              label that can be read, the bar code label takes precedence over the media label. To use the
              media label you entered using Backup Exec, you must remove the physical bar code label
              from the media cartridge, or use the media in a device without a bar code reader.
                  Example
                  Robotic Library 1 has bar code support. During a backup operation, Backup Exec
                  requests a new or overwritable media for the operation. A new media with the bar
                  code label 'ABCD' is inserted in the robotic library magazine and the bar code reader
                  scans the bar code ID on the media label. Backup Exec selects this media for the
                  operation and detects that a bar code label has been assigned to the media. Backup
                  Exec automatically uses the bar code label and continues the operation.
              When you change magazines or insert new media in a magazine, bar code readers allow
              you to quickly update slot information by right-clicking the slot (or slots) and selecting
              Scan.
              See also:
                  “Media Labeling” on page 202




        204                                                                                Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                         Media Labeling


            Bar Code Labeling in Mixed Media Libraries
            If you are using a robotic library that uses different types of drives and you have bar code
            support for that library, you can set up Backup Exec to identify which media type can be
            used in which drive type. You set up a bar code label with a prefix or a suffix that
            corresponds to a certain type of media. When Backup Exec reads that bar code label, it
            locates the type of media that corresponds to the prefix or suffix and then mounts the
            media into a drive that accepts that type of media. You can add both a prefix and a suffix
            or just one of them.
            After setting up bar code rules, you must set up two more items in order for the bar code
            rules to work. You must enable the bar code rules for the robotic library by selecting the
            bar code rules option on the Configuration tab in the robotic library’s properties. In
            addition to setting the bar code rules for each type of media you use, for each drive in
            your mixed media library you should indicate what type of media can be used and
            whether that media can be used for read or write operations. To set this up, see “Viewing
            and Specifying a Drive’s Media Types” on page 136.

        ▼   To set up a bar code label rule:

            1. On the Tools menu, click Options.

            2. In the Properties pane, under Settings, click Bar Code Rules.




                                                                                                           Management
                                                                                                             Media




Chapter 5, Managing Media                                                                   205
Media Labeling

                 Bar Code Rules




              3. Click Add.

                 Add Bar Code Rule




        206                          Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                                Media Labeling


            4. Select the appropriate options as follows:

                Add Bar Code Rule dialog box

                Item               Description

                Select a Media     Select the media for which you want to add a bar code rule.
                Type

                Vendor             Type the name of this library’s manufacturer. You can find the name of
                                   the library manufacturer on the library’s property page. This is an
                                   optional field. By typing a vendor name here, you restrict the bar code
                                   rule to that vendor’s libraries. If you are creating a general bar code rule
                                   that applies to libraries from different vendors, do not type anything in
                                   this field. This field is not case-sensitive.

                Barcode Prefix     Type a code to be placed before the bar code. This code represents a
                                   media type. The code can be up to 16 characters, and any combination of
                                   letters and numbers. This field is not case-sensitive.

                Barcode Suffix     Type a code to be placed after the bar code. This code represents a media
                                   type. The code can be up to 16 characters, and any combination of letters
                                   and numbers. This field is not case-sensitive.


            5. Click OK to save the bar code label rule for the media.

            6. Verify that bar code rules are enabled for the robotic library. The bar code rules do not
               go into effect until you enable them for the robotic library. For more information, see




                                                                                                                  Management
               “Viewing Robotic Library Configuration Properties” on page 142.




                                                                                                                    Media
        ▼   To change a bar code rule:

            1. On the Tools menu, click Options.

            2. In the Properties pane, under Settings, click Bar Code Rules.

            3. Click Modify.

            4. Change the options as needed.

            5. Click OK to save the changes.

            6. Click OK.




Chapter 5, Managing Media                                                                           207
Media Labeling


        ▼     To delete a bar code rule:

              1. On the Tools menu, click Options.

              2. In the Properties Pane, under Settings, click Bar Code Rules.

              3. Select a bar code rule to delete.

              4. Click Delete.

              5. Click Yes to verify that you want to delete the rule.

              6. Click OK.


        Renaming Media Labels
              Use Rename to assign a new label to media. The new label is not actually written to the
              media until an overwrite operation occurs. All data on the media is preserved until the
              next overwrite job. However, the new media label is stored in the database, and is
              displayed for that media. To write a new media label to the media immediately, use Label
              Media on the media’s property page. The media’s contents will be erased.
              If you rename a media, and then use it in another installation of Backup Exec, that media
              is treated as imported media, and the media’s original media label is displayed; the
              renamed label is not transferred to other installations of Backup Exec.

        ▼     To rename a media label:

              1. Do one of the following:
                  -   If the media is in a drive, then from the navigation bar, click Devices, and then
                      click that drive to display the media.
                  -   If you don’t know where the media is, from the navigation bar, click Media, and
                      then click All Media to display all media.

              2. Select the media you want to rename.

              3. Under General Tasks in the task pane, click Rename.




        208                                                                           Administrator’s Guide
                                                                           Setting Default Media Options


                Rename Media Label dialog box




            4. In Name, type a new media label.

            5. Click OK.

            6. Write this media label on an external label fixed to the outside of the physical media.
            See also:
                “Viewing General Media Properties” on page 226



Setting Default Media Options
            This procedure explains how to set options for the media overwrite protection levels, the
            media overwrite options, the default media labeling, and the default location for
            Backup-to-Disk Folders.

        ▼   To set media options:

            1. On the Tools menu, click Options.




                                                                                                           Management
            2. On the Properties pane, under Settings, click Media Management.




                                                                                                             Media




Chapter 5, Managing Media                                                                   209
Setting Default Media Options

              Media Options - Set Application Defaults




              3. Select the appropriate options as follows:

                  Media Options - Set Application Defaults

                  Item                       Description

                  Media overwrite protection level

                  Full - protect allocated   Select this option to protect media in media sets and imported
                  and imported media         media from being overwritten.
                                             This is the safest option to choose because the media being
                                             protected cannot be overwritten until:
                                                The overwrite protection period for the media expires.
                                                You move media that belongs to an active media set to
                                                Scratch Media.
                                                You erase, format, or label the media.
                                                You move media from Imported Media to Scratch Media.




        210                                                                                 Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                 Setting Default Media Options


                Media Options - Set Application Defaults (continued)

                Item                        Description

                Partial - protect only      Select this option to allow imported and scratch media to be
                allocated media             overwritten. Media in a media set that has an overwrite
                                            protection period that has not expired (allocated media),
                                            cannot be overwritten.
                                            This option is recommended if you have media from an earlier
                                            version of Backup Exec or another product (imported media)
                                            that you want to reuse.

                Prompt before               Select this option to be prompted before Backup Exec
                overwriting imported        overwrites imported media when Partial has been selected.
                media

                None                        Select this option to disable the media overwrite protection
                   Caution This option is   feature. With this option, you are responsible for making sure
                   not recommended          that the media in your storage devices are not accidentally
                   because it does not      overwritten.
                   protect data from        For example, when an overwrite job is submitted to a drive,
                   being overwritten.       and the media overwrite protection level is set to None, the
                                            media in that drive is overwritten.

                Prompt before            If you selected None (no overwrite protection), it is highly
                overwriting allocated or recommended that you select this option to be prompted
                imported media           before overwriting allocated or imported media.




                                                                                                                 Management
                                                                                                                   Media




Chapter 5, Managing Media                                                                           211
Setting Default Media Options


                 Media Options - Set Application Defaults (continued)

                 Item                      Description

                 Media overwrite options

                 Overwrite scratch media   Select this option to have Backup Exec overwrite scratch
                 before overwriting        media first when an overwrite job occurs.
                 recyclable media          If no scratch media are found in any of the storage devices,
                 contained in the          Backup Exec overwrites recyclable media in the targeted
                 targeted media set        media set.
                                           If no recyclable media are found, Backup Exec automatically
                                           searches for other media to overwrite. The media that is
                                           overwritten depends on the level of overwrite protection that
                                           you set (Full, Partial, or None). See “How Backup Exec
                                           searches for overwritable media” on page 199.
                                           If you select this option, more media may be required for the
                                           same number of jobs than if you choose to overwrite
                                           recyclable media first.
                                           Because this option affects the order in which Backup Exec
                                           overwrites media, choosing to overwrite scratch media first
                                           may allow the recyclable media to be preserved longer for
                                           possible recovery.

                 Overwrite recyclable      Select this option to have Backup Exec overwrite recyclable
                 media contained in the    media in the targeted media set when an overwrite job occurs.
                 targeted media set        If no recyclable media are found in any of the storage devices,
                 before overwriting        Backup Exec overwrites scratch media.
                 scratch media
                                           If no recyclable or scratch media are found, Backup Exec
                                           automatically searches for media to overwrite. The media that
                                           is overwritten depends on the level of overwrite protection
                                           that you set (Full, Partial, or None). See “How Backup Exec
                                           searches for overwritable media” on page 199.
                                           If you choose to overwrite recyclable media in the targeted
                                           media set first, you will re-use the same media more
                                           frequently than if you choose to overwrite scratch media first.

                 Media label configuration

                 Media type                Select the type of media for which you want to create default
                                           labels. For example, if you select 4mm, then all 4mm-type
                                           media that are entered for the first time into this installation of
                                           Backup Exec are assigned a label according to what you
                                           specify in the following fields.




        212                                                                                   Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                  Setting Default Media Options


                Media Options - Set Application Defaults (continued)

                Item                      Description

                Prefix                    Displays the current default prefix for the selected cartridge
                                          type. To specify a new prefix on the label, type from one to
                                          eight alpha-numeric characters.

                Next value                Displays the next number that will be included in the label of
                                          the next media that matches the selected cartridge type when
                                          that media is entered for the first time into this installation of
                                          Backup Exec. This number is incremented by one each time a
                                          media that matches the selected cartridge type is entered into
                                          this installation of Backup Exec.
                                          For example, if Cartridge type is set to 4mm, and Next value is
                                          set to 1, the first time a 4mm media is entered into this
                                          installation of Backup Exec, its label will include the number 1.
                                          The label on the next 4mm media entered will include the
                                          number 2.
                                          To enter a new value, type from one to eight numeric
                                          characters. This number must not exceed the number specified
                                          in the Digits field.

                Digits                    Displays the length of Next value, including placeholder
                                          zeroes. This field defines the minimum size of the numeric
                                          portion of the label.
                                          For example, if Next value is set to 1, and Digits is set to 6,
                                          then the Next value for the media label is 000001, 000002,




                                                                                                                  Management
                                          000003, and so on.




                                                                                                                    Media
                                          If the Next value exceeds the entry in the Digits field, the extra
                                          digit is added. Using the previous example, if label numbering
                                          continued until 999,999, the next label would be 1,000,000 even
                                          though the value specified in Digits is 6.
                                          Rolling over the label numbering to 1,000,000 and 1,000,001
                                          rather than 000,000 and 000,001 prevents the duplication of
                                          labels.
                                          The number entered in the Digits field must be in the range of
                                          three to eight.




Chapter 5, Managing Media                                                                            213
Setting Default Media Options


                  Media Options - Set Application Defaults (continued)

                  Item                      Description

                  Backup-to-Disk default    Type the default path for new backup folders. This default
                  folder location           path appears in the New Backup-to-Disk Folder dialog box
                                            where you add a new backup folder. For more information,
                                            see “Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files” on page 149.
                                            When making selections for backups you are targeting to a
                                            backup folder, avoid including that backup folder in the
                                            selections for the job. For example, if you create a new backup
                                            folder in c:\Backup Folders and then select the entire c:\
                                            volume for backup, make sure you exclude c:\Backup Folders
                                            from the selection list.
                                            When adding backup folders, make sure there is sufficient
                                            space on the disk for the data you are backing up. Backups
                                            that exceed the size of available disk space will fail.

              4. Click OK.
              See also:
                  “Media Overwrite Options” on page 198
                  “Media Append Options” on page 201
                  “Media Labeling” on page 202




        214                                                                                 Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                           Media Location


Media Location
            Backup Exec helps you track the location of your media. There are three categories
            available for tracking media:
            ◆   Online location. The online location lists media that reside in a storage device, robotic
                library slot, or Backup-to-Disk folder. The online location is defined by Backup Exec,
                so you cannot delete or rename it. In addition, you cannot add media to the online
                location.

            Note If you move media from an online location, its overwrite protection period and
                 append period remain in effect.

            ◆   Offline location. The offline location displays all media that are onsite but are not in
                drives or slots, or media vaults. Media are automatically moved to this location if you
                use Backup Exec to remove media from a device or slot. You can add media to the
                offline location from another media location. To move offline media back to online,
                you must run an inventory of the devices or slot, or you must catalog the media. You
                cannot delete or rename the offline location.
            ◆   User-defined media vault. A media vault is a logical representation of the actual physical
                location of media. You can create user-defined media vaults to keep track of where
                media is physically stored, such as a special media room, a scratch bin, or an offsite
                location. For example, you could create a media vault where media to be sent offsite
                are moved. Then print the Media Vault Contents report, which lists the media
                contained in that vault, to accompany the physical media to their offsite storage. You
                can create as many user-defined media vaults as necessary.




                                                                                                             Management
            See also:




                                                                                                               Media
                “Finding Media in a Location or Vault” on page 216
                “Renaming a User-defined Media Vault” on page 217
                “Adding Media to the Offline Location or a User-Defined Vault” on page 217
                “Moving Media by Dragging and Dropping” on page 218
                “Deleting a User-defined Media Vault” on page 219
                “Media Vault Contents Report” on page 542




Chapter 5, Managing Media                                                                     215
Media Location


        Creating User-defined Media Vaults
              Create media vaults to track media stored in specific sites.

        ▼     To create a user-defined media vault:

              1. On the navigation bar, click Media.

              2. Under Media Location Tasks on the task pane, click New media vault.

              3. Type the name and a description of the new vault.

              4. Click OK.


        Finding Media in a Location or Vault
              If you know the media label for a piece of media, but don’t know where it is located, you
              can search for it using the label.

        ▼     To find media:

              1. On the navigation bar, click Media.

              2. On the Media selections pane, click Media Location.

              3. Under Media Location Tasks on the task pane, click Find media.

              4. Type the name from the media label of the media you want to find.

              5. Click OK.
                  Backup Exec highlights the location of the media and displays its properties in the
                  preview pane.

              Note If you are using BEWAC, the preview pane is not available.




        216                                                                          Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                        Media Location


        Renaming a User-defined Media Vault
            You can rename a user-defined media vault at any time. You cannot rename the
            system-defined online and offline media vaults.

        ▼   To rename a user-defined media vault:

            1. On the navigation bar, click Media.

            2. On the Media selections pane, click the media vault you want to rename.

            3. Under General Tasks in the task pane, click Rename.

            4. Type the new name.

            5. Click OK.


        Adding Media to the Offline Location or a User-Defined Vault
            You can add media to the offline location or a user-defined vault. You cannot add media to
            the online vault. When you add media to a different location or vault, Backup Exec
            removes the media from the original location or vault.

        ▼   To add media to the offline location or a user-defined media vault:

            1. On the navigation bar, click Media.




                                                                                                         Management
                                                                                                           Media
            2. In the Media selections pane, select the media location or vault to which you want to
               add media.

            3. Under Media Location Tasks in the task pane, click Add media to selected vault.

            4. Type the media label or scan the bar code label for the media you want to add to this
               vault.

            5. Click Add.

            6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all the media you want to add.

            7. Click OK.




Chapter 5, Managing Media                                                                  217
Media Location


        Moving Media by Dragging and Dropping
              When you are working with media in a location, you cannot move it using the media
              move operation that you use when you are working with media in media sets, imported
              media, or other media areas. To move media from a location, you drag and drop it from
              one location to another location. The following table lists the drag-and-drop rules for
              media locations and vaults:

              Note If you move media from an online location, its overwrite protection period and append
                    period remain in effect.


                  Media Location and Vault Drag-and-Drop Rules

                  From/To         Online        Offline          User-defined Media           All Media
                                  Location      Location         Vaults       Pools/Sets

                  Online location No            Yes, with a      Yes, with a    No            No
                                                warning that     warning that
                                                the media is     the media is
                                                not physically   not physically
                                                moved from       moved from
                                                the online       the online
                                                location.        location.

                  Offline         No            No               Yes           No             No
                  location

                  User-defined    No            Yes              Yes           No             No
                  vault

                  Media           No            Yes, with a      Yes, with a   Yes            No
                  Pools/Sets                    warning          warning

                  All Media       No            Yes, with a      Yes, with a    Yes           No
                                                warning that     warning that
                                                the media is     the media is
                                                not physically   not physically
                                                moved from       moved from
                                                the online       the online
                                                location.        location.




        218                                                                                Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                            Media Location


        ▼   To move media from a location or vault:

            1. On the navigation bar, click Media.

            2. On the Media selections pane, click the vault containing the media.

            3. Select the media from the Results pane, and drag it to the new location.


        Deleting a User-defined Media Vault
            You can delete an empty user-defined media vault. If there is any media in the vault, you
            must move it before you can delete the vault. You cannot delete the online or offline
            locations.

        ▼   To delete a user-defined vault:

            1. On the navigation bar, click Media.

            2. On the Media selection pane, select the media vault you want to delete.

            3. Under General Tasks in the task pane, click Delete.

            4. Click Yes to delete, or, if you are deleting multiple vaults, click Yes to All to delete
               without prompting for each vault.




                                                                                                             Management
                                                                                                               Media




Chapter 5, Managing Media                                                                      219
Media Rotation Strategies


Media Rotation Strategies
              There are many media rotation strategies you can use to protect your data. They differ
              mostly by the number of media required and by the amount of time the media is kept
              before it is rotated back into the schedule. Three of the most commonly used media
              rotation strategies are:
              ◆   Son. Uses the same media each day to run a full backup. See “Son Media Rotation
                  Strategy” on page 220.
              ◆   Father/Son. Uses multiple media, includes a combination of weekly full and daily
                  differential or incremental backups for a two-week schedule, and provides backups
                  for offsite storage. See “Father/Son Media Rotation Strategy” on page 221.
              ◆   Grandfather. Uses multiple media, includes a combination of weekly and monthly full
                  and daily differential or incremental backups, and provides backups for offsite
                  storage. See “Grandfather Media Rotation Strategy” on page 222.


        Son Media Rotation Strategy
              Number of media required: 1 (minimum)
              Overwrite protection period: last backup
              The Son strategy involves performing a full backup every day. Although the Son strategy
              is simple to administrate, backing up with a single media is not an effective method of
              backup. This is because magnetic media eventually wears out after many uses and the
              data you can restore only spans back to your last backup.

              Son Backup Strategy
                                     Mon        Tue         Wed        Thu         Fri
                                     Media 1    Media 1     Media 1    Media 1     Media 1
                        Week 1



                                                       Full Backup




        220                                                                         Administrator’s Guide
                                                                              Media Rotation Strategies


        Father/Son Media Rotation Strategy
            Number of media required: 6 (minimum)
            Overwrite protection period: Two weeks
            The Father/Son media rotation strategy uses a combination of full and differential or
            incremental backups for a two-week schedule.
            In the Father/Son scenario, four media are used Monday through Thursday for
            differential or incremental backups. The other two media containing full backups are
            rotated out and stored offsite every Friday.

            Father/Son Backup Strategy

                                 Mon        Tue         Wed        Thu         Fri
                                 Media 1    Media 2     Media 3    Media 4     Media 5
                    Week 1


                                 Media 1    Media 2     Media 3    Media 4     Media 6

                    Week 2



                                    Full Backup                      Incremental or Differential
                                                                     Backup




                                                                                                          Management
            Note When this backup strategy is first implemented, you must start with a full backup.




                                                                                                            Media
            The Father/Son strategy is easy to administrate and allows you to keep data longer than
            the Son strategy, but it is not suitable for the stringent data protection needs of most
            network environments.




Chapter 5, Managing Media                                                                  221
Media Rotation Strategies


        Grandfather Media Rotation Strategy
              Number of media required: 19 (minimum)
              Overwrite protection period: One year
              The Grandfather method is one of the most common media rotation strategies. It is simple
              to administrate and comprehensive enough to allow easy location of files when they need
              to be restored.
              In the Grandfather scenario, four media are used Monday through Thursday for
              incremental or differential backups; another three media are used every Friday for full
              backups. The remaining 12 media are used for monthly full backups and are kept offsite.

              Grandfather Backup Strategy
                                      Mon       Tue        Wed       Thu       Fri
                                      Mon 1     Tue 2      Wed 3     Thu 4     Fri 5
                            Week 1

                                      Mon 1     Tue 2      Wed 3     Thu 4     Fri 6
                            Week 2


                                      Mon 1     Tue 2      Wed 3     Thu 4     Fri 7
                            Week 3

                                       Mon 1     Tue 2     Wed 3     Thu 4     Monthly
                            Week 4


                                                                     Incremental or
                                        Full Backup                  Differential
                                                                     Backup




              The Grandfather strategy is recommended because it offers a good media number to
              storage life ratio (19 media/1 year). It is also easy to modify if you want to incorporate
              more media. For example, you could perform a full backup on the last Saturday of the
              month to archive permanently.




        222                                                                              Administrator’s Guide
                                                                               Media Rotation Strategies


        Running the Media Rotation Wizard
            Backup Exec’s Media Rotation wizard guides you through setting up a media rotation job.
            This job is based on a modified Grandfather/Father/Son strategy. After running the
            wizard, the following jobs are set up to protect the data that you select:
            ◆   A full backup job to start the media rotation job.
            ◆   A scheduled full backup job that runs at least once a week.
            ◆   A scheduled differential or incremental backup job that runs on the days that the full
                backups do not occur.

        ▼   To run the Media Rotation wizard:

            1. From the Tools menu, point to Wizards, and then select Media Rotation Wizard.

            Note You also can find the Media Rotation wizard on the Job Setup screen. On the
                 navigation bar, click Job Setup. Under Backup Strategy Tasks on the task pane,
                 click Set up media rotation.


            2. Follow the on-screen prompts.
            See also:
                “Backing Up Data” on page 239
                “Media Rotation Strategies” on page 220
                “Media Sets” on page 232




                                                                                                           Management
                                                                                                             Media




Chapter 5, Managing Media                                                                  223
Media Operations


Media Operations
              You can perform several types of operations on media. You can delete media from the
              Retired Media set, move media to a different media set, or create a new catalog for a piece
              of media. In addition, you can view properties for the media, including the general,
              management, statistical, and cleaning properties.
              See also:
                   “Deleting Media” on page 224
                   “Moving Media” on page 225
                   “Cataloging Media in a Drive” on page 413
                   “Viewing General Media Properties” on page 226
                   “Viewing Media Management Properties” on page 228
                   “Viewing Media Statistical Properties” on page 229
                   “Viewing Media Cleaning Properties” on page 231


        Deleting Media
              You may want to delete media when:
              ◆    You have a lot of offsite media that you do not want to recycle.
              ◆    You throw away damaged or old media.
              Media can only be deleted from Backup Exec when it is part of the Retired Media set.
              When deleted media is reused in Backup Exec, it is recognized as imported media. Before
              you can restore from the media it must be cataloged.

              Note Deleting media from Backup Exec is not the same as erasing media.


        ▼     To delete media:

              1. On the navigation bar, click Media.

              2. If the media is not already in Retired Media, you must move it there.
                   To look at the contents of Retired Media, expand the server icon, then expand System
                   Media, then expand Retired Media.
                   To move media to Retired Media, drag the media to the Retired Media icon.

              3. Select the media you want to delete.


        224                                                                           Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                     Media Operations


            4. Under General Tasks in the task pane, click Delete.
                If Delete is unavailable, the media is not in Retired Media. You must move the media
                to Retired Media before Delete is available.

            5. Click Yes or Yes to All to delete the media that are displayed.
            See also:
                “Removing Damaged Media” on page 202


        Moving Media
            You may want to move media when:
            ◆   Media is reported as generating too many errors and needs to be retired.
            ◆   You no longer want to keep the data on imported media and want to reuse the media.
            When you move media to a media set, the media takes the append and overwrite
            protection period properties of the media set to which it was moved.

            Note Moving scratch or imported media to a media set is not recommended.


        ▼   To move media:

            1. On the navigation bar, click Media.




                                                                                                        Management
            2. Expand All Media to display a list of media, and then select the media you want to
               move.




                                                                                                          Media
            3. You can drag the media to a media set, or under Media Tasks on the task pane, click
               Move.

                Move Media dialog box




            4. Click the Down arrow next to the Move this media to field to display the media set to
               which you want to move this media, and then click OK.



Chapter 5, Managing Media                                                                  225
Media Operations


        Viewing General Media Properties
        ▼     To view media properties:

              1. On the navigation bar, click Media.

              2. Expand the All Media icon, and then select the media that you want to view.

              3. Under General Tasks on the task pane, click Properties.
                   The General Media Properties tab provides the following information:

                   General Media Properties tab

                   Item                     Description

                   Media Label              Media label that was assigned automatically by Backup Exec,
                                            or that was assigned or changed by the administrator, or that
                                            was a pre-assigned bar code label.
                                            You can edit the media label, which is limited to 32 characters.
                                            Editing the label changes the name of the media in the display,
                                            but does not write the new label to the media until an
                                            overwrite operation occurs. When you edit a media label, try
                                            to make it a concise identifier that will remain constant even
                                            when the media is reused. You should write this media label
                                            on a label fixed to the outside of the physical media.
                                            Duplicate labels can be automatically generated. For example,
                                            reinstalling Backup Exec or bringing media from another
                                            Backup Exec installation could cause duplication in labels.
                                            Duplicate labels are allowed, but not recommended.
                                            Note If a bar code is available, and a bar code-equipped
                                                 device is used, then the media label automatically
                                                 defaults to that bar code.

                   Media Description        By default, displays the original media label if the media is
                                            imported media.
                                            You can edit the media description, which is limited to 128
                                            characters, to make it a more descriptive label.

                   Media Type               Media type and subtype (if available). Click the button next to
                                            the field to change the media type or subtype.




        226                                                                                  Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                               Media Operations


                General Media Properties tab (continued)

                Item                      Description

                Used Capacity             The amount of raw capacity on the media that has been used.
                                          Used Capacity is calculated by subtracting Available Capacity
                                          from Total Capacity.
                                          Used Capacity may or may not equal Bytes Written.

                Available Capacity        The amount of expected raw capacity on the media that
                                          remains unused. Some tape devices support the ability to read
                                          the amount of remaining capacity of the media that is
                                          currently loaded in the device. If a tape device supports
                                          reading of the remaining capacity amount, then Available
                                          Capacity is derived from the remaining capacity amount.
                                          Otherwise, Available Capacity is calculated by subtracting
                                          Bytes Written from Total Capacity.
                                          Because Free Space is reported in terms of unused raw
                                          capacity, review Bytes Written and Compression Ratio to
                                          better estimate if there is enough free space to accommodate a
                                          specific job.

                Total Capacity            The amount of expected total raw capacity of the media. Some
                                          tape devices support the ability to read the amount of total
                                          capacity of the media that is currently loaded in the device. If a
                                          tape device supports reading of the total capacity amount,
                                          then Total Capacity is derived from the total capacity amount.
                                          Otherwise, Total Capacity is estimated based on past usage of




                                                                                                                  Management
                                          the media.




                                                                                                                    Media
                Bytes Written             The amount of data that has been written into blocks on the
                                          media. Bytes Written may differ from Used Capacity due to
                                          the effects of data compression and media flaws. Data
                                          compression will tend to increase Bytes Written when
                                          compared to Used Capacity. Media flaws will decrease Bytes
                                          Written when compared to Used Capacity.

                Compression Ratio         The ratio of Bytes Written to Used Capacity. Compression
                (Bytes Written/Used       ratio will show the overall effect that data compression and
                Capacity)                 media flaws are having on the amount of data that is being
                                          stored on the media.




Chapter 5, Managing Media                                                                            227
Media Operations


                   General Media Properties tab (continued)

                   Item                      Description

                   Media ID                  Internal identification number assigned by Backup Exec. You
                                             cannot change this number.

              See also:
                   “Media Labeling” on page 202
                   “Creating a Test Run Job” on page 314
                   “Viewing Media Information” on page 98
                   “Viewing Media Statistical Properties” on page 229
                   “Viewing Media Cleaning Properties” on page 231


        Viewing Media Management Properties
        ▼     To view media management properties:

              1. On the navigation bar, click Media.

              2. Expand the All Media icon, and then select the media that you want to view.

              3. Under General Tasks in the task pane, click Properties.

              4. Select the Management tab.
                   The Media Management Properties tab provides the following information:

                   Media Management Properties tab

                   Item                    Description

                   Creation date           Date and time when the media was first entered into Backup Exec.

                   Allocation date         Date and time when the media was added to a media set as a result
                                           of an overwrite operation.

                   Modification date       Date and time when data was last written to the media.




        228                                                                               Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                             Media Operations


            Note In BEWAC, the server’s date and time format are used instead of the client’s date
                 and time format.


            5. Click OK.
            See also:
                “Viewing General Media Properties” on page 226
                “Viewing Media Cleaning Properties” on page 231


        Viewing Media Statistical Properties
        ▼   To view media statistical properties:

            1. On the navigation bar, click Media.

            2. Expand the All Media icon, and then select the media that you want to view.

            3. Under General Tasks in the task pane, click Properties.

            4. Select the Statistics tab.
                The Media Statistic Properties tab provides the following information:

                Media Statistic Properties tab




                                                                                                                Management
                Item                      Description




                                                                                                                  Media
                Totals

                Total bytes written       Number of bytes that have been written to this media.

                Total bytes read          Number of bytes that have been read from this media.

                Total mounts              Number of times this media has been mounted.

                Total seeks               The total number of seek operations (performed when a specific
                                          piece of information is being located) that have been performed on
                                          this media.

                Total hours in use        The total number of hours that this media has been in use.




Chapter 5, Managing Media                                                                         229
Media Operations

                   Media Statistic Properties tab (continued)

                   Item                      Description

                   Errors

                   Seek errors               The number of errors encountered while trying to locate data.

                   Soft read errors          The number of recoverable read errors encountered. If you receive
                                             soft errors, it may indicate the beginning of a problem. If you receive
                                             excessive errors for your environment, check the media for damage.

                   Hard read errors          The number of unrecoverable read errors encountered. If you
                                             receive hard errors, check the media for damage.

                   Soft write errors         The number of recoverable write errors encountered. If you receive
                                             soft errors, it may indicate the beginning of a problem. If you receive
                                             excessive errors for your environment, check the media for damage.

                   Hard write errors         The number of unrecoverable write errors encountered. If you
                                             receive hard errors, check the media for damage.

              5. Click OK.
              See also:
                   “Editing and Viewing Media Set Properties” on page 236
                   “Creating Media Sets” on page 233




        230                                                                                    Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                          Media Operations


        Viewing Media Cleaning Properties
            You can view media cleaning properties only for cleaning media.

        ▼   To view media cleaning properties:

            1. On the navigation bar, click Media.

            2. Expand the All Media icon, and then select the media that you want to view.

            3. Under General Tasks in the task pane, click Properties.

            4. Select the Cleaning tab.
                The Media Cleaning Properties tab provides the following information:

                Media Cleaning Properties tab

                Item                    Description

                Number of cleanings     Displays the number of cleanings performed so far by this cleaning
                                        media.

                Maximum number of       Type the maximum number of times you want to use this media for
                cleanings               cleaning. If the media contains Media Auxiliary Memory, the
                                        maximum number of cleanings displays automatically.




                                                                                                             Management
            5. Click OK.




                                                                                                               Media




Chapter 5, Managing Media                                                                      231
Media Sets


Media Sets
              A media set is a container for media. When you create a new media set, you must set an
              append period and an overwrite protection period for the set. When media is placed into
              the media set, that media takes on the attributes of the media set. Media sets can contain
              allocated media and recyclable media.
              When you create a backup job, you must identify a media set that will receive the backed
              up files. You can create media sets manually or using the Media Set Wizard.
              See also:
                  “Media Overwrite Protection” on page 191
                  “Creating Media Sets” on page 233
                  “Deleting a Media Set” on page 235
                  “Renaming a Media Set” on page 236
                  “Editing and Viewing Media Set Properties” on page 236


        Running the Media Set Wizard
              The Media Set Wizard guides you through the process of creating a new media set. It
              explains the choices you can make. The Media Set Wizard is helpful if you are new to
              Backup Exec or are unfamiliar with the concepts and terminology of media sets. Before
              you run this wizard you should understand media overwrite protection and append
              periods. For an overview of these terms, see “Media Overwrite Protection” on page 191. If
              you do not need a wizard to set up a new media set, see “Creating Media Sets” on
              page 233.

        ▼     To run the Media Set Wizard:

              1. On the Tools menu, point to Wizards.

              2. Click Media Set Wizard.

              3. Follow the instructions on the screen.
                  If you set the media overwrite protection level to Full, you must have blank media
                  ready and online before the first backup job runs. If you plan to use imported media,
                  you must inventory it first.




        232                                                                          Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                                Media Sets


        Creating Media Sets
        ▼   To create a media set:

            1. On the navigation bar, click Media.

            2. Under Media Set Tasks in the task pane, click New Media Set.

            3. Select the appropriate options as follows:

                New Media Set General tab

                Item                    Description

                Name                    Type a name for the new media set.

                Creation date           Date and time when the media set was created. Backup Exec
                                        sets the date and time automatically. You cannot change them.




                                                                                                             Management
                                                                                                               Media




Chapter 5, Managing Media                                                                     233
Media Sets


                 New Media Set General tab (continued)

                 Item                     Description

                 Media set periods

                 Overwrite protection     Enter the length of time in hours, days, weeks, or years to
                 period                   retain the data on the media before the media can be
                                          overwritten (unless the media is erased, formatted, labeled,
                                          moved to Scratch Media, or if the Media Overwrite Protection
                                          Level is set to None).
                                          The overwrite protection period begins when the backup job is
                                          completed. If there is an append period, the overwrite
                                          protection period begins again each time an append job
                                          completes. Because the overwrite protection period does not
                                          begin until the job completes, the amount of time that the job
                                          takes to complete affects the amount of time until the media
                                          can be overwritten. You may shorten the overwrite protection
                                          period to take into account the amount of time a job may run.
                                          For example, setting the overwrite protection period for seven
                                          days and the append period for four days ensures that data
                                          will not be overwritten for at least seven days, and that data
                                          can be appended to the media for the next four days. The last
                                          data appended to this media is retained for at least seven days.
                                          Because of the method Backup Exec uses to compute time, the
                                          unit of time that you enter may be converted. For example, if
                                          you enter 14 days, the next time you view this property, it may
                                          be displayed as two weeks.
                                          The default is Infinite - Don’t Allow Overwrite, which
                                          protects the media from being overwritten for 1,000 years,
                                          unless the media is erased, formatted, labeled, moved to
                                          Scratch Media, or if the media overwrite protection level is set
                                          to None.

                 Append period            Enter the length of time in hours, days, or weeks, that data can
                                          be added to media. Because of the method Backup Exec uses
                                          to compute time, the unit of time that you enter may be
                                          converted. For example, if you enter 14 days, the next time you
                                          view this property, it may be displayed as two weeks.
                                          The append period starts when the first backup job is written
                                          to this media.
                                          The default is Infinite - Allow Append, which allows data to
                                          be appended until the media capacity is reached.

              4. Click OK.



        234                                                                               Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                                Media Sets


        Deleting a Media Set
            Use Delete to remove a media set from the Media Sets category. If you delete a media set
            to which scheduled jobs are targeted, you are prompted to retarget the jobs to another
            media set.
            You cannot delete a media set that contains media. You must move the media to another
            media set first.

            Caution Make sure that the media set to which you move the media has the appropriate
                    overwrite protection and append periods.


        ▼   To delete a media set:

            1. On the navigation bar, click Media.

            2. In the Media selection pane, under Media Sets, select the media set that you want to
               delete.

            3. Under General Tasks on the task pane, click Delete.

            4. Click Yes to delete the media set, or if you selected multiple media sets to delete, click
               Yes to All to delete all the selected media sets without further prompting.

            5. If there are scheduled jobs allocated to the deleted media set, you are prompted to
               redirect the jobs to another media set.




                                                                                                             Management
                Retarget Jobs dialog box




                                                                                                               Media
                The media set you deleted displays.

            6. In the Media Set selection box, click the Down arrow to see more options, and then
               select the new media set to which you want to redirect the scheduled jobs.

            7. Click Yes to redirect the displayed job to the selected media set, or if there are multiple
               scheduled jobs, click Yes to All to redirect all scheduled jobs to this media set without
               further prompting.
                The scheduled jobs are redirected.


Chapter 5, Managing Media                                                                     235
Media Sets


        Renaming a Media Set
              When you rename a media set, properties for any jobs that belong to that media set will
              still display the previous media set name. To update the media set name for these jobs,
              select the job from the Job Setup view and then under General Tasks on the task pane,
              click Properties. The media set name is updated to the new name.

        ▼     To rename a media set:

              1. On the navigation bar, click Media.

              2. In the Media selection pane, under Media Sets, select the media set you want to
                 rename.

              3. Under General Tasks on the task pane, click Rename.

              4. In the Name field, type the new name you want to assign to this media set.

              5. Click OK.


        Editing and Viewing Media Set Properties
              You can change the overwrite protection and append periods for a media set at any time.

        ▼     To edit media set properties:

              1. On the navigation bar, click Media.

              2. In the Media selection pane, under Media Sets, select a media set.

              3. Under General Tasks on the task pane, click Properties.

              4. Select the appropriate options as follows:

                  Media Set properties

                  Item                    Description

                  Name                    Media set name.

                  Creation Date           Date when the media set was created.




        236                                                                           Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                                    Media Sets


                Media Set properties (continued)

                Item                      Description

                Media Set Periods

                Overwrite protection      Enter the length of time, in hours, days, weeks, or years to
                period                    retain the data on the media before the media can be
                                          overwritten (unless the media is erased, formatted, labeled,
                                          moved to Scratch Media, or if the Media Overwrite Protection
                                          Level is set to None).
                                          The overwrite protection period is measured from the last time
                                          data was appended to the media.
                                          For example, setting the Overwrite protection period for seven
                                          days and the Append period for four days ensures that data
                                          will not be overwritten for at least seven days, and that data
                                          can be appended to the media for the next four days. The last
                                          data appended to this media is retained for seven days.
                                          Because of the method Backup Exec uses to compute time, the
                                          unit of time that you enter may be converted. For example, if
                                          you enter 14 days, the next time you view this property, it may
                                          be displayed as two weeks.
                                          The default is Infinite - Don’t Allow Overwrite, which
                                          protects the media from being overwritten for 1,000 years,
                                          unless the media is erased, formatted, labeled, moved to
                                          Scratch Media, or if the Media Overwrite Protection Level is
                                          set to None.




                                                                                                                 Management
                Append period             Enter the length of time, in hours, days, or weeks, that data




                                                                                                                   Media
                                          may be added to the media. Because of the method Backup
                                          Exec uses to compute time, the unit of time that you enter may
                                          be converted. For example, if you enter 14 days, the next time
                                          you view this property, it may be displayed as two weeks.
                                          The append period starts when the first backup job is written
                                          to this media.
                                          The default is Infinite - Allow Append which allows data to
                                          be appended until the media capacity is reached.

            5. Click OK.




Chapter 5, Managing Media                                                                         237
Media Sets




        238   Administrator’s Guide
Backing Up Data                                                                                  6
     Backups are crucial for data protection, and Backup Exec offers you many choices for
     creating backup jobs to protect your data, including:
     ◆   Using the Backup Wizard. Use this wizard to submit a backup job if you are a new or
         inexperienced Backup Exec user. The wizard guides you through the process of
         creating a backup job using most of the default options. After you become more
         experienced with Backup Exec, you will probably create backups by configuring
         backup job properties.
     ◆   Configuring backup job properties. Experienced Backup Exec users can create
         customized backup jobs by selecting resources to protect and setting backup options
         on the backup job properties pages accessed by either clicking the Backup button or
         selecting New Job from the Job Setup task pane. Using the backup job properties
         pages allows you to set some options, such as job priority and database options, that
         cannot be set per job using the Backup Wizard.
     ◆   Creating a template. Set all the destination, settings, and schedule options you want to
         use and save them as a template. You can quickly create a job using a template by
         combining the template with a selection list. You can use templates for multiple jobs,
         and, if changes are needed to these jobs’ settings, you can make changes to the
         template rather than editing the individual jobs.
     ◆   Creating a selection list. Select the data you want to back up and save the selections as a
         selection list. You can then choose the selection list when creating a backup job. You
         can use selection lists for multiple jobs. You can also choose a selection list, and then
         create a job from a template, combining the template with the chosen selection list.




                                                                                                       Backing Up
     ◆   Using Backup Exec’s Windows Explorer interface. Select and back up files and folders
         from Windows Explorer without having to launch the Backup Exec Administration
                                                                                                          Data
         Console.
     ◆   Running a one-button backup job. Select one-button backup from the Backup Exec
         Assistant or the Information Desk to quickly back up the local media server.
         One-button backups use the default backup settings.




                                                                                        239
      Backup Exec allows you to set default options for backup jobs, but also gives you the
      flexibility to override these options for specific jobs. You can direct all backup jobs to a
      specified network segment, isolating the backup data so that other connected networks
      are not affected when backup operations are performed, or you can specify a LAN for a
      single job.
      Backup Exec also provides the option of setting up backup jobs that take place on a
      routine basis (scheduled jobs), or set up one-time backup jobs.
      In addition to creating backup jobs to protect data, you can create:
      ◆   A test run of a scheduled backup job to determine whether or not it is likely to
          complete successfully.
      ◆   A job that duplicates backup sets either from previously backed up data or data
          scheduled to be backed up. If the backup sets are to be duplicated from a scheduled
          job, the duplicate backup data job runs automatically after the backup job completes.
      ◆   Verify jobs to test the integrity of the media.
      ◆   Archive jobs to preserve storage space.
      ◆   Resource discovery jobs to find new resources that may need to be backed up on a
          regular basis.
      Before you begin backing up data, you should develop a backup strategy that includes the
      method, frequency, and media rotation methods that are appropriate for your
      organization. You may have different strategies for different areas of the organization.
      You may also want to configure device and media management before creating backup
      jobs. You can set up Backup Exec to use physical devices, such as stand-alone drives, or
      virtual devices, such as backup-to-disk folders. Or, you can have Backup Exec use logical
      groupings of devices, such as drive pools. Specifically, you might want to perform the
      following tasks to help you manage storage hardware and media most effectively:
      ◆   Set up drive pools for systems with more than one storage device. For more
          information, see “Creating Drive Pools” on page 103.
      ◆   Create media sets. For more information, see “Creating Media Sets” on page 233.

      Caution To protect remote resources, you must install the Backup Exec Remote Agent
              for Windows Servers on the remote computer. The Remote Agent is a system
              service that runs on Windows servers and workstations and provides efficient
              backup processing by locally performing tasks that, in typical backup
              technologies, require extensive network interaction.




240                                                                             Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                 Creating a Backup Job


            See also:
                “Creating a Backup Job” on page 241
                “Setting Default Backup Options” on page 320
                “About Backup Strategies” on page 352
                “VERITAS Backup Exec - Remote Agent” on page 843



Creating a Backup Job
            Backing up data from a server or workstation involves the creation of a backup job in
            which you specify the:
            ◆   Source
            ◆   Destination
            ◆   Settings
            ◆   Frequency
            Unless you specify otherwise, the backup job will use the defaults set through the Tools
            menu by selecting Options.
            You can use the Backup Wizard to have Backup Exec guide you through the creation of a
            backup job, but after you become familiar with Backup Exec, you will probably choose to
            set your options by configuring backup job properties.
            See also:
                “Using the Backup Wizard” on page 242
                “Creating a Manual Backup Job by Configuring Job Properties” on page 242
                “Setting Default Backup Options” on page 320
                “Specifying Backup Networks” on page 332




                                                                                                         Backing Up
                                                                                                            Data




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                241
Creating a Backup Job


        Using the Backup Wizard
              If you are new to Backup Exec or are uncertain about how to set up a backup job, you can
              use the Backup Wizard. The wizard will guide you through the process of creating a
              backup job. While the wizard will prompt you to select some options, most of the backup
              job settings will be based on the defaults set through the Tools menu by selecting
              Options.

        ▼     To launch the Backup Wizard:

              1. On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.

              2. Under Backup Tasks in the task pane, select New job using wizard.

              3. Follow the on-screen prompts.
              You can monitor the backup job through the Job Monitor.
              See also:
                  “Creating a Manual Backup Job by Configuring Job Properties” on page 242
                  “Setting Default Backup Options” on page 320
                  “Monitoring Jobs” on page 381


        Creating a Manual Backup Job by Configuring Job Properties
        ▼     To create a backup job for a server or workstation:

              1. On the navigation bar, click Backup.

              2. From the backup selections pane, select the data you want to back up (see “Selecting
                 Data to Back Up” on page 265) or choose an existing selection list from the Selection
                 list name field (see “Using Selection Lists” on page 274). For more information about
                 the Selections options, see “Selections Options for Backup Jobs” on page 245.




        242                                                                         Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                    Creating a Backup Job


            3. On the Properties pane, under Destination, click Device and Media, and complete
               the options as described in “Device and Media Options for Backup Jobs and
               Templates” on page 247.

            4. On the Properties pane, under Settings, click General and complete the options as
               described in “General Options for Backup Jobs” on page 252.
                You can select additional configuration options for your backup job if, before selecting
                to run or submit the job, you select additional options on the Backup Job Properties
                dialog box’s Properties pane:
                -    If you want to set advanced options for the backup job, on the Properties pane,
                     under Settings, click Advanced. Then, complete the options as described in
                     “Advanced Options for Backup Jobs” on page 257.
                -    If you want to set commands to run before or after a job, on the Properties pane,
                     under Settings, click Pre/Post Commands and complete the options as described
                     in “Pre/Post Commands for Backup or Restore Jobs” on page 261.
                -    If you are using the Advanced Open File Option, on the Properties pane, under
                     Settings, select Advanced Open File and complete the options as described in
                     “Selecting the Advanced Open File Option for a Single Backup Job” on page 987.
                -    If you are backing up other platform types or database agents, such as NetWare,
                     Exchange, or SQL, select the platform type or database agent from the Properties
                     pane. Refer to the chapter or appendix for that item for instructions on completing
                     the options.
                -    If you want to change the backup network for this job, on the Properties pane,
                     under Settings, click Network, and then set up the backup network for this job
                     (see “Changing the Backup Network for a Job” on page 337).
                -    If you want Backup Exec to notify someone when the backup job completes, on
                     the Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification (see “Selecting Recipients
                     for Job Notification” on page 509).

            5. If you want to run the job now, click Run Now. Otherwise, on the Properties pane,
               under Frequency, click Schedule to set the scheduling options you want to use (see




                                                                                                            Backing Up
               “Scheduling Jobs” on page 374), and then click Submit.

            Note If you are using Backup Exec Web Administration Console (BEWAC), click Next to                Data
                 run the job or set the scheduling options.




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                   243
Creating a Backup Job


              6. If the backup job summary appears, review it, and then click OK to run the job. If you
                 want to turn off the job summary for future backup jobs, from the Tools menu, select
                 Options, and then clear Display the job summary dialog before creating a backup
                 job (see “Backup Exec Defaults” on page 90).

              Note If you are using BEWAC, click Finish to run the job. If you are not satisfied with the
                   settings you selected, click Back. However, you must reset all of the settings.
                   BEWAC does not save the settings when you click Back.


              Note If a drive loses power during a backup operation, you should restart the backup job
                   using a different tape. You can restore the data written to the tape up to the point of
                   the power loss, but you should not reuse the tape for subsequent backup
                   operations.

              See also:
                  “Using the Backup Wizard” on page 242
                  “Selecting Data to Back Up” on page 265
                  “Setting Default Backup Options” on page 320
                  “Creating a New Backup Template” on page 283
                  “Creating a New Backup Job from a Template” on page 290




        244                                                                            Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                            Creating a Backup Job


            Selections Options for Backup Jobs
            When the Backup Job Properties dialog box appears, Selections is chosen by default on
            the Properties pane. Through the Selections options, you choose the data you want to
            include in the backup job. You can also choose how the data will appear in this dialog box.

            Selections options for a backup job




            Options on this dialog box include:

            Selections options for backup job

            Item                       Description

            Selection list name        If you are creating a job using an existing selection list, select the




                                                                                                                     Backing Up
                                       selection list you want to use (see “Using Selection Lists” on page 274).

                                                                                                                        Data
                                       Otherwise, use the default Selection list name, which creates a new
                                       selection list using this name.

            Selection list             Enter a description for the selection list.
            description

            Load Selections from       Click this button if you want to use a previously created selection list or
            Existing List              merge existing selection lists (see “Using Selection Lists” on page 274).




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                            245
Creating a Backup Job

              Selections options for backup job (continued)

              Item                       Description

              View Format

              Graphical                  Select this option to view selections in a directory tree view.

              Show file details          Select this option to display details about the files available for
                                         selecting.

              Text                       Select this option to view selections as a list of files and directories.

              Advanced                   Click this button if you want to use the Advanced File Selection for
                                         selecting files for backing up (see “Including or Excluding Files for
                                         Backup Using Advanced File Selection” on page 269).

              Include subdirectories     Select this option if you want to select the contents of all the subfolders
                                         when a directory is selected.

              See also:
                     “Selecting Data to Back Up” on page 265
                     “Changing the Order for Processing Backup Selections” on page 272
                     “Changing Logon Accounts for Resources” on page 273
                     “Including or Excluding Files for Backup Using Advanced File Selection” on page 269
                     “Creating Selection Lists” on page 274
                     “Setting Up User-defined Selections” on page 282




        246                                                                                      Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                 Creating a Backup Job


            Device and Media Options for Backup Jobs and Templates
            You select the storage device and media set on which the backup job will run by clicking
            Device and Media on the Backup Job Properties box and completing the options you
            want.

            Device and Media options for backup job




                                                                                                         Backing Up
                                                                                                            Data




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                247
Creating a Backup Job


              Options on this dialog box include:

              Device and Media options for backup job

              Item                        Description

              Device                      Select a drive pool, stand-alone drive, robotic library drive, or
                                          backup folder to be used for processing the backup.
                                          If you select a backup folder, be sure it is not on the disk you are
                                          backing up. For example, if you are backing up your local C:\ drive,
                                          select a backup folder that is not on your local C:\ drive. Backup jobs
                                          submitted to a backup folder cannot span disks unless the folder is a
                                          removable backup-to-disk folder (see “Using Backup-to-Disk
                                          Folders and Files” on page 149). If the size of a backup job exceeds
                                          the amount of free space on the disk where the backup folder is
                                          located, the job fails. Before you back up data to a disk, verify that
                                          there is sufficient free space on the destination disk. To maximize the
                                          amount of data that you can store on a disk, use the software
                                          compression option.
                                          If a backup job fails due to insufficient disk space, the backup folder
                                          goes offline. To complete the backup job, you must create more free
                                          space on the disk, and then pause and resume the folder. You can
                                          create more disk space by:
                                              Moving the backup files to another disk or backing up the files to
                                              a tape.
                                              Changing the location of the backup folder.
                                              Erasing the backup files.
                                              Overwriting the existing backup files.
                                          If you are unable to create more free space and cannot continue the
                                          backup job, you can restore the data that was backed up prior to the
                                          failure.
                                          Note Backup files are subject to the same overwrite and append
                                               options as other media.
                                          Make sure that appropriate media (overwritable or appendable) is in
                                          the stand-alone drive or drive pool you select.
                                          If the media in the drive is not overwritable or appendable, a
                                          message is displayed requesting that you insert overwritable media.




        248                                                                                  Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                         Creating a Backup Job

            Device and Media options for backup job (continued)

            Item                         Description

            Media set                    Select the media set for the backup (see “Editing and Viewing Media
                                         Set Properties” on page 236). If you select Overwrite, the media in
                                         the drive is overwritten if the media is scratch, or if its overwrite
                                         protection period has expired. If allocated or imported media are in
                                         the drive, they may also be overwritten depending on the Media
                                         Overwrite Protection Level that is set. For more information, see
                                         “Setting Default Media Options” on page 209.
                                         If you selected one of the append options, the backup will be added
                                         to an appendable media (if one exists).

            Family name                  Specify a name for the new or overwritable media. This name is used
                                         to identify the media in the Restore Selections dialog boxes.
                                         The family name defaults to “Media created date time”. To customize
                                         the family name, you can use any combination of the following
                                         variables in this field:
                                         %s - includes the media server name
                                         %j - includes the job name
                                         %d - includes the date the media was created
                                         %t - includes the time the media was created




                                                                                                                 Backing Up
                                                                                                                    Data




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                        249
Creating a Backup Job


              Device and Media options for backup job (continued)

              Item                         Description

              When this job begins

              Overwrite media              Select this option to place this backup on an overwritable media.
                                           Make sure that appropriate media is in the stand-alone drive or drive
                                           pool you select in the Device field in this dialog box.
                                           The media in the drive is overwritten if the media is scratch or
                                           recyclable (its overwrite protection period has expired). If allocated
                                           or imported media are in the drive, they may also be overwritten
                                           depending on the Media Overwrite Protection Level that is set. For
                                           more information, see “Setting Default Media Options” on page 209.
                                           Depending on your configuration, overwritable media is selected
                                           from scratch media or recyclable media. For more information, see
                                           “Media Overwrite Options” on page 198.
                                           If the media in the drive is not overwritable, an alert appears
                                           requesting that you insert overwritable media.

              Append to media,           Select this option to append this backup to the media set listed in the
              overwrite if no appendable Media Set field in this dialog box. The backup set is appended if an
              media is available         appendable media is available in the selected media set; if not, an
                                         overwritable media is used and added to the media set.
                                           Note If an append job fills a media, the job continues on another
                                                piece of overwritable media.
                                           If the media in the drive is not overwritable, an alert appears
                                           requesting that you insert overwritable 0media.

              Append to media,             Select this option to append this backup to the media set listed in the
              terminate job if no          Media Set field in this dialog box. The backup set is appended if an
              appendable media is          appendable media is available in the selected media set; if not, the
              available                    job is terminated.

              Eject media after job        Select this option to have Backup Exec automatically eject the media
              completes                    in the drive when the operation completes.

              Write checksums to media Select this option if checksums are to be calculated for each data
                                       stream written to tape, and then written in a separate stream
                                       immediately following the data stream. If this option is not selected,
                                       backup performance may be improved, but there will be no way to
                                       verify the integrity of the data on the tape.




        250                                                                                  Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                         Creating a Backup Job


            Device and Media options for backup job (continued)

            Item                         Description

            Retension media before       Select this option to have Backup Exec run the tape in the drive from
            backup                       beginning to end at a fast speed, which helps the tape wind evenly
                                         and run more smoothly past the tape drive heads. Retensioning is
                                         primarily for Mini Cartridge and quarter-inch cartridges and is not
                                         supported on most other types of tape drives.

            Media Protection

            Password protect media       Select this option if you are overwriting the media and you want to
                                         protect it. When the Enter Password dialog box appears, enter a
                                         media password. When a password-protected media is taken to
                                         another location, such as another media server, the password is
                                         required to catalog the tape.
                                         Note Password protected media can be erased without requiring the
                                              password.

            Change password              Click this button to change the password for the media.




                                                                                                                 Backing Up
                                                                                                                    Data




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                         251
Creating a Backup Job


              General Options for Backup Jobs
              General options for backup jobs, including the name of the job and the backup method to
              be used, can be set through the Backup Job Properties dialog box. To set these options, on
              the Properties pane, under Settings, click General.

              General settings options for backup job




        252                                                                          Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                          Creating a Backup Job


            Options on this dialog box include:

            General settings options

            Item                       Description

            Job name                   Enter the name for this backup job, or accept the default name that
                                       appears. The job name must be unique.

            Job priority               Select the priority level for this job. If another job is scheduled to run
                                       at the same time as this job, the priority you set determines which job
                                       runs first. Your choices are:
                                          Highest
                                          High
                                          Medium
                                          Low
                                          Lowest

            Backup set description     Type a description of the information you are backing up.




                                                                                                                    Backing Up
                                                                                                                       Data




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                           253
Creating a Backup Job


              General settings options (continued)

              Item                         Description

              Backup method for files      Select a backup method. Your choices are:
                                               FULL - Back Up Files - Reset Archive Bit. Includes all of the
                                               selected data on a volume and resets the archive bit to indicate
                                               that the files have been backed up.
                                               COPY - Back Up Files. Includes all selected data, and does not
                                               affect any media rotation scheme because the archive bit is not
                                               reset.
                                               DIFFERENTIAL - Changed Files. Includes all files that have
                                               changed (based on the archive bit) since the last full backup, and
                                               does not affect any media rotation scheme because the archive bit
                                               is not reset.
                                               INCREMENTAL - Changed Files - Reset Archive Bit. Includes
                                               only the files that have changed (based on the archive bit) since
                                               the last full or incremental backup and resets the archive bit to
                                               indicate that the files have been backed up.
                                               FULL - Back Up Files - Allow incrementals and differentials
                                               using modified time. Includes all of the selected data on a
                                               volume and allows the use of incrementals and differentials
                                               using the modified date and time stamp.
                                               DIFFERENTIAL - Using modified time. Includes all files since
                                               the last full backup, using the files’ last modified date and time
                                               stamp. Make sure that the same script or selection list is used for
                                               the differential backup that was used for the full backup.
                                               INCREMENTAL - Using modified time. Includes all files that
                                               have changed since the last full or incremental backup, using the
                                               files’ last modified date and time stamp. Make sure that the same
                                               script or selection list is used for the incremental backup that was
                                               used for the full backup.
                                               DAILY - Files that Changed Today. Backs up all files that were
                                               created or modified today.
                                               WORKING SET - All files last accessed in (x) days. Includes all
                                               files that were created or modified since the last full or
                                               incremental backup. If you select this backup method, you can
                                               then indicate in the Files accessed in x days field that you want
                                               to include data that has been accessed in a specific number of
                                               days.




        254                                                                                   Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                           Creating a Backup Job


            General settings options (continued)

            Item                         Description

            Backup method for files          ARCHIVE - Delete files after successful copy backup. Backs up
            (continued)                      the selected data, verifies the media, and then deletes the data
                                             from the volume. For data to be deleted, rights to delete a file
                                             must be granted; otherwise data will be backed up, but not
                                             deleted.
                                         Note Backup Exec does not delete data from Backup Exec Agent
                                              workstations when using the archive feature.
                                             For more information, see “Understanding Backup Methods and
                                             Their Advantages” on page 355.

            Files accessed in x days     If you selected the working set backup method in the Backup
                                         method for files field, use this field to specify the number of days for
                                         which to include accessed files.
                                         Note VERITAS recommends that you specify at least 30 days in
                                              order to include the data needed to make your system
                                              operational if you have to restore a working set backup.

            Use the Windows Change Select this option if you want to use Windows’ NTFS Change
            Journal if available   Journal to determine which files have been modified since the last
                                   full backup. This option can only be used with NTFS volumes and
                                   only when the backup method selected is FULL - Back Up Files -
                                   Allows incrementals and differentials using modified time,
                                   DIFFERENTIAL - Using modified time or INCREMENTAL - Using
                                   modified time.

            Preserve tree on archive     Select this option to retain the directory structure on the hard drive of
                                         the files backed up in an archive job. This option is only available
                                         when Archive is selected as the backup method.

            Verify after backup          Select this option to have Backup Exec automatically perform a
            completes                    verify operation to make sure the media can be read once the backup
                                         has been completed. Verifying all backups is recommended.




                                                                                                                     Backing Up
                                                                                                                        Data




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                            255
Creating a Backup Job


              General settings options (continued)

              Item                         Description

              Compression type             Select one of the following:
                                               None. Select this option to copy the data to the media in its
                                               original form (uncompressed). Using some form of data
                                               compression can help expedite backups and preserve storage
                                               media space.
                                               Hardware data compression should not be used in environments
                                               where devices that support hardware compression are used
                                               interchangeably with devices that do not have that functionality.
                                               For example, if a drive that does not support hardware
                                               compression is added to a cascaded drive pool that includes
                                               drives supporting the feature, hardware compression is
                                               automatically disabled. You can manually re-enable hardware
                                               compression on the drives that support it, but this results in
                                               media inconsistency. If the drive that supports hardware
                                               compression fails, the compressed media cannot be restored with
                                               the non-compression drive.
                                               Software. Select this option to use STAC™ software data
                                               compression, which compresses the data before it is sent to the
                                               storage device.
                                               Hardware [if available, otherwise none]. Select this option to
                                               use hardware data compression (if the storage device supports
                                               it). If the drive does not feature data compression the data is
                                               backed up uncompressed.
                                               Hardware [if available, otherwise software]. Select this option to
                                               use hardware data compression (if the storage device supports
                                               it). If the drive does not feature hardware data compression,
                                               STAC software compression is used.

              See also:
                  “Creating a Manual Backup Job by Configuring Job Properties” on page 242




        256                                                                                  Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                 Creating a Backup Job


            Advanced Options for Backup Jobs
            To set Advanced options, such as open file options, for backup jobs or backup job
            templates, on the Properties pane, under Settings, click Advanced.

            Advanced options for backup job




                                                                                                         Backing Up
                                                                                                            Data




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                257
Creating a Backup Job


              Advanced options for backup jobs include:

              Advanced options for backup job

              Item                        Description

              Enable single instance      This option is only available if single instance store is being used.
              backup for NTFS             This option ensures that only one instance of a file for NTFS volumes
                                          will be backed up regardless of the number of single instance store
                                          (SIS) links that point to it.

                                          Caution If the backup job does not run to completion, the
                                                  file data may not be included in the backup set.
                                                  Rerun the backup until it is successfully completed.

                                                     If the incremental backup method was used,
                                                     running the job again will not back up the same
                                                     files. You must run a full or copy backup to ensure
                                                     that all files are backed up completely. If the
                                                     'incremental - using modified time' backup method
                                                     was used, running the same backup job to
                                                     completion will back up the files correctly.

              Back up files and           Select this check box to back up the information for the junction
              directories by following    points and the files and directories to which they are linked. If this
              junction points             check box is not selected, then only the information for the junction
                                          points is backed up; the files and directories to which they are linked
                                          are not backed up.
                                          Note Since Mounted Drives that do not have a drive letter assigned
                                               to them cannot be selected, the files and directories to which
                                               they are linked are backed up regardless of whether this option
                                               is selected.

                                                If this option is selected and the actual files and directories to
                                                which the junction points are linked are also included in the
                                                backup selections, then the files and directories are backed up
                                                twice; once during the full file and directory backup, and again
                                                via the junction point.
                                          WARNING: If a junction point is linked to a location that
                                          encompasses it, then recursion (a situation where data is backed up
                                          repeatedly) will occur, resulting in an error and job failure. For
                                          example, if c:\junctionpoint is linked to c:\, recursion will occur
                                          when attempting to back up c:\junctionpoint, and the backup job
                                          will fail.




        258                                                                                  Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                         Creating a Backup Job


            Advanced options for backup job (continued)

            Item                        Description

            Back up data in Remote      Select this check box to back up data that has been migrated from
            Storage                     primary storage to secondary storage. The data is not recalled to its
                                        original location; it is backed up directly to the backup media.
                                        If this option is selected, you should not run a backup of your entire
                                        system because Backup Exec has to load the data that has been
                                        migrated to secondary storage and additional time is required for
                                        any set that includes migrated data.
                                        If this check box is cleared, only the placeholder that stores the
                                        location of the data on secondary storage will be backed up, not the
                                        data itself.
                                        Note This option should not be selected if the device used for
                                             secondary storage and backups contains only one drive
                                             because Remote Storage and Backup Exec will compete for use
                                             of the drive.

            Set Remote Agent priority This option allows you to select the number of CPU cycles the media
                                      server will use to maintain optimal server performance while
                                      Remote Agent backups are running. The higher the priority, the more
                                      the protected server’s CPU processing power is used during backup
                                      operations.
                                        Note Allocating fewer CPU cycles to a backup job may result in
                                             slower backup performance.
                                        This field contains the following options:
                                            Normal Priority. Select this option to allocate the default number
                                            of CPU cycles the protected server will use during a Remote
                                            Agent backup.
                                            Below Normal Priority. Select this option to allocate fewer
                                            server CPU cycles to the backup job.
                                            Lowest Priority. Select this option to allocate the fewest number
                                            of CPU cycles to the backup job.




                                                                                                                 Backing Up
                                                                                                                    Data




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                         259
Creating a Backup Job


              Advanced options for backup job (continued)

              Item                          Description

              Open file backup when Advanced Open File Option is not used

              Never                         Select this option to have Backup Exec skip open files if they are
                                            encountered during the backup operation. A listing of skipped files
                                            appears in the job log for the backup.

              If closed within x seconds Select this option to have Backup Exec wait the specified time
                                         interval for files to close before skipping the open file and continuing
                                         the backup operation.
                                            If the file does not close during the specified interval, it is skipped. A
                                            listing of skipped files appears in the job log for the backup.
                                            Note If multiple files are open, Backup Exec waits the specified time
                                                 interval for each file; depending on the number of open files,
                                                 this may significantly increase the backup time.

              With a lock                   Select this option to have Backup Exec attempt to open files that are
                                            in use. If Backup Exec is able to open a file, the file is locked while it
                                            is being backed up to prevent other processes from writing to it.
                                            Backing up open files is not as effective as closing applications and
                                            allowing the files to be backed up in a consistent state.

              Without a lock                Select this option to have Backup Exec attempt to open files that are
                                            in use. If Backup Exec is able to open the file, the file is NOT locked
                                            while it is being backed up. This allows other applications to write
                                            data to the file during the backup operation.
                                            WARNING: This option allows files that contain inconsistent data
                                            and possibly corrupt data to be backed up.


              Note To back up the Removable Storage database in the \Ntmsdata subdirectory, the
                   WMI repository in the wbem\Repository subdirectory, and the Terminal Services
                   database in the default \LServer subdirectory, select the <Systemroot>\System32
                   directory. Files that you place in the Systemroot\System32\Ntmsdata subdirectory,
                   the \wbem\Repository subdirectory, or the default \LServer subdirectory may not
                   be backed up; only system files are included in the backup. It is recommended that
                   you do not place user files in the Systemroot\System32 directory or subdirectories.

              See also:
                  “Creating a Manual Backup Job by Configuring Job Properties” on page 242
                  “Setting Advanced Open File Option as the Default Setting for All Backup Jobs” on
                  page 989


        260                                                                                      Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                      Creating a Backup Job


            Pre/Post Commands for Backup or Restore Jobs
            To set commands to run before or after a job, on the Properties pane of the Backup Job
            Properties dialog box, the Restore Job Properties dialog box, or the New Backup Job
            Template dialog box, under Settings, click Pre/Post Commands.
            You can run commands before or after a backup or restore job, and set conditions for
            these commands:
            ◆   Run the backup or restore job only if the pre-job command is successful
            ◆   Run the post-job command only if the pre-job command is successful
            ◆   Run the post-job command even if the backup or restore job fails
            ◆   Allow Backup Exec to check the return codes (or exit codes) of the pre- and post-job
                commands to determine if the commands completed successfully. An exit code of
                zero returned to the operating system by the pre- or post-job command is interpreted
                by Backup Exec to mean the command completed successfully. A non-zero exit code is
                interpreted by Backup Exec to mean the command ended with an error.
            If it is critical that the job does not run if the pre-job command fails, then configure Backup
            Exec to check the return codes of the pre- and post-job commands to determine if the
            pre-job command failed or completed successfully.
            For example, if a pre-job command that shuts down a database before a backup is run
            fails, the database could be corrupted when the backup is run. In this situation, it is critical
            that the backup job does not run if the pre-job command fails.
            Additionally, if Backup Exec is configured to check the return codes of the pre- and
            post-job commands, and the post-job command returns a non-zero code, the job log
            reports that the post-job command failed. If you also selected to run the job only if the
            pre-job command is successful, and both the pre-job command and the job ran
            successfully, Backup Exec will mark the job as failed if the post-job command fails.
            For example, if the pre-job command runs successfully and shuts down the database and
            the backup job also runs successfully, but the post-job command cannot restart the
            database, Backup Exec marks the job and the post-job command as failed.
            If you select the option On each server backed up, the pre- and post-commands are run




                                                                                                               Backing Up
            and completed for each server before processing begins on the next selected server.

                                                                                                                  Data




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                      261
Creating a Backup Job

              Pre-job and post-job command options




              Options for this dialog box include:

              Pre- and post-job command options

              Item                       Description

              Pre-job and post-job commands

              Pre-job command            Specify a command to be run on the specified server before the
                                         backup or restore job is run. Use local paths, and make sure the paths
                                         exist on each server and are correct.
                                         Note Commands that require user interaction, such as prompts, are
                                              not supported.

              Post-job command           Specify a command to be run on the specified server after the backup
                                         or restore job has run. Use local paths, and make sure the paths exist
                                         on each server and are correct.
                                         Note Commands that require user interaction, such as prompts, are
                                              not supported.




        262                                                                                Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                            Creating a Backup Job


            Pre- and post-job command options (continued)

            Item                         Description

            Run job only if pre-job      Select this option to run the backup or restore job only if the pre-job
            command is successful        command is successful. If the pre-job command fails, the job does not
                                         run, and is marked as failed.
                                         If it is critical that the job does not run if the pre-job command fails,
                                         then select Allow pre- and post-job commands to be successful
                                         only if completed with a return code of zero. If a non-zero code is
                                         returned, it is interpreted by Backup Exec to mean that the pre-job
                                         command did not run successfully. The job is not run and the job
                                         status is marked as Failed.

            Run post-job command       Select this option to run the post-job command only if the pre-job
            only if pre-job command is command is successful.
            successful                 If it is critical that the post-job command does not run if the pre-job
                                       command fails, then select Allow pre- and post job commands to be
                                       successful only if completed with a return code of zero. If a
                                       non-zero code is returned for the pre-job command, it is interpreted
                                       by Backup Exec to mean that the pre-job command did not run
                                       successfully. The post-job command does not run.
                                         If you also select Run job only if pre-job command is successful,
                                         and both the pre-job command and the job are successful, but the
                                         post-job command returns a non-zero code, the job log reports both
                                         the job and the post-job command as failed.

            Run post-job command         Select this option if it is critical to run the post-job command
            even if job fails            regardless of whether the job is successful or not.
                                         If you also select Allow pre- and post job commands to be
                                         successful only if completed with a return code of zero and the
                                         post-job command returns a non-zero code, the job log reports the
                                         post-job command as failed.




                                                                                                                     Backing Up
                                                                                                                        Data




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                            263
Creating a Backup Job


              Pre- and post-job command options (continued)

              Item                        Description

              Allow pre- and post-job     Select this option to allow Backup Exec to check the return codes of
              commands to be              the pre- and post-job commands to determine if they completed
              successful only if          successfully.
              completed with a return     An exit code of zero returned to the operating system by the pre- or
              code of zero                post-job command is interpreted by Backup Exec to mean that the
                                          command completed successfully. A non-zero exit code is
                                          interpreted by Backup Exec to mean the command ended with an
                                          error.
                                          After checking the return codes, Backup Exec continues processing
                                          according to selections you made for running the pre- and post-job
                                          commands.
                                          If this option is not selected, the success of the pre- and post-job
                                          commands is not determined based on the return code.

              Cancel command if not       Select the number of minutes Backup Exec should wait before
              completed within x          canceling a pre-job or post-job command that did not complete. The
              minutes                     default time-out is 30 minutes.

              Run these commands

              On this media server        Select this option to run the pre- and post-job commands on this
                                          media server only.

              On each server backed up Select this option to run the pre- and post-job commands one time on
                                       each server backed up.
                                          The pre- and post-job command selections apply to each server
                                          independently. If you select this option, the pre- and
                                          post-commands are run and completed for each server before
                                          processing begins on the next selected server.

              See also:
                  “Creating a Manual Backup Job by Configuring Job Properties” on page 242
                  “Setting Default Backup Options” on page 320
                  “Setting Default Pre/Post Commands” on page 328




        264                                                                                   Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                  Selecting Data to Back Up


Selecting Data to Back Up
            When you are setting up a backup job, the first thing you do is select the data you want to
            back up. You make your selections from the backup selections pane on the Backup Job
            Properties dialog box.

            Backup Data Selection
                Server name

                       Local drives

                Backup Exec database
             System State
               Network shares


              Workstation agents
             User-defined selections

            The Local Selections include:
            ◆     Local Drives. Includes hard drives as well as CD-ROM drives physically residing on
                  the media server.
            ◆     Backup Exec database. Includes job, schedule, job history, notification, alerts, device,
                  media, and catalog indexes data for Backup Exec.
            ◆     Shadow Copy Components (Windows Server 2003 only). The Backup Exec Shadow
                  Copy Components file system uses Microsoft’s Volume Shadow Copy Service to
                  protect critical operating system and application service data, and third party
                  application and user data on Windows Server 2003 resources.
                  A Writer is specific code within an application that participates in the Volume Shadow
                  Copy Service framework to provide point-in-time, recovery-consistent operating
                  system and application data. Writers appear as Shadow Copy Components, which are
                  listed as resources in backup and restore selections. When expanded, the Backup Exec
                  Shadow Copy Components file system includes the following types of Writers:



                                                                                                              Backing Up
                  -   Service State. Critical operating system and application service data, such as
                      Event Logs, Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI), Removable Storage                    Data
                      Manager (RSM), etc.
                  -   System State. Critical operating system data, such as Windows System File
                      Protection (System Files), COM+ Class Registration Database, Registry, Active
                      Directory, etc.
                  -   User Data. SQL Server, Exchange Server, third party application and user data,
                      etc.


Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                     265
Selecting Data to Back Up


              ◆   System State. This collection of system-specific data is selected for backup whenever
                  the Local Selections icon is selected. Backing up System State is recommended;
                  however, you can clear the check box next to System State if you do not want to back it
                  up with the Local Selections. When you double-click the icon for System State, the
                  resources that comprise it appear to the right of it. If a resource is not installed on the
                  computer, then it is not listed. You cannot select or expand the System State resources
                  individually. They are backed up and restored only as a collection, never individually.
                  You can only perform a full backup on System State. However, if you select other
                  items at the same time, you can perform other backup methods on those items. You
                  can back up System State remotely on other computers if Backup Exec Remote Agent
                  is installed on the remote computer. For more information about System State, refer to
                  your Microsoft Windows 2000 or Windows Server 2003 documentation.
              ◆   Utility Partition. Includes the utility partitions installed on the system and available
                  for backup. Individual utility partition objects are named Utility Partition on Disk
                  Disk_Number (for example, Utility Partition on Disk 0), and cannot be expanded.
                  Backing up utility partitions is recommended when a full system backup is done, such
                  as for disaster recovery preparation. Utility partitions can be backed up individually.
                  If there are not utility partitions on the system, this resource is not available.
                  Administrative rights are required to browse and back up utility partitions.
                  You can only perform a full backup of utility partitions. However, if you select other
                  items at the same time, you can perform other backup methods on those items. You
                  can back up utility partitions remotely on other computers
              The Remote Selections include:
              ◆   Network Shares. Includes Microsoft Windows systems protected by the Remote
                  Agent for Windows Servers.
              ◆   Workstation Agents. The Backup Exec Workstation Agents protect workstations
                  running Windows 98/Me, Macintosh, and UNIX. The Novell SMS devices appear
                  only when the Client (or Gateway) Services for NetWare service is enabled or Novell
                  NetWare Client 32 is installed. If an agent workstation is password-protected, you
                  must enter a password to access the agent’s published data. If some or all of the
                  computer’s shared directories cannot be selected, a gray check box appears next to the
                  agent. If this occurs, only the agent computers that Backup Exec scanned successfully
                  are selected for backup. Review your security and attachment rights to the computers
                  that are not selected. You cannot restore or archive workstation agent shares that are
                  published as read-only. Valid logon accounts are required to access the systems.
              ◆   User-defined Selections. Lists shortcuts to servers or shares that were created and
                  saved as user-defined selections. Use this feature to quickly access shares that have a
                  very long path or that are offline when you are setting up a backup job.




        266                                                                              Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                    Selecting Data to Back Up


            When you are browsing remote selections, Backup Exec requires a valid logon account to
            expand the resources and devices. If the default logon account does not enable access to a
            remote selection, Backup Exec prompts you to select another existing logon account or
            create a new logon account that can access the selection.
            There are several ways you can select data to back up. You can select an entire drive, a
            folder, files, System State, network share, Backup Exec Agent volume, or user-defined
            selection. You also can use the Advanced File Selection feature to include or exclude
            specific files or specific types of files. Or you can set up a selection list that you can reuse
            for several backups.

            Note If the account to which you are logged on does not have sufficient rights, you are
                 required to supply another logon account that can be used to view files for backup.

            To expand the view for an item, click the plus sign (+) next to it or double-click the item
            name. To collapse the view, click the minus sign (-) next to an item or double-click the item
            name.
            To view the contents of an item, double-click the item’s icon. The item’s contents appear in
            the right frame of the backup selections view. For all items (except System State), you can
            traverse file levels from either side of the window by clicking folders and subfolders as
            they appear.




                                                                                                                Backing Up
                                                                                                                   Data




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                       267
Selecting Data to Back Up


              To select data, select the check box next to the drive or directory you want to back up. The
              check box and check mark displayed are described in the following.

              Data selection descriptions

              A slash in a shaded check box means some items below the
              check box are selected, but the item itself cannot be selected.
              A slash in a check box means some items below the directory or
              drive level are selected.

              A check mark in a check box means all items at or below the
              directory or drive level are selected.

                          A clear check box means the item can be selected.




                    A shaded check box means the item cannot be selected,
                    but items below this item may be selectable.

              See also:
                  “Protecting Windows Server 2003 Systems” on page 343
                  “Backing Up NetWare Network Volumes” on page 351


        About Selecting Distributed File System (Dfs) Links for
        Backup
              To back up Microsoft’s Distributed File System (Dfs), select the Dfs links on the Dfs server.
              Only the Dfs links themselves are backed up; the data that the links lead to is not
              included.
              To back up the data in the Dfs links, back up the data on the server where the data resides.
              See also:
                  “Setting Up User-defined Selections” on page 282
                  “Restoring Distributed File System (Dfs) Links” on page 440




        268                                                                             Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                 Selecting Data to Back Up


        Including or Excluding Files for Backup Using Advanced File
        Selection
            Advanced file selection allows you to quickly select or de-select files for backup and
            archive operations by specifying file attributes. With this feature you can:
            ◆   Include or exclude files by filename attributes. For example, you can select only files
                with .txt extensions, or exclude files with .exe extensions from a backup.
            ◆   Select only files that fall within a specified date range. For example, you can select
                files that were created or modified during the month of December.
            ◆   Specify files that have not been accessed in a specified number of days. For example,
                you can select files that have not been accessed in 30 days from your “My
                Documents” folder for an archive operation.

        ▼   To select files using Advanced File Selection:

            1. On the navigation bar, click Backup.

            2. Select the resource that contains the files you want to include or exclude from the
               backup.

            3. Select the path or file that contains the files you want to include or exclude.

            4. Click Advanced.

                Advanced File Selection dialog box




                                                                                                             Backing Up
                                                                                                                Data




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                    269
Selecting Data to Back Up


              5. Select the appropriate options as follows:

              Note If the data does not match all of the criteria specified in the Advanced Backup File
                   Selection dialog box, Backup Exec does not include or exclude it in the backup.



                  Advanced File Selection options

                  Field                      Description

                  Drives                     If you want to include or exclude files from a backup of a different
                                             drive than the one you selected previously on the Backup Job
                                             Properties dialog box, select the new drive that contains the files
                                             you want to include or exclude.

                  File Selection

                  Path                       If you want to include or exclude a specific file, type the name of
                                             the folder and/or subfolder on the selected drive that contains the
                                             file.
                                             You can use wildcard characters. Use a question mark (?) to
                                             represent any single character. Use a single asterisk (*) to
                                             represent any number of characters before the next backslash. Use
                                             a double asterisk (**) to represent any number of characters,
                                             irrespective of any backslashes.
                                             For example, on your C: drive you have a My Documents folder
                                             that contains a subfolder called Work Files. There are three Work
                                             Files subfolders called 1999, 2000, and 2001. Each one of those
                                             subfolders has a subfolder called Personnel. If you type the path
                                             as \My Documents\**\Personnel, the backup will include or
                                             exclude:
                                                    C:\My Documents\Work Files\2001\Personnel
                                                    C:\My Documents\Work Files\2000\Personnel
                                                    C:\My Documents\Work Files\1999\Personnel
                                             In addition, every subfolder below the ** wildcard is included or
                                             excluded. However, the only files from the subfolders that are
                                             included or excluded are those that match the file name you type
                                             in the File field. So in the example above, every subfolder of
                                             C:\My Documents is included in or excluded from the backup,
                                             and only the files that match the file name you type in the File
                                             field are included or excluded.
                                             After you type the path, type the file name in the File field.




        270                                                                                  Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                       Selecting Data to Back Up

                Advanced File Selection options (continued)

                Field                      Description

                File                       Type the name of the file you want to include in or exclude from
                                           the backup.
                                           You can use wildcard characters. Use a question mark (?) to
                                           represent any single character. Use a single asterisk (*) to
                                           represent any number of characters.
                                           For example, to include all files with the .exe extension, type *.exe.
                                           You can use more than one asterisk if you know that a file name
                                           has certain letters in it, but not the exact file name. For example, to
                                           include or exclude any file that has the name Sam in it, type
                                           *Sam*.*.
                                           The default entry is *.*, which means every file name with every
                                           extension is selected.
                                           After you type the file name, indicate whether you want to
                                           include or exclude it.

                Type

                Include                    (Default) Select this option to include the files in the job.

                Exclude                    Select this option to exclude the files from the job.

                Selection Criteria

                Include subdirectories     Select this option if you want to select the contents of all the
                                           subfolders when a directory is selected.

                Only modified Files        Select this to include or exclude modified files in the path you
                                           specify.

                Only read-only Files       Select this to include or exclude files that cannot be modified.

                Files dated                Select this to include or exclude the files created or modified




                                                                                                                     Backing Up
                                           during a specific time period. Then select the beginning and

                                                                                                                        Data
                                           ending dates.

                Files not accessed in x    Select this to include or exclude files that have not been accessed
                days                       in a specified number of days. This is useful when you need to
                                           migrate older files from your system.




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                            271
Selecting Data to Back Up


              6. After completing your selections, click OK.

              7. Submit the operation using the same procedures as required for other backups. For
                 more information, see “Creating a Manual Backup Job by Configuring Job Properties”
                 on page 242.


        Changing the Order for Processing Backup Selections
              After you make selections for a backup job, you can set up Backup Exec to process those
              selections in a certain order. Please note the following about the order in which selections
              can be backed up:
              ◆   You can order resources within a server, but you cannot alternate selections across
                  servers. For example, you can select C: and D: from Server A followed by selections
                  from Server B. However, you cannot order selections as C: from Server A and then C:
                  from Server B and then D: from both servers.
              ◆   For any given server, system state must be ordered last.

              1. On the navigation bar, click Backup.

              2. Select the data you want to back up.

              3. On the Properties pane, under Source, click Resource Order.

              4. Select an item you want to move.

              5. Then, click Move Up or Move Down until the item is in the correct order. Click Make
                 First to move an item to the top of the list or click Make Last to move an item to the
                 bottom of the list.

              6. Process the backup job (see “Creating a Manual Backup Job by Configuring Job
                 Properties” on page 242).




        272                                                                            Administrator’s Guide
                                                                              Selecting Data to Back Up


        Changing Logon Accounts for Resources
            A logon account enables Backup Exec to access resources for backup.

        ▼   To change a logon account for a resource:

            Note For remote selections, do not change the logon account information. They rely on
                 the logon account used to connect to the server they reside on, and will ignore the
                 additional logon account you can specify. This applies to drives, Lotus, System
                 State, and Exchange selections (except mailboxes, which can and do use logon
                 accounts).


            1. On the navigation bar, click Backup.

            2. Select the data you want to back up.

            3. On the Properties pane, under Source, click Resource Credentials.

            4. Select the resource whose logon account you want to edit.

            5. Click Change.

            6. Select the Backup Exec logon account you want to use for this backup selection, or
               click New and create a new Backup Exec logon account (see “Creating a Backup Exec
               Logon Account” on page 366).

            7. Click OK.




                                                                                                          Backing Up
                                                                                                             Data




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                273
Using Selection Lists


Using Selection Lists
               Selection lists provide a quick and easy way of selecting files that you back up often. After
               you choose devices, directories and files, you can save the selections as a selection list that
               you can use in regularly scheduled operations or once-only operations. Selection lists,
               which define what is to be backed up, are also automatically created when you create a
               backup. You can combine a selection list with a template and quickly create a backup job.
               Backup Exec detects and notifies you about items in a selection list that are no longer on
               the resource. Notification occurs as a selection list is loaded for local selections, and as any
               remote server is expanded in the tree.
               See also:
                   “Creating Selection Lists” on page 274
                   “Using Selection Lists to Create a Backup Job” on page 277
                   “Deleting Selection Lists” on page 279
                   “Editing Selection Lists” on page 280
                   “About the Excludes Selection List” on page 280


         Creating Selection Lists
               Backup selection lists contain selections from the Backup Job Properties - Source dialog
               box. Restore and verify selection lists contain selections from the Restore Job Properties -
               Source dialog box. The following steps explain the creation of a backup selection list.

         ▼     To create a backup selection list:

               1. On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.

               2. Under Backup Tasks in the task pane, select New selection list.




         274                                                                               Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                              Using Selection Lists


                Selections options for new selection list




            3. Select the resources you want to back up from the backup selections pane. For more
               information about selecting data, see “Selecting Data to Back Up” on page 265.

            4. Select the appropriate options as follows:

                Selections options for selection list

                Item                       Description

                Selection list name        Enter the name of this selection list.

                Selection list             Enter a description for this selection list.




                                                                                                                      Backing Up
                description

                Load Selections from       Click this button if you want to load an existing selection list or           Data
                Existing List              merge multiple selection lists (see “Merging and Replacing Selection
                                           Lists” on page 278).

                View format

                Graphical                  Select this option to view selections in a directory tree view.




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                             275
Using Selection Lists

                   Selections options for selection list (continued)

                   Item                       Description

                   Show file details          Select this option to display details about the files available for
                                              selecting.

                   Text                       Select this option to view selections as a list of files and directories.

                   Advanced                   Click this button if you want to use the Advanced File Selection for
                                              selecting files for backing up (see “Including or Excluding Files for
                                              Backup Using Advanced File Selection” on page 269).

                   Include subdirectories Select this option if you want to select the contents of all the
                                          subfolders when a directory is selected.

               5. Click OK.
               See also:
                   “Using Selection Lists” on page 274
                   “Using Selection Lists to Create a Backup Job” on page 277
                   “Deleting Selection Lists” on page 279
                   “Editing Selection Lists” on page 280
                   “About the Excludes Selection List” on page 280




         276                                                                                       Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                      Using Selection Lists


        Using Selection Lists to Create a Backup Job
        ▼   To use selection lists to create a backup job:

            1. On the navigation bar, click Backup.

            2. Click Load Selections from Existing List.

                Load Selections from Existing List




            3. Click the check box next each selection list you want to use for this backup.
                You can select multiple selection lists. A merged selection list will then be created and
                used for the job. The merged selection list will be saved separately and can be used for
                other jobs.




                                                                                                              Backing Up
                                                                                                                 Data




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                    277
Using Selection Lists


               4. Submit the operation using the same procedures required for other backup operations
                  (see “Creating a Manual Backup Job by Configuring Job Properties” on page 242).
               You can combine selection lists with a template to quickly create a new backup job.
               See also:
                   “Using Selection Lists” on page 274
                   “Creating Selection Lists” on page 274
                   “Deleting Selection Lists” on page 279
                   “Editing Selection Lists” on page 280
                   “About the Excludes Selection List” on page 280
                   “Creating a New Backup Job from a Template” on page 290


         Merging and Replacing Selection Lists
               You can create a new selection list by merging two or more existing lists with new
               selections. Merging of selection lists can be done when creating a job (see “Using Selection
               Lists to Create a Backup Job” on page 277) or by selecting the New selection list option.
               You can also replace selections in the tree with other selection lists.

         ▼     To merge or replace selection lists:

               1. On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.

               2. Under Backup Tasks in the task pane, select New selection list.

               3. To merge with an existing selection list:

                   a. On the New Backup Selection List dialog box, select resources to include in the
                      selection list.

                   b. Click Load Existing Selection List.

                   c. On the Use Selections dialog box, select the selection lists you want to merge with
                      the previously selected items.

                   d. Click Merge.




         278                                                                            Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                         Using Selection Lists


            4. To replace selections with an existing selection list:

                a. Click Load Existing Selection List.

                b. On the Use Selections dialog box, select the selection lists you want to replace
                   with the previously selected.

                c. Click Replace.

            5. Click OK.

            6. Complete the other options on the New Backup Selection List dialog box as described
               in “Selections options for selection list” on page 275.

            7. Click OK.


        Deleting Selection Lists
        ▼   To delete a selection list you are no longer using:

            1. On the Edit menu, click Delete Selection List.
                The Delete Selections dialog appears. The available selection lists are listed in this
                window.

            2. Click the selection list you want to delete, and then click Delete.

            3. Click Yes to delete the Selection List; click No to cancel the delete operation.
                If the selection list is being used by a job, you will not be able to delete it.
            See also:
                “Using Selection Lists” on page 274
                “Creating Selection Lists” on page 274



                                                                                                                 Backing Up
                “Using Selection Lists to Create a Backup Job” on page 277
                “Editing Selection Lists” on page 280                                                               Data
                “About the Excludes Selection List” on page 280




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                         279
Using Selection Lists


         Editing Selection Lists
               Editing a selection list affects all jobs using that selection list. If you want to only edit
               selections for a specific job, edit the job rather than the selection list.

         ▼     To edit a selection list:

               1. On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.

               2. On the Backup Selection Lists pane, select the selection list you want to edit.

               3. Under General Tasks in the task pane, click Properties.

               4. If the selection list is being used by jobs, you will be prompted to click Yes to continue.

               5. Make the changes you want to Selections, Resource Order, and Resource
                  Credentials.

               6. Click OK.
               See also:
                   “Using Selection Lists” on page 274
                   “Creating Selection Lists” on page 274
                   “Using Selection Lists to Create a Backup Job” on page 277
                   “Deleting Selection Lists” on page 279
                   “About the Excludes Selection List” on page 280


         About the Excludes Selection List
               The Excludes Selection List provides an easy way for you to specify directories and/or
               files that you never want to back up. For example, you may have many temporary (*.tmp)
               files residing on your local disk. By adding them to the Excludes Selection List, these files
               are not backed up or archived.
               You can delete the Excludes Selection List. However, if you want to create a new Excludes
               Selection List, use “Excludes” as the Selection List name.




         280                                                                                Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                        Using Selection Lists


        ▼   To edit the Excludes list:

            1. On the Edit menu, click Edit Selection List.

                Edit Selection List dialog box




                The Name and Type, such as backup or restore, of each selection list appears.

            2. Choose Excludes from the Selection lists.

            3. Click Edit.

            4. If the Excludes list has been previously edited, you can select the Selection rule you
               want to edit and click Edit (see “Including or Excluding Files for Backup Using
               Advanced File Selection” on page 269), or select the Selection rule you want to remove
               and click Delete.

            5. If this is the first time the Excludes list is being edited, click Insert (see “Including or
               Excluding Files for Backup Using Advanced File Selection” on page 269).




                                                                                                                Backing Up
                                                                                                                   Data
            6. Click OK to save your changes and exit the Edit Selection List window.
            See also:
                “Deleting Selection Lists” on page 279
                “Creating Selection Lists” on page 274




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                      281
Setting Up User-defined Selections


Setting Up User-defined Selections
              You can create shortcuts to shares and save them as user-defined selections. Use this
              feature to quickly access shares that have a very long path or that are unavailable when
              you are setting up a backup job. You can set up direct access to a share by entering its
              UNC name, IP address, or machine name.
              A share may be unavailable because the network resources used to locate the machine are
              offline, even though the machine may still be running and available. In some cases this
              happens because the machine is on the internet and accessible from within the company’s
              private network, but cannot be located using just its name or normal browsing methods.

        ▼     To add a user-defined selection:

              1. On the navigation bar, click Backup.

              2. On the backup selections pane, expand Remote Selections.

              3. Right-click User-defined Selections, and then click User-defined Selections.

              4. In the UNC Name field, type the server name and volume name
                  Example: \\Production\graphics

              Note TCP/IP addresses can also be provided for user-defined selections. For example:
                   \\10.0.0.0. However, Backup Exec does not support virtual servers via IP addresses.

                    You can also use the computer name.


              5. Click Add.
                  The share appears in the Selections defined section of the dialog box. Repeat steps
                  4-5 to add additional user-defined selections.

              6. When you are finished adding selections, click Close.
                  The selections that you specified can be selected for backup operations from the
                  User-defined Selections node.
              See also:
                  “Using Selection Lists” on page 274
                  “Creating Selection Lists” on page 274
                  “Using Selection Lists to Create a Backup Job” on page 277
                  “Deleting Selection Lists” on page 279


        282                                                                          Administrator’s Guide
                                                                             Using Backup Job Templates


                “Editing Selection Lists” on page 280
                “About the Excludes Selection List” on page 280



Using Backup Job Templates
            Templates are job attributes that define how and when Backup Exec processes a job.
            Templates specify the device, settings, and schedule options to use, but do not include the
            resource selections to be used for the backup job. Templates are useful when you want to
            create new backup jobs that use the same settings. For example, you may want to define
            your backup strategy (see “About Backup Strategies” on page 352) that includes the
            media rotation methods. You can reflect this strategy once in your template definition,
            and then reuse the template for all resources being protected by the media server.
            Using templates offers another advantage when changes in the settings need to be made
            to multiple jobs. Rather than editing all jobs that use the same template, you can edit the
            template. Backup Exec then applies the template change to all jobs using that template
            during the next job processing interval.


        Creating a New Backup Template
        ▼   To create a new backup template:

            1. On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.

            2. Under Backup Tasks in the task pane, select New job template.




                                                                                                          Backing Up
                                                                                                             Data




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                  283
Using Backup Job Templates

                  Device and Media options for new template




              3. Set up the Device and Media options for this template. See “Device and Media
                 options for backup job” on page 248 for detailed information about these options.

              4. On the Properties pane, under Settings, click General and select options as described
                 in “General Options for Backup Job Templates” on page 285.

              5. Additional options can be set by selecting on the Properties pane additional Settings
                 options, such as Advanced (see “Advanced Options for Backup Jobs” on page 257)
                 and Pre/Post Commands (see “Pre/Post Commands for Backup or Restore Jobs” on
                 page 261).

              6. On the Properties pane, under Frequency, click Schedule to set the schedule options
                 for this template (see “Scheduling Jobs” on page 374).

              7. Click OK.
              See also:
                  “Creating a Manual Backup Job by Configuring Job Properties” on page 242
                  “Using Selection Lists to Create a Backup Job” on page 277




        284                                                                         Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                 Using Backup Job Templates


            General Options for Backup Job Templates
            General options for backup job templates include the template name and backup method.
            These options are set on the New Backup Job Template dialog box. To set these options, on
            the Properties pane, under Settings, click General.

            New Backup Job Template General options




            General options for backup job templates include:

            General settings options for new backup job template

            Item                         Description

            Template name                Type the name for this backup job template.

            Backup set description       Type a description of the information you are backing up.




                                                                                                              Backing Up
                                                                                                                 Data




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                       285
Using Backup Job Templates


              General settings options for new backup job template (continued)

              Item                         Description

              Backup method for files      Select a backup method. Your choices are:
                                               FULL - Back Up Files - Reset Archive Bit. Includes all of the
                                               selected data on a volume and resets the archive bit to indicate
                                               that the files have been backed up.
                                               COPY - Back Up Files. Includes all selected data, and does not
                                               affect any media rotation scheme because the archive bit is not
                                               reset.
                                               DIFFERENTIAL - Changed Files. Includes all files since the last
                                               full backup.
                                               INCREMENTAL - Changed Files - Reset Archive Bit. Includes
                                               only the files that have changed since the last full or incremental
                                               backup and resets the archive bit to indicate that the files have
                                               been backed up.
                                               FULL - Back Up Files - Allow incrementals and differentials
                                               using modified time. Includes all of the selected data on a
                                               volume and allows the use of incrementals and differentials
                                               using the modified date and time stamp.
                                               DIFFERENTIAL - Using modified time. Includes all files since
                                               last full backup using the files’ last modified date and time
                                               stamp.
                                               INCREMENTAL - Using modified time. Includes all files since
                                               the last full or incremental backup using the files’ last modified
                                               date and time stamp.
                                               DAILY - Files that Changed Today. Backs up all files with
                                               today’s date.
                                               WORKING SET - All files last accessed in (x) days. Includes all
                                               files that were created or modified since the last full or
                                               incremental backup. If you select this backup method, you can
                                               then indicate in the Files accessed in x days field that you want
                                               to include data that has been accessed in a specific number of
                                               days.
                                               ARCHIVE - Delete files after successful copy backup. Backs up
                                               the selected data, verifies the media, and then deletes the data
                                               from the volume. For data to be deleted, rights to delete a file
                                               must be granted; otherwise data will be backed up, but not
                                               deleted.
                                           Note Backup Exec does not delete data from Backup Exec Agent
                                                workstations when using the archive feature.
                                           For more information, see “Understanding Backup Methods and
                                           Their Advantages” on page 355.



        286                                                                                   Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                    Using Backup Job Templates


            General settings options for new backup job template (continued)

            Item                         Description

            Files accessed in x days     If you selected the working set backup method in the Backup
                                         method for files field, use this field to specify the number of days for
                                         which to include accessed files.
                                         Note VERITAS recommends that you specify at least 30 days in
                                              order to include the data needed to make your system
                                              operational if you have to restore a working set backup.

            Use the Windows Change Select this option if you want to use Windows’ NTFS Change
            Journal if available   Journal to determine which files have been modified since the
                                         last full backup. This option can only be used with NTFS
                                         volumes and only when the backup method selected is FULL
                                         - Back Up Files - Allows incrementals and differentials
                                         using modified time, DIFFERENTIAL - Using modified
                                         time or INCREMENTAL - Using modified time.

            Preserve tree on archive     Select this option to retain the directory structure of the files backed
                                         up in an archive job.

            Verify after backup          Select this option to have Backup Exec automatically perform a
            completes                    verify operation to make sure the media can be read once the backup
                                         has been completed. Verifying all backups is recommended.




                                                                                                                    Backing Up
                                                                                                                       Data




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                           287
Using Backup Job Templates


              General settings options for new backup job template (continued)

              Item                         Description

              Compression type             Select one of the following:
                                               None. Select this option to copy the data to the media in its
                                               original form (uncompressed). Using some form of data
                                               compression can help expedite backups and preserve storage
                                               media space.
                                               Hardware data compression should not be used in environments
                                               where devices that support hardware compression are used
                                               interchangeably with devices that do not have that functionality.
                                               For example, if a drive that does not support hardware
                                               compression is added to a cascaded drive pool that includes
                                               drives supporting the feature, hardware compression is
                                               automatically disabled. You can manually re-enable hardware
                                               compression on the drives that support it, but this results in
                                               media inconsistency. If the drive that supports hardware
                                               compression fails, the compressed media cannot be restored with
                                               the non-compression drive
                                               Software. Select this option to use STAC™ software data
                                               compression, which compresses the data before it is sent to the
                                               storage device.
                                               Hardware [if available, otherwise none]. Select this option to
                                               use hardware data compression (if the storage device supports
                                               it). If the drive does not feature data compression the data is
                                               backed up uncompressed.
                                               Hardware [if available, otherwise software]. Select this option to
                                               use hardware data compression (if the storage device supports
                                               it). If the drive does not feature hardware data compression,
                                               STAC software compression is used.




        288                                                                                  Administrator’s Guide
                                                                             Using Backup Job Templates


        Editing a Backup Job Template
            You can quickly update the settings for all jobs that use the same template by editing the
            template rather than the individual jobs.

        ▼   To edit a job template:

            1. On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.

            2. On the Backup Job Templates pane, select the template you want to edit.

            3. Under General Tasks in the task pane, select Properties.

            4. Make the changes you want, and then click OK.
            See also:
                “Creating a New Backup Template” on page 283


        Creating a Copy of a Backup Job Template
            You can make a copy of an existing backup job template. You may want to make a copy if
            you want to create a new template that uses most of the properties of an existing template.
            For example, if you want to create both full and differential backup jobs for resources and
            all other job settings will be identical, you can create a template using the full backup
            method and copy the template, you can then make changes to the copy through the
            template’s Properties (see “Editing a Backup Job Template” on page 289).

        ▼   To make a copy of a template:

            1. On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.

            2. In the Backup Job Templates pane, select the template you want to copy.

            3. Under Backup Tasks in the task pane, select Copy template.




                                                                                                          Backing Up
                                                                                                             Data
            4. Enter the name of the new template, and then click OK.




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                  289
Using Backup Job Templates


        Creating a New Backup Job from a Template
              Before you can create a backup job from a template, you must have a template with your
              specifications for the backup job and a selection list that contains the data you want to
              back up. If you do not have a template set up, see “Creating a New Backup Template” on
              page 283. If you do not have a selection list set up, see “Creating Selection Lists” on
              page 274. If you want to notify a person when the backup job completes, you must also
              have this person set up in a recipient list.

              1. On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.

              2. Under Backup Tasks, click New job from template.

                  Template options for new job from template




              3. Select the template you want to use for this backup job. If you want to create a new
                 template for this backup job, click New. Then, refer to “Creating a New Backup
                 Template” on page 283.

              4. On the Properties pane, under Source, click Backup Selection Lists.

              5. Choose the selection list you want to use for this backup job. If you want to create a
                 new selection list for this backup job, click New. Then refer to “Creating Selection
                 Lists” on page 274.

        290                                                                           Administrator’s Guide
                                                                            Using Backup Job Templates


            6. On the Properties pane, under Settings, click General and set general options for this
               job as described in “General Options for New Job from Template” on page 291.

            7. If you want Backup Exec to notify someone when the backup job completes, on the
               Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification (see “Selecting Recipients for Job
               Notification” on page 509).

            8. Click Run Now.
                The backup job is submitted according to the schedule options you set in the profile.


            General Options for New Job from Template
            Most options for a backup job created from a template are set when creating the backup
            job template. However, you can set some general options, such as the job name, from the
            Backup Job Properties dialog box by selecting on the Properties pane, under Settings,
            General.

            General options for new job from template




                                                                                                         Backing Up
                                                                                                            Data




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                 291
Using Backup Job Templates


              General options for a job created from a backup job template include:

              General options for new job from template

              Item                      Description

              Job name                  Enter a unique name for the backup job.

              Job priority              Select the priority level for this job. If another job is scheduled to run at
                                        the same time as this job, the priority you set determines which job runs
                                        first. Your choices are:
                                            Highest
                                            High
                                            Medium
                                            Low
                                            Lowest

              Submit job on hold        Select this option if you want to submit the job on hold.

              Enable automatic          Select this item if you want Backup Exec to automatically cancel the
              cancellation feature      backup job if it does not complete within a specific amount of time after
                                        the scheduled start time. Then, in the Cancel job if not completed
                                        within fields, select the amount of time you want Backup Exec to wait
                                        before canceling the job.

              Cancel job if not         Indicate the number of minutes or hours you want Backup Exec to wait
              completed within x        before it cancels the backup job.




        292                                                                                     Administrator’s Guide
                                                          Using Backup Exec’s Windows Explorer Interface


        Reapplying a Template to Jobs
            If you edit a backup job that was created using a backup job template, you receive a
            warning that editing the job will break the job’s association with the template. After
            editing the job, you should then reapply the template.

        ▼   To reapply the template to a backup job:

            1. On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.

            2. From the Backup Job Templates pane, select the template you want to reapply.

            3. Under Backup Tasks in the task pane, select Reapply Templates to Jobs.

            4. A warning message displays the jobs that will be affected.

            5. Click Yes.



Using Backup Exec’s Windows Explorer Interface
            Backup Exec’s Windows Explorer interface allows you to select and back up files from
            Windows Explorer. Backup Exec’s administration console does not have to be running to
            create and submit backup jobs from Windows Explorer; however, Backup Exec services
            must be running on the server.
            The Windows Explorer interface can be used on the Backup Exec server and any computer
            running the Backup Exec Remote Administrator (see “Installing the Backup Exec Remote
            Administrator” on page 72).
            Backup Exec’s Windows Explorer interface cannot be used to back up databases, such as
            Microsoft SQL or Exchange server. To back up a database, use the appropriate Backup
            Exec agent. For more information, see “Backup Exec Options” on page 37.

        ▼   To set up Backup Exec to create backups from Windows Explorer:




                                                                                                           Backing Up
            1. On the Tools menu, click Options.

            2. On the Properties pane, under Settings, click Preferences.
                                                                                                              Data

            3. Select Enable backup from Windows Explorer.




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                  293
Using Backup Exec’s Windows Explorer Interface


              4. Click OK.
                  The Back up with Backup Exec option will now appear on the Windows Explorer
                  shortcut menu.
              See also:
                  “Backup Exec Defaults” on page 90
                  “Submitting a Backup Job from Windows Explorer” on page 297
                  “Archiving Data” on page 300


        Specifying or Changing Backup Settings for Windows
        Explorer
              The first time you submit a backup job using the Backup Exec Windows Explorer
              interface, you must specify logon information for the media server and enter a backup
              device name. The Backup Settings dialog box allows you to save the settings, which are
              used for subsequent backup jobs submitted from Windows Explorer. If you do not save
              the settings, you need to enter the logon information and the backup device name each
              time you submit a backup job from Windows Explorer.

        ▼     To specify or change settings for a backup job from Windows Explorer:

              1. From Windows Explorer, right-click any file or folder.

              2. Select Back up with Backup Exec from the shortcut menu.

              Note If you have already specified and saved backup job settings, the Backup dialog box
                   appears. You can change backup job settings from the Backup dialog box. For more
                   information, see “Submitting a Backup Job from Windows Explorer” on page 297.




        294                                                                        Administrator’s Guide
                                                              Using Backup Exec’s Windows Explorer Interface


                Backup Settings dialog box




            3. Select the appropriate options as follows:

                Backup Settings options

                Name                         Description

                Server Name                  Type the name of the media server on which Backup Exec is
                                             installed.

                Remote Server Login

                User Name                    View or change the user name. The default is the name of the user
                                             currently logged on to the machine. You can enter a different user
                                             or administrator.
                                             Note If you are logged on as part of a workgroup, the user
                                                  domain is your local machine name.




                                                                                                                  Backing Up
                Password                     Type the password for the user.

                                                                                                                     Data




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                         295
Using Backup Exec’s Windows Explorer Interface

                  Backup Settings options (continued)

                  Name                        Description

                  Backup Options

                  Job Name                    View or change the job name. The utility generates a unique name
                                              for the backup job in the format: Backup <local machine
                                              name><numeric ID>. If the job name exceeds 25 characters, the
                                              utility truncates the local machine name. For example:
                                              For a backup run on a machine named ADMN-30PAYROLL, the
                                              utility could generate the job name Backup ADMN-30P 960576233.
                                              If you change the default job name, you must ensure it is a unique
                                              job name.

                  Device Name                 Type the name of the backup device.

                  Include subdirectories in Select this option to include all subfolders within the selected
                  backup                    folders in the backup job.

                  Save Settings               Select this option to save the backup settings as defaults for
                                              subsequent backup jobs.
                                              Note You must submit a backup job to save the settings in the
                                                   Registry.
                                              Clear this option if you want to change the settings for a single
                                              backup job but keep the defaults saved in the Registry.

                  Job Status                  View the status of a job, confirmation and error messages, and the
                                              job ID.

              4. Click Submit Job.
              See also:
                  “Archiving Data” on page 300




        296                                                                                  Administrator’s Guide
                                                           Using Backup Exec’s Windows Explorer Interface


        Submitting a Backup Job from Windows Explorer
            After you have enabled Backup Exec to use the Windows Explorer interface and specified
            the backup settings, you can submit backup jobs from Windows Explorer.

            Note The first time you run a backup on a resource, you must use the Backup Exec
                 graphical user interface. If the first backup on a resource is from the Windows
                 Explorer interface, the job will fail and will continue to fail until you run a job from
                 Backup Exec.


        ▼   To submit a backup job from Windows Explorer:

            1. From Windows Explorer, select the files or folders you want to back up.

            2. Right-click the selected files or folders and select Back up with Backup Exec from the
               shortcut menu.

                Selecting Back up with Backup Exec from Windows Explorer




                                                                                                            Backing Up
                                                                                                               Data
            Note If you have not yet saved backup job settings, the Backup Settings dialog box
                 appears. You must specify settings before submitting a backup job. For more
                 information, see “Specifying or Changing Backup Settings for Windows Explorer”
                 on page 294.




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                   297
Using Backup Exec’s Windows Explorer Interface

                  Backup dialog box




              3. Select the appropriate options as follows:

                  Backup options

                  Name                        Description

                  Job Name                    View or change the job name. The utility generates a unique name
                                              for the backup job in the format: Backup local machine name
                                              numeric ID. If the job name exceeds 25 characters, the utility
                                              truncates the local machine name. For example:
                                              For a backup run on a machine named ADMN-30PAYROLL, the
                                              utility could generate the job name Backup ADMN-30P 960576233.
                                              If you change the default job name, you must ensure it is a unique
                                              job name.

                  Include Subdirectories in Select this option to include all subfolders within the selected
                  Backup                    folders in the backup job.

                  Job Status                  View the status of a job, confirmation and error messages, and the
                                              job ID.


              Note The backup job defaults to the options set in the Backup tab. For more information,
                   see “Setting Default Backup Options” on page 320.




        298                                                                                 Administrator’s Guide
                                                                       Running a One-button Backup Job


            4. Click Submit Job.

            5. Click Close Dialog after the backup job has been submitted and confirmed.

            Note To submit another backup job, you must close the Backup dialog box.

            See also:
                “Specifying or Changing Backup Settings for Windows Explorer” on page 294
                “Submitting a Backup Job from Windows Explorer” on page 297



Running a One-button Backup Job
            One-button backup quickly backs up the local media server using the backup defaults.
            With one-button backup, you cannot select data or set options for the backup. After you
            select one-button backup, the backup job is submitted immediately using your default
            logon account and the default backup selections and settings.
            If you want to perform a one-button backup of a system where Backup-to-Disk folders are
            located, VERITAS recommends that you add the Backup-to-Disk folders to the Excludes
            Selection List. If you do not exclude Backup-to-Disk folders, data is continuously added to
            the folders during the one-button backup, which uses all the free drive space.
            You can back up the following with one-button backup:
            ◆   Local drives that do not use removable media
            ◆   Lotus Domino resources
            ◆   Windows NT System State
            ◆   Windows NT Utility Partition
            ◆   Windows NT Shadow Copy Device
            ◆   Microsoft SQL Server databases
            ◆   Microsoft Sharepoint Portal Server



                                                                                                          Backing Up
            ◆   Microsoft Exchange 5.5 Directory
            ◆   Microsoft Exchange 5.5 and 2000 Information Store                                            Data
            ◆   Microsoft Exchange 2000 Key Management Service (KMS) and Site Replication
                Service (SRS)
            You cannot back up the following types of data with one-button backup:
            ◆   Microsoft SQL Server filegroup resources
            ◆   Microsoft Sharepoint Portal Server workspaces

Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                  299
Archiving Data


              ◆   Microsoft Exchange individual mailboxes and public folders
              ◆   Microsoft Exchange 2000 installable filesystem (IFS) drive (usually M:)

        ▼     To run a one-button backup job:

              1. On the navigation bar, click Overview.

              Note You can also run a one-button backup job from the Backup Exec Assistant. To
                   activate the Backup Exec Assistant, on the Tools menu, select Backup Exec
                   Assistant.


              2. On the Properties pane, under Views, select Information desk.

              3. On the Information Desk, under Getting Started, click Back up this media server
                 now with One-button backup.
                  Backup Exec submits the job to the job queue.



Archiving Data
              With Backup Exec’s archive feature, you can free valuable disk space and reduce clutter
              on your server volume by migrating stagnant directories and files from the server to
              media.
              If you select archive as your backup method when creating a job, Backup Exec backs up
              the selected data, verifies the media, and then deletes the data from the volume.

              Note For data to be deleted, rights to delete a file must be granted; otherwise data will be
                   backed up, but not deleted.

                    Backup Exec does not delete data from Backup Exec Agent workstations when using
                    the archive feature.

              During an archive job, Backup Exec automatically performs a verify operation after the
              data is backed up. If the verify operation fails, the archive job stops and you are notified. If
              you get a verification failure, investigate the problem by viewing the job log, try to correct
              the problem, and then retry the archive operation. After the data is backed up and
              verified, Backup Exec automatically deletes the data included in the archive job. The job
              log contains a list of the data that was deleted.

              Note If the checkpoint restart setting is enabled for an archive backup job that is resumed
                   when a cluster failover occurs, the files selected for archive are not automatically
                   deleted from the source volume after the backup completes.


        300                                                                               Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                          Archiving Data


        Archiving Data Using Disk Grooming
            The archive operation can be used to perform disk grooming, which uses Windows’ last
            access date to move obsolete files from the server to media.

            Note The NTFS file system supports the last access date capability as does the VFAT file
                 system under Windows NT. However, files accessed while the VFAT file system is
                 used under DOS are not selected.


        ▼   To perform an archive operation:

            1. On the navigation bar, click Backup.

            2. Click Advanced.

            3. For each resource you want to archive:

                a. On Drives selections, select the resource.

                b. Click Files not accessed in x days. Then, type or select the number of days (up to
                   999) to use as the criteria for selecting files.
                At this time, you may specify other criteria for data you want to include in the
                operation. For example, type *.doc in the File field to groom all of your document files
                not accessed in the number of days specified in the Files not accessed in x days field.

                c. Click OK.

            4. On the Properties pane, under Settings, click General, and then select Archive as the
               backup method.

            5. Complete the backup job options following the procedures described in “Creating a
               Manual Backup Job by Configuring Job Properties” on page 242.
            See also:




                                                                                                           Backing Up
                “Including or Excluding Files for Backup Using Advanced File Selection” on page 269
                “Archive Backups” on page 359                                                                 Data




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                  301
Using Resource Discovery to Search for New Resources


Using Resource Discovery to Search for New Resources
              Backup Exec’s Resource Discovery feature allows detection of new backup resources
              within a Windows domain. Using this feature, you can create and schedule a job that
              searches for new server volumes or databases. You can specify which types of resources to
              include in the search, and can have Backup Exec send a notification when a new resource
              is discovered.
              Using the discovered resources identified in the job log, you can then create a backup job
              to ensure that the new resource is protected.
              The Remote Agent is required to discover resources on remote computers. However,
              installing a MAPI client on the media server enables Exchange resources to be discovered
              on remote resources on which the Remote Agent is not installed.
              On Windows Server 2003 resources, Backup Exec’s Resource Discovery feature will detect
              the Shadow Copy Components; it will not detect System State.

        ▼     To create a resource discovery job:

              1. On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.

              2. Under Backup Strategy Tasks in the task pane, select New job to automatically
                 discover resources.

                  Target options for resource discovery job




        302                                                                           Administrator’s Guide
                                                   Using Resource Discovery to Search for New Resources


            3. Select the domain you want Backup Exec to search for new resources.

            4. If you need to change the logon account for the domain, click Change Logon Account
               and enter or select the logon credentials to access this domain.

            Note If you are using BEWAC, you can only choose a pre-defined logon account. You
                 cannot create or edit a logon account.


            5. If you want to exclude computers from the search, see “Excluding Computers from a
               Resource Search” on page 306.

            6. On the Properties pane, under Settings, click General and complete the options
               described in “General Options for Resource Discovery Job” on page 304.

            7. On the Properties pane, under Settings, click Resources and complete the options
               described in “Resources Options for a Resource Discovery Job” on page 305.

            8. If you want Backup Exec to notify someone when this job completes, on the
               Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification (see “Selecting Recipients for Job
               Notification” on page 509).

            9. If you want to run the job now, click Run Now. Otherwise, on the Properties pane,
               under Frequency, click Schedule to set the scheduling options you want to use (see
               “Scheduling Jobs” on page 374).




                                                                                                          Backing Up
                                                                                                             Data




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                 303
Using Resource Discovery to Search for New Resources


        General Options for Resource Discovery Job
              General options for a resource discovery job can be set through the Resource Discover Job
              dialog box. To set the options, on the Properties pane, under Settings, click General.

              General settings for resource discovery job




              Options on this dialog box include:

              General settings options for resource discovery job

              Item                       Description

              Job name                   Enter the name for this job.

              Job priority               Select the priority level for this job. If another job is scheduled to run at
                                         the same time as this job, the priority you set determines which job runs
                                         first. Your choices are:
                                            Highest
                                            High
                                            Medium
                                            Low
                                            Lowest




        304                                                                                      Administrator’s Guide
                                                      Using Resource Discovery to Search for New Resources


        Resources Options for a Resource Discovery Job
            You can specify types of resources to discover and set some notification options through
            the Resources options dialog box. To set resource options, from the Resource Discovery
            Job dialog box, on the Properties pane, under Settings, click Resources.
            Options for this dialog box include:

            Resources options for resource discovery job

            Item                      Description

            Select the types of resources to automatically discover

            Network administrative    Select this option if you want Backup Exec to search for new
            shares                    administrative network shares or volumes.

            Network user shares       Select this option if you want Backup Exec to search for new
                                      user-defined shares.

            Microsoft SQL             Select this option if you want Backup Exec to search for new Microsoft
            databases                 SQL databases.

            Microsoft Exchange        Select this option if you want Backup Exec to search for new Microsoft
            servers                   Exchange servers. Backup Exec searches for Information Store,
                                      Exchange Directory, or Storage Groups; it does not discover individual
                                      databases under storage groups.

            Lotus Domino              Select this option if you want Backup Exec to search for new Lotus
            databases                 Domino databases.

            System State/Shadow       Select this option if you want Backup Exec to search for new System
            Copy Components           State resources or shadow copy components.

            When new resources are discovered:




                                                                                                               Backing Up
            Send separate             Select this option if you want Backup Exec to send separate
            notification for each     notifications when each new resource is found.

                                                                                                                  Data
            new resource found

            Send one notification     Select this option if you want Backup Exec to send out a single
            for all new resources     notification for all new resources found.
            found




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                          305
Using Resource Discovery to Search for New Resources


              Resources options for resource discovery job (continued)

              Item                       Description

              Include previously         Select this option if you want Backup Exec to send a notification that
              discovered resources       includes all resources previously found during resource discovery jobs.
              when sending
              notification


              Excluding Computers from a Resource Search
              When creating a resource discovery job, you can select to exclude one or more computers
              in the domain from the resource search.

        ▼     To exclude computers from the resource search:

              1. After selecting the domains for Backup Exec to search for new resources (see “Using
                 Resource Discovery to Search for New Resources” on page 302), on the Properties
                 pane, under Target, click Exclude.

              2. In the Domain field, select the domain that contains the servers you want to exclude.

              3. From the list below the Domain field, select the server you want to exclude, and then
                 click Exclude.
                    To select consecutive servers, click the first item, press and hold <Shift>, and then
                    click the last item. To select servers that are not consecutive, press and hold <Ctrl>,
                    and then click each item.

              Note Alternatively, you can type the name of the server in the Servers excluded field, and
                   then click Add. To exclude multiple servers at one time, type a space between the
                   name of each server.


              Tip     To remove a server from the list of excluded servers, select it and then click Include
                      to return it to the list of included servers. You can also select multiple servers
                      simultaneously.


              4. Continue creating the resource discovery job.




        306                                                                                 Administrator’s Guide
                                                                               Duplicating Backed Up Data


Duplicating Backed Up Data
            You can create a job to duplicate backup data, selecting either to duplicate existing backup
            sets or to duplicate backup sets immediately following a scheduled job.
            If you select to duplicate existing backup sets, the backup sets you select from catalogs are
            read from the source media and written to the selected destination, such as a drive, drive
            pool, or backup folder. You can schedule when this type of job runs.
            If you select to duplicate backup sets following a job, you select a scheduled backup job as
            the source. That backup job runs first, and then the backup sets it created are copied to the
            destination you selected for the duplicate job. To duplicate backup sets following a job, the
            backup job must be scheduled to run and must not be associated with any other duplicate
            jobs. You cannot schedule this job; instead, the duplicate job runs only after the related, or
            linked, backup job completes.

        ▼   To duplicate backup data:

            1. From the navigation bar, click Job Setup.

            2. Under Backup Tasks, select New job to duplicate backup data.

            3. If you want to copy existing backup sets to another destination:

                a. Select Duplicate existing backup sets, and then click OK.

                b. Select the backup sets you want to copy.

            4. If you want to duplicate backup sets created when a scheduled backup job runs:

                a. Select Duplicate backup sets following a job, and then click OK.

                b. Select the scheduled backup job to be used as the source.

            5. On the Properties pane, under Destination, select Device and Media, and complete




                                                                                                             Backing Up
               these options as described in “Device and Media Options for Backup Jobs and
               Templates” on page 247.

            6. On the Properties pane, under Settings, click General, and complete these options as             Data
               described in “General Options for a Duplicate Job” on page 308.

            7. On the Properties pane, under Settings, click Advanced, and complete these options
               as described in “Advanced Options for a Duplicate Job” on page 310.




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                    307
Duplicating Backed Up Data


              8. If you want Backup Exec to notify someone when the backup job completes, on the
                 Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification (see “Selecting Recipients for Job
                 Notification” on page 509).

              9. If you are duplicating data from a scheduled backup job, click Run Now.
                  The duplicate job will launch immediately following the completion of the scheduled
                  backup job.

              10. If you are duplicating data from an existing backup set, either click Run Now or
                  under Frequency, click Schedule to set the scheduling options you want to use (see
                  “Scheduling Jobs” on page 374).


        General Options for a Duplicate Job
              General options for duplicate job




              General options for a duplicate job include:

              General settings for New Duplicate Job

              Item                       Description

              Job name                   Type the name for this backup job.



        308                                                                          Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                     Duplicating Backed Up Data

            General settings (continued)for New Duplicate Job (continued)

            Item                      Description

            Job priority              Select the priority level for this job. If another job is scheduled to run at
                                      the same time as this job, the priority you set determines which job runs
                                      first. Your choices are:
                                          Highest
                                          High
                                          Medium
                                          Low
                                          Lowest

            Backup set description    Type a description of the information you are backing up.

            Preferred source device Select the device used as the destination device for the original backup
                                    job.




                                                                                                                      Backing Up
                                                                                                                         Data




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                             309
Duplicating Backed Up Data


        Advanced Options for a Duplicate Job
              Advanced options for a duplicate job




              Advanced options that can be set for a duplicate job include:

              Advanced options for duplicate job

              Item                      Description

              Verify after backup       Select this option to have Backup Exec automatically perform a verify
              completes                 operation to make sure the media can be read after the backup has been
                                        completed. Verifying all backups is recommended.




        310                                                                                Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                   Duplicating Backed Up Data


            Advanced options for duplicate job (continued)

            Item                      Description

            Compression type          Select one of the following:
                                          None. Select this option to copy the data to the media in its original
                                          form (uncompressed). Using some form of data compression can
                                          help expedite backups and preserve storage media space.
                                          Hardware data compression should not be used in environments
                                          where devices that support hardware compression are used
                                          interchangeably with devices that do not have that functionality.
                                          For example, if a drive that does not support hardware compression
                                          is added to a cascaded drive pool that includes drives supporting
                                          the feature, hardware compression is automatically disabled. You
                                          can manually re-enable hardware compression on the drives that
                                          support it, but this results in media inconsistency. If the drive that
                                          supports hardware compression fails, the compressed media cannot
                                          be restored with the non-compression drive
                                          Hardware [if available, otherwise none]. Select this option to use
                                          hardware data compression (if the storage device supports it). If the
                                          drive does not feature data compression the data is backed up
                                          uncompressed.




                                                                                                                   Backing Up
                                                                                                                      Data




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                          311
Verifying a Backup


Verifying a Backup
              In addition to the verification of files that is done when a backup or archive job runs, you
              can submit verify jobs to test the integrity of the media.
              If the Write checksums to media option is selected as a default backup option, checksums
              are calculated for each data stream written to tape, and then written in a separate stream
              immediately following the data stream. If this option is not selected, backup performance
              may be improved, but there will be no way to verify the integrity of the data on the tape.
              Performing a verify operation when there are no checksums written for the set only
              verifies that the set can be read without getting a translation error.
              If you perform a verify operation and files fail to verify, the media may be bad. Details
              about files that failed to verify are provided in the job log, which can be viewed from the
              Job Monitor.

        ▼     To create a verify job:

              1. On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.

              2. Under Backup Tasks in the task pane, select New job to verify backup data.

              3. Select the media you want to verify.

              Note The default view is the Resource view, which lists data by the device from which it
                   was backed up. The Media view lists the data that is contained on a piece of media.
                   To switch views, under View by, select the view you want to use. In addition, you
                   can set Backup Exec to display the selections in a graphic format or a text format. To
                   switch the format, select either Graphical or Text from the View format section.


              4. On the Properties pane, under Destination, click Device.

              5. Select the device that contains the media you want to verify.

              6. On the Properties pane, under Settings, click General.

              7. Select the appropriate options as follows:

                  General Verify dialog box

                  Item                        Description

                  Job Name                    Type a name that describes the data you are verifying.




        312                                                                                Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                               Verifying a Backup

                General Verify dialog box

                Job priority                Select the priority level for this job. If another job is scheduled to
                                            run at the same time as this job, the priority you set determines
                                            which job runs first. Your choices are:
                                               Highest
                                               High
                                               Medium
                                               Low
                                               Lowest

            8. If you want Backup Exec to notify someone when the backup job completes, on the
               Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification (see “Selecting Recipients for Job
               Notification” on page 509).

            9. If you want to run the job now, click Run Now. Otherwise, on the Properties pane,
               under Frequency, click Schedule to set the scheduling options you want to use (see
               “Scheduling Jobs” on page 374).
            After verification has completed, you can check the results in the job log.
            See also:
                “Setting Default Backup Options” on page 320
                “Verify after backup completes” on page 310




                                                                                                                     Backing Up
                                                                                                                        Data




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                            313
Creating a Test Run Job


Creating a Test Run Job
              The Backup Exec test run option determines if a scheduled backup will complete
              successfully. When you run a test job, you can monitor the job just as you would a normal
              backup job, but no data is backed up. During the test run, the tape capacity, credentials,
              and media are checked. If there is an error, the job will continue to run and the error will
              appear in the job log. Notification can also be sent to a designated recipient.
              During a test run job, the following may cause a job to fail:
              ◆   The logon credentials are incorrect.
              ◆   Insufficient media is available.
              ◆   Media is not in the drive.
              ◆   There is no overwritable media for an overwrite job.
              ◆   There is no appendable media for an append job.
              Test run jobs that are targeted to All Drives will fail the test if any of the devices in the All
              Drives drive pool cannot handle the job. For example, if one of the devices does not have
              any media.
              A test run job checks media capacity available for the selected job. However, you can
              check if there is enough available media for multiple test run jobs in the Test Run Results
              report.

              Note Before you create a test run job, VERITAS recommends that you run backup jobs to
                   your devices first. Backup Exec does not recognize the capacity of a backup device
                   until an actual backup job is targeted to the device. If you create a test run job before
                   any other jobs, Backup Exec cannot check that the device has sufficient capacity to
                   perform the backup job. After at least one backup job has been targeted to a device,
                   Backup Exec can determine the capacity.


        ▼     To create a test run of a job:

              1. On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.

              2. In the Jobs pane, select the job for which you want to create a test run.

              3. Under General Tasks, click Test Run.

              4. Select General options as described in “General Options for Test Run Jobs” on
                 page 316.




        314                                                                                Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                Creating a Test Run Job


            5. If you want Backup Exec to notify a recipient when the backup job completes, on the
               Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification (see “Selecting Recipients for Job
               Notification” on page 509).

            6. If you want to run the job now, click Run Now. Otherwise, on the Properties pane,
               under Frequency, click Schedule to set the scheduling options you want to use (see
               “Scheduling Jobs” on page 374).
            See also:
                “Viewing General Media Properties” on page 226
                “Creating a Manual Backup Job by Configuring Job Properties” on page 242
                “Test Run Results Report” on page 546




                                                                                                          Backing Up
                                                                                                             Data




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                315
Creating a Test Run Job


        General Options for Test Run Jobs
              General settings options for test run job




              General options for a test run job include:

              General settings options for test run job

              Item                        Description

              Job name                    Type a name for the test run job.

              Credentials check           Select this check box to verify that the Backup Exec logon account is
                                          correct for the resources being backed up.

              Media capacity check to Select this check box to test if there is enough available capacity on the
              complete individual job media to complete the job.
                                          Note During the test run job, the number of scheduled jobs in the
                                               queue is not checked; therefore, jobs that are scheduled before the
                                               test run job may use the media that was available when the test
                                               run job was performed.

              Media check                 Select this check box to test whether the media is online and
                                          overwritable.




        316                                                                                   Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                             Creating a Test Run Job

            General settings options for test run job (continued)

            Item                        Description

            Method for determining job size

            Use previous job            Select this option to use past job histories to determine whether there is
            history, if available       enough media available to run the scheduled backup job. Checking the
                                        previous job history is faster than performing a pre-scan.

            Perform Pre-scan            Select this option to enable Backup Exec to scan the scheduled backup
                                        job to determine whether there is enough media available to run the job.
                                        This is the most accurate method of determining media capacity and
                                        should be selected if there is not an existing job history.

            Upon any failure, place     Select this option to have the scheduled job placed on hold if any
            the scheduled job on        failures are detected during the test run.
            hold

            Run at priority             Select the priority level for the test job. If another job is scheduled to run
                                        at the same time as this job, the priority you set determines which job
                                        runs first. Your choices are:
                                           Highest
                                           High
                                           Medium
                                           Low
                                           Lowest

            See also:
                “Viewing General Media Properties” on page 226
                “Creating a Manual Backup Job by Configuring Job Properties” on page 242
                “Test Run Results Report” on page 546




                                                                                                                         Backing Up
                                                                                                                            Data




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                               317
Creating a Test Run Job


        Setting Test Run Default Options
        ▼     To set test run default options:

              1. On the Tools menu, click Options.

              2. On the Properties pane, under Job Defaults, click Test Run.

                 Test Run default options




        318                                                                    Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                           Creating a Test Run Job


            3. Select the appropriate options as follows:

                Default options for test run jobs

                Item                       Description

                Check credentials          Select this check box to verify that the Backup Exec logon account is
                                           correct for the resources being backed up.

                Check media capacity       Select this check box to test if there is enough available capacity on
                to complete job            the media to complete the job.
                                           Note During the test run job, the number of scheduled jobs in the
                                                queue is not checked; therefore, jobs that are scheduled before
                                                the test run job may use the media that was available when the
                                                test run job was performed.

                Check media                Select this check box to test whether the media is online and
                availability               overwritable.

                Use previous job           Select this option to use past job histories to determine whether
                history, if available      there is enough media available to run the scheduled backup job.
                                           Checking the previous job history is faster than performing a
                                           pre-scan.

                Perform Pre-scan           Select this option to enable Backup Exec to scan the scheduled
                                           backup job to determine whether there is enough media available to
                                           run the job. This is the most accurate method of determining media
                                           capacity and should be selected if there is not an existing job history.

                Place the job on hold if Select this option to have the scheduled job placed on hold if any
                any failure occurs       failures are detected during the test run.


            4. Click OK.




                                                                                                                      Backing Up
                                                                                                                         Data




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                            319
Setting Default Backup Options


Setting Default Backup Options
              You can set up Backup Exec with the settings that you want to use for most backup
              operations, such as the backup method and compression type. If the default options are
              not appropriate for a particular backup job, you can override the default options when
              you set up a backup job.

        ▼     To configure backup options:

              1. On the Tools menu, click Options.

              2. On the Properties pane, under Job Defaults, click Backup.

                  Default backup options




        320                                                                        Administrator’s Guide
                                                                              Setting Default Backup Options


            3.   Select the appropriate options as follows:

                 Backup default options

                 Item                       Definition

                 Backup method for files    Select the default Backup method. FULL - Back Up Files - Reset
                                            Archive Bit is the typical selection for this field. For more
                                            information about backup methods, see “Understanding Backup
                                            Methods and Their Advantages” on page 355.

                 Files accessed in x days   When the Working Set backup method is selected, use this field to
                                            specify the number of days for which to include accessed files.




                                                                                                                Backing Up
                                                                                                                   Data




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                        321
Setting Default Backup Options


                 Backup default options (continued)

                 Item                       Definition

                 Media overwrite            Select one of the following media overwrite options:
                 protection                     Overwrite media. Select this option to place this backup on an
                                                overwritable media. Make sure that appropriate media is in
                                                the stand-alone drive or drive pool you select in the Device
                                                field in this dialog box.
                                                The media in the drive is overwritten if the media is scratch or
                                                recyclable (its overwrite protection period has expired). If
                                                allocated or imported media are in the drive, they may also be
                                                overwritten depending on the Media Overwrite Protection
                                                Level that is set. For more information, see “Media Overwrite
                                                Protection Levels” on page 196.
                                                If the media in the drive is not overwritable, a message is
                                                displayed requesting that you insert overwritable media.
                                                Append to media, overwrite if no appendable media is
                                                available. Select this option to add this backup to the media
                                                set listed in the Media Set field in the General applications
                                                dialog box (see “Options - Set Application Defaults -
                                                Preferences” on page 91). The backup set is appended if an
                                                appendable media is available in the selected media set; if not,
                                                an overwritable media is used and added to the media set.
                                                If an append job fills a media, the job continues on another
                                                piece of overwritable media.
                                                Depending on your configuration, overwritable media is
                                                selected from Scratch media or Recyclable media. For more
                                                information, see “Media Overwrite Options” on page 198.
                                                If the media in the drive is not overwritable, a message is
                                                displayed requesting that you insert overwritable media.
                                                Append to media, terminate job if no appendable media is
                                                available. Select this option to add this backup to the media
                                                set listed in the Media Set field in the General applications
                                                dialog box (see “Options - Set Application Defaults -
                                                Preferences” on page 91). The backup set is appended if an
                                                appendable media is available in the selected media set; if not,
                                                the job is terminated.




        322                                                                                Administrator’s Guide
                                                                               Setting Default Backup Options


                Backup default options (continued)

                Item                       Definition

                Compression type           Select one of the following compression types:
                                               None. Select this option to copy the data to the media in its
                                               original form (uncompressed).
                                           Note Using some form of data compression can help expedite
                                                backups and preserve storage media space.
                                               Software. Select this option to use STAC™ software data
                                               compression, which compresses the data before it is sent to
                                               the storage device.
                                               Hardware [if available, otherwise none]. Select this option to
                                               use hardware data compression (if the storage device
                                               supports it). If the drive does not feature data compression,
                                               the data is backed up uncompressed.
                                               Hardware [if available, otherwise software]. Select this
                                               option to use hardware data compression (if the storage
                                               device supports it). If the drive does not feature hardware
                                               data compression, STAC software compression is used.

                Verify after backup        Select this option if you want backups to be verified after they are
                                           completed. Verify operations make sure the media can be read
                                           once the backup has been completed. Verifying all backups is
                                           recommended.

                Write checksums to         Select this option if checksums are to be calculated for each data
                media                      stream written to tape, and then written in a separate stream
                                           immediately following the data stream. If this option is not
                                           selected, backup performance may be improved, but there is no
                                           way to verify the integrity of the data on the tape; Backup Exec
                                           can only verify that the data can be read from the device.




                                                                                                                  Backing Up
                                                                                                                     Data




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                         323
Setting Default Backup Options


                 Backup default options (continued)

                 Item                       Definition

                 Back up files and          Select this check box to back up the information for the junction
                 directories by following   points and the files and directories to which they are linked. If this
                 junction points            check box is not selected, then only the information for the
                                            junction points is backed up; the files and directories to which
                                            they are linked are not backed up.
                                            If you use junction points created by linkd.exe (or a similar tool)
                                            to span volumes, then Advanced Open File Option (AOFO)
                                            backups and Change Journal incremental backups will not follow
                                            the junction points properly. To perform AOFO and Change
                                            Journal incremental backups of volumes with junction points,
                                            clear this option. Junction points created by Disk Manager or
                                            mountvol.exe are supported.
                                            Note Since Mounted Drives that do not have a drive letter
                                                 assigned to them cannot be selected, the files and directories
                                                 to which they are linked are backed up regardless of
                                                 whether this option is selected.

                                                  If this option is selected and the actual files and directories
                                                  to which the junction points are linked are also included in
                                                  the backup selections, then the files and directories are
                                                  backed up twice; once during the full file and directory
                                                  backup, and again via the junction point.
                                            WARNING: If a junction point is linked to a location that
                                            encompasses it, then recursion (a situation where data is backed
                                            up repeatedly) will occur, resulting in an error and job failure. For
                                            example, if c:\junctionpoint is linked to c:\, recursion will occur
                                            when attempting to back up c:\junctionpoint, and the backup job
                                            will fail.




        324                                                                                  Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                 Setting Default Backup Options


                Backup default options (continued)

                Item                       Definition

                Back up data in Remote     Select this check box to back up data that has been migrated from
                Storage                    primary storage to secondary storage. The data will not be
                                           recalled to its original location; it will be backed up directly to the
                                           backup media.
                                           If this option is selected, you should not run a backup of your
                                           entire system because Backup Exec will have to load the data that
                                           has been migrated to secondary storage and additional time will
                                           be required for any set that includes migrated data.
                                           If this check box is cleared, only the placeholder that stores the
                                           location of the data on secondary storage will be backed up, not
                                           the data itself.
                                           Note This option should not be selected if the device used for
                                                secondary storage and backups contains only one drive
                                                because Remote Storage and Backup Exec will compete for
                                                use of the drive.

                Use Change Journal if      Select this option if you want to use Windows’ NTFS Change
                available                  Journal to determine which files have been modified since the last
                                           full backup. This option can only be used with NTFS volumes and
                                           only when the backup method selected is FULL - Back Up Files
                                           - Allow incrementals and differentials using modified
                                           time, DIFFERENTIAL - Using modified time or
                                           INCREMENTAL - Using modified time.




                                                                                                                     Backing Up
                                                                                                                        Data




Chapter 6, Backing Up Data                                                                            325
Setting Default Backup Options

                 Backup default options (continued)

                 Item                       Definition

                 Enable single instance     Select this option if you want Backup Exec to protect Single
                 backup for NTFS            Instance Store (SIS) volumes. SIS, which is used by Remote
                 volumes                    Installation Services to save disk space, maintains a single
                                            physical copy of all identical files on a specified volume. If SIS
                                            finds an identical file on the volume, a copy of the original file is
                                            placed in the SIS and a link is made to the actual physical location.
                                            By selecting this option, Backup Exec will back up the physical
                                            file one time, no matter how many links have been created.

                                            Caution If the backup job does not run to completion, the
                                                    file data may not be included in the backup set.
                                                    Rerun the backup until it is successfully
                                                    completed.

                                                         If the incremental backup method was used,
                                                         running the job again will not back up the same
                                                         files. You must run a full or copy backup to
                                                         ensure that all files are backed up completely. If
                                                         the incremental - using modified time backup
                                                         method was used, running the same backup job
                                                         to completion will back up the files correctly.




        326                                                                                 Administrator’s Guide
                                                                                Setting Default Backup Options


                Backup default options (continued)

                Item                       Definition

                Open file backup when Advanced Open File Option is not used

                Never                      Select this option to have Backup Exec skip open files if they are
                                           encountered during the backup operation. A listing of skipped
                                           files appears in the job log for the backup.

                If closed within x         Select this option to have Backup Exec wait the specified time
                seconds                    interval for files to close before skipping the open file and
                                           continuing the backup operation.
                                           If the file does not close during the specified interval, it is
                                           skipped. A listing of skipped files appears in the job log for the
                                           backup.
                                           Note If multiple files are open, Backup Exec waits the specified
                                                time interval for each file; depending on the number of
                                                open files, this may significantly increase the backup time.

                With a lock                Select this option to have Backup Exec attempt to open files that
                                           are in use. If Backup Exec is able to open a file, the file is locked
                                           while it is being backed up to prevent other processes from
                                           writing to it. Backing up open files is not as effective as closing
                                           applications and allowing the files to be backed up in a consistent
                                           state.

                Without a lock             Select this option to have Backup Exec attempt to open an in use.
                                           If Backup Exec is able to open the file, the file is N